JP2020089784A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of executing a highly entertaining performance.SOLUTION: A game machine 1 can execute a winning notification performance for notifying a player that a special game is determined to be executed and a final notification performance for notifying the player that a special game is executed prior to the winning notification performance. The game machine 1 includes a first case in which the final notification performance is executed at a first execution timing and a second case in which the final notification performance is executed at a second execution timing. In the first and second cases, at least one of the execution condition and the performance mode of the final notification performance is different.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 20

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine provided with a production control unit that controls execution of production.

For example, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine, when a game ball wins at the starting opening, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and the result of the above determination is displayed after the special symbol is variably displayed. The special symbol is stopped and displayed. For example, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, based on the result of the above determination, an effect of expecting a jackpot is executed during the variable display of the special symbol, and when the right to the above determination is withheld, the determination is made. The so-called look-ahead effect is executed based on the result of the pre-determination for the right.

JP, 2014-90853, A

By the way, it cannot be said that the effect produced by the conventional game machine has sufficient entertainment, and further improvement in entertainment is required.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of executing a highly entertaining effect.

The gaming machine of the first invention for solving the above-mentioned problems,
Determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player,
Special game execution means for executing the special game when the determination means determines to execute the special game,
And a production control means for controlling execution of production,
The effect control means,
It is possible to execute a hit notification effect that notifies that the special game is determined when the special game is executed, and a confirmation notification effect that notifies that the special game is executed prior to the hit notification effect. ,
There are a first case in which the confirmation notification effect is executed at a first execution timing and a second case in which the confirmation notification effect is executed at a second execution timing.
The first case and the second case are characterized in that at least one of the execution condition and the effect mode of the final notification effect is different.

According to this configuration, the confirmation notification effect executed at the second execution timing differs from the confirmation notification effect executed at the first execution timing in at least one of the execution condition and the effect mode. In this way, since at least one of the execution condition and the effect mode of the final notification effect changes according to the execution timing of the final notification effect, both the execution condition and the effect mode are set regardless of the execution timing of the final notification effect. By being fixed, it is possible to effectively suppress the problem that the finalization notification effect becomes monotonous and the effective finalization notification effect cannot be executed.

According to the present invention, it is possible to execute a production with a high degree of interest.

Front view of gaming machine 1 Front view of game board 2 Enlarged view of the main display 40 in FIG. Explanatory drawing for explaining opening/closing control of the second special winning opening 28 and V winning opening 287. Block diagram showing a configuration example of a control device provided in the gaming machine 1 Explanatory diagram for explaining jackpot random numbers and symbol random numbers Time chart for explaining jackpot games Explanatory drawing for explaining the flow of the game in the gaming machine 1. Explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of reach production Explanatory diagram for explaining the variation pattern selection table used in the process of selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol in the normal gaming state The screen figure which illustrates the production of the 1st normal mode in the normal game state (the 1) The screen figure which illustrates the production of the 1st normal mode in the normal game state (the 2) The screen figure which shows the production example when V winning a prize is notified during the big hit game The screen figure which shows the example of production when V winning a prize is not notified during the big hit game Explanatory drawing for explaining stage suggestion production Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the table used for the process which determines the number of productions of the production during the period suggested by the stage suggestion production. Detailed flowchart of the stage suggestive effect pattern setting process in step S172 of FIG. 57. Screen diagram showing a concrete example of stage suggestion production The screen figure which illustrates the production performed after the stage suggestion production is completed. Explanatory diagram exemplifying the features of each confirmation notification effect executable by the gaming machine 1. Explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot reliability of the hold icon (and the icon) and the expected image Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the jackpot reliability which a combination of a hold icon and an expected image has. Screen diagram showing a specific example of the reliability suggestive pair display effect The screen figure which shows the specific example of 1st expected production and 2nd expected production (the 1) The screen figure which shows the specific example of 1st expected production and 2nd expected production (the 2) A time chart for explaining the first expected effect, the second expected effect, and the third expected effect A time chart for explaining a modification of the first expected effect and the second expected effect The schematic diagram for demonstrating arrangement|positioning of the 1st starting opening 21 and each light emission group. Time chart for explaining the lighting effect Explanatory drawing for demonstrating each production suggestion image displayed by prior suggestion production. Screen diagram showing a concrete example of pre-indication production Screen diagram illustrating the effect after the preliminary suggestion effect has been performed Time chart for explaining the pre-indication production Explanatory drawing for explaining 2 types of predictive production (expected production) and 4 types of suggestive production Explanatory drawing for demonstrating each icon displayed in 3rd normal mode. The screen figure which illustrates the icon multiplication production in which the production image which concerns on hold suggestion display propagates The screen figure which illustrates the icon multiplication production in which the production image which concerns on a change suggestion display propagates. Explanatory diagram for explaining a storage area of the main RAM 83 and information stored in each storage area Flowchart illustrating interrupt processing executed in the main control board 80 Detailed flowchart of the sensor detection process in step S2 of FIG. 39. Detailed flowchart of the pre-determination processing in steps S 211 and 219 of FIG. 40. Detailed flowchart of the special symbol processing in step S3 of FIG. 39. Detailed flowchart of the jackpot determination process in step S308 of FIG. A detailed flowchart of the variation pattern selection process in step S309 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the special figure stop processing in step S317 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the special winning opening opening/closing control process in step S6 of FIG. 39 (No. 1) Detailed flowchart of the special winning opening opening/closing control process in step S6 of FIG. 39 (Part 2) Detailed flowchart of the special winning opening opening/closing control process in step S6 of FIG. 39 (Part 3) Flowchart illustrating the main processing executed in the sub control board 90 A detailed flowchart of the first interrupt process in step S51 of FIG. 49. Detailed flowchart of the icon change effect pattern setting process in step S517 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of expected image change effect pattern setting processing in step S518 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of expected effect pattern setting processing in step S519 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the indication effect pattern setting process in step S521 of FIG. A detailed flowchart of the second interrupt process in step S53 of FIG. 49. Detailed flowchart of the command reception process in step S10 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the fluctuation start command reception process in step S16 of FIG. 57 is a detailed flowchart of the variable effect pattern setting process in step S163 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the notice effect pattern setting process in step S164 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the basic notice effect pattern setting process in step S165 of FIG. 59. A detailed flowchart of the confirmation notification effect pattern setting process in step S166 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the pre-indication production effect pattern setting process in step S167 of FIG. 59. Detailed flowchart of the round game start command reception processing in step S23 of FIG. Detailed flowchart of the V winning command reception process in step S26 of FIG. Flowchart illustrating interrupt processing executed in the image and sound control board 100 A detailed flowchart of the image display control process in step S71 of FIG. Flowchart illustrating an interrupt process executed in the lamp control board 120

Hereinafter, a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine) 1 according to an embodiment of the gaming machine of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings as appropriate.

[Example of configuration of gaming machine 1]
First, a configuration example of the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 1 is a front view of the game machine 1, and FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 2. As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the gaming machine 1 includes a gaming machine frame 30 and a gaming board 2 mounted in the gaming machine frame 30. The gaming machine frame 30 includes a front frame 31 having a decorative surface, a main body frame for mounting the gaming board 2 and the like, and an outer frame for fixing the gaming machine 1 to the island facility of the hall. There is. The front frame 31 supports a glass plate arranged in parallel with the game board 2 at a predetermined interval, and the glass plate and the game board 2 form a game area 3 in which a game ball can flow down. ing.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, in the front frame 31, a firing handle 32 for firing a game ball, an upper plate 33 for storing the game ball supplied to a launching device (not shown), and an upper plate A lower plate 34 for storing game balls that cannot be stored in 33 is provided. When the player holds the firing handle 32 and rotates it in the clockwise direction, the game balls stored in the upper plate 33 are guided to the firing device and are fired at a firing strength according to the rotation angle of the firing handle 32. The game ball that has been launched is guided to the upper position of the game area 3 after moving along the rail member 4 located on the left side of the game area 3, and comes into contact with a game nail, a windmill, or the like provided in the game area 3. This allows the game area 3 to flow down along the game board 2 while changing its moving direction.

A ball return prevention piece 6 is provided at the end of the rail member 4, and the ball return prevention piece 6 prevents the game ball once entering the game area 3 from returning to the launcher side. Further, a stop button is provided in a position close to the firing handle 32, and the player operates the stop button to temporarily launch the game ball without returning the firing handle 32 to the initial posture. It can be stopped.

When the player performs "left hitting" by rotating the firing handle 32 by a small rotation angle, the game ball is fired with a relatively weak firing strength, and the game ball flows down the left game area 3L. On the other hand, when the player performs "right hitting" by rotating the launch handle 32 by a large rotation angle, the game ball is launched with a relatively high launch strength, and the game ball is positioned above and to the right of the center ornament 10. After moving along the rail member 4, the right game area 3R flows down.

A first starting opening 21, a second starting opening 22, an opening/closing member 23, and three general winning openings 24 are provided in the passage path of the game ball in the left game area 3L as a winning or determination feature. See FIG. 2). In addition, in the passage path of the game ball in the right game area 3R, as a winning or determination feature, the second starting opening 22, the opening/closing member 23, one general winning opening 24, the gate 25, the first big winning opening. 26, an opening/closing member 27, a second special winning opening 28, and an opening/closing member 29 are provided (see FIG. 2).

The game ball launched from the launching device flows down the game area 3 along the game board 2 in the process of the first starting opening 21, the second starting opening 22, the general winning opening 24, the first big winning opening 26, and There is a case where a prize is won in any of the second big winning openings 28. In this case, a predetermined number of prize balls according to the place where the prize is won are paid out to the upper plate 33 or the lower plate 34. For example, four prize balls are paid out every time one game ball is won in the first starting opening 21, and one prize ball is paid every one game ball is winning in the second starting opening 22. It is paid out, and every time one game ball is won in the general winning opening 24, five prize balls are paid out. Also, 15 prize balls are paid out each time one game ball is won in the first special winning opening 26, and 15 prizes are given each time one game ball is winning in the second special winning opening 28. The ball is paid out. The game balls that have not won any prize are discharged from the game area 3 through a discharge port formed at the lower end of the game board 2.

A center ornament 10 is provided in the opening formed in the center of the game board 2. This center decoration 10 is configured to have a stage portion 11 having a game ball rolling surface on which a game ball can roll, and a warp portion 12 having a warp entrance and a warp exit as both ends. The game ball flowing down the left game area 3L may enter the warp section 12 from the warp entrance, and this game ball is discharged from the warp exit and guided to the stage section 11. A guide groove for dropping the game ball rolling on the stage portion 11 toward the first starting opening 21 is formed at the center position of the stage portion 11 on the left and right. Therefore, the game ball guided to the stage unit 11 via the warp unit 12 wins in the first starting opening 21 as compared with the game ball flowing down the left game area 3L without passing through the warp unit 12. easy.

The first starting port 21 is a starting region that is always open. The second starting port 22 is a starting region that is normally closed when the opening/closing member 23 as an electric accessory is not operating and is opened when the opening/closing member 23 is operated. In the gaming machine 1, when the game ball wins the first starting opening 21 (or the second starting opening 22), it is determined whether or not to execute a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player. Then, in the first special symbol display device 41 (or the second special symbol display device 42) described later, the symbols are variably displayed, and the symbols showing the results of the above determination (big hit symbols or lost symbols) are stopped and displayed. Here, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, a jackpot game in which the first jackpot opening 26 and the second jackpot opening 28 are opened is executed.

In the following description, the determination executed according to the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 21 is referred to as “first special symbol determination”, and is performed according to the winning of the gaming ball to the second starting opening 22. The determination is referred to as "second special symbol determination", and these are collectively referred to as "special symbol determination".

The first special winning opening 26 is a special winning area that is opened according to the result of the second special symbol determination. An opening/closing member 27, which is a plate for opening and closing the first special winning opening 26, is provided at the opening of the first special winning opening 26. The first special winning opening 26 is normally closed by the opening/closing member 27. On the other hand, when a predetermined big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 42, a big hit game in which the opening/closing member 27 is operated to open the first big winning opening 26 is executed. During this jackpot game, there are a plurality of long open round games in which the opening/closing member 27 maintains the open posture (see FIG. 2) that opens the first big winning opening 26 and then returns to the closed posture that closes the first big winning opening 26. Is done once. In addition, each long open round game that opens the first big winning opening 26, in the present embodiment, 10 gaming balls win the first big winning opening 26, or the first big winning opening 26 opens. It continues until 25 seconds have passed since the game was started (without 10 game balls winning the first big winning opening 26). In this way, during the jackpot game, a plurality of long open round games in which the first big winning opening 26 (or the second big winning opening 28) is long opened are played, so that the player makes a right hit during the big winning game. By doing this, more prize balls can be obtained compared to when the jackpot game is not being played.

The second big winning opening 28 is a special winning area that is opened according to the result of the first special symbol determination (or the second special symbol determination). An opening/closing member 29 that is a blade member that opens and closes the second special winning opening 28 is provided at the opening of the second special winning opening 28. The second special winning opening 28 is normally closed by the opening/closing member 29. On the other hand, when the predetermined big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 (or the second special symbol display 42), the opening/closing member 29 is operated to open the second special winning opening 28. The jackpot game is executed. During this jackpot game, the open/close member 29 maintains the open posture (see FIG. 2) for opening the second special winning opening 28, and then returns to the closed posture for closing the second big winning opening 28. Be seen. The round game for opening and closing the second special winning opening 28 will be described later in detail with reference to FIG. 7.

For convenience of explanation, in FIG. 2, the opening/closing members 27 and 29 are in the open posture in which the special winning openings 26 and 28 are opened when the effect symbols are variably displayed on the display screen 70 of the image display device 7. Although the state is shown, the opening/closing members 27 and 29 do not actually take the open posture during the variable display of the effect symbols. Further, in each round game of the jackpot game, since either one of the first big winning opening 26 and the second big winning opening 28 is used, in reality, as shown in FIG. It will never be released. Further, whether to perform the jackpot game using both the first big winning opening 26 and the second big winning opening 28, or whether to play the big hit using only the second big winning opening 28 depends on the type of the big hit. Are set in advance (see FIGS. 6B and 6C).

An opening/closing member 23 (see FIG. 2) is arranged close to the second starting port 22. The opening/closing member 23 can change its posture between a closed posture in which the opening/closing member 23 closes the second starting port 22 and an opening posture (see FIG. 2) in which the second starting port 22 is opened.

The second starting port 22 is normally closed by an opening/closing member 23. On the other hand, when the game ball hit by the player to the right passes through the gate 25, it is determined whether or not to open the second starting opening 22, although the prize ball is not paid out. Here, when it is determined that the second starting port 22 is to be opened, the opening/closing member 23 maintains the open posture for a predetermined time and then returns to the closed posture for a predetermined number of times. In this way, the second starting port 22 is in a state in which the game ball does not easily pass when the opening/closing member 23 is not operating, whereas the state in which the game ball easily passes by operating the opening/closing member 23 Become.

In the following description, the determination executed on the condition that the game ball passes through the gate 25 will be referred to as "normal symbol determination".

The general winning opening 24 is always opened like the first starting opening 21, and is a winning opening in which a predetermined number (five in this embodiment) of winning balls are paid out by winning a game ball. However, unlike the first starting opening 21 and the like, the determination is not made even if the game ball wins the general winning opening 24.

[Configuration Example of Main Display 40]
FIG. 3 is an enlarged view of the main display 40 in FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 3, the main display 40 is a first special symbol display 41, a second special symbol display 42, an ordinary symbol display 43, a first special symbol reservation display 44, a second special symbol. It is configured to have a hold indicator 45, a universal figure hold indicator 46, a round indicator 47, a game state indicator 48, a launch direction indicator 49, and the like.

The first special symbol display 41 is configured with eight LEDs indicated by "i-p", and when the first special symbol determination is performed, the first special symbol is displayed after the symbols are variably displayed. The determination result of the first special symbol determination is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol indicating the determination result of the determination. Specifically, for example, the symbols are variably displayed by sequentially turning on the eight LEDs, and each LED is set for a predetermined set time (for example, 0.5 in a combination according to the determination result of the first special symbol determination). The symbol is stopped and displayed by turning on the light.

The second special symbol display 42 is configured with eight LEDs indicated by "a to h", and when the second special symbol determination is performed, the second special symbol is displayed after the symbols are variably displayed. The determination result of the second special symbol determination is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol indicating the determination result of the determination. Specifically, for example, a variable display of symbols is performed by sequentially turning on the eight LEDs, and each LED is set for a predetermined fixed time (for example, 0.5 in a combination according to the determination result of the second special symbol determination). The symbol is stopped and displayed by turning on the light.

In the first special symbol display 41 (or second special symbol display 42), as a symbol showing the determination result of the first special symbol determination (or second special symbol determination), "big hit" “Design” or “missing design” for notifying that it is a loss is stopped and displayed. In the gaming machine 1, a plurality of jackpot patterns different from each other depending on the type of jackpot are prepared, and when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, the first jackpot 26 or the open pattern according to the type of the jackpot symbol 26 or A jackpot game in which the second big winning opening 28 is opened is played.

The normal symbol display 43 is configured with two LEDs indicated by "s to t", and when the normal symbol determination is performed, the symbols are variably displayed and then the determination result of the normal symbol determination is shown. The judgment result of the normal symbol judgment is notified by stopping and displaying the symbol. Specifically, for example, a variable display of symbols is performed by alternately turning on the above two LEDs, and each LED is turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) in a lighting mode according to the determination result of the ordinary symbol determination. The symbol is stopped and displayed by turning it on. Here, when the winning symbol is stopped and displayed, an auxiliary game for opening the second starting opening 22 by operating the opening/closing member 23 in an opening pattern according to the current game state is performed.

In the following description, the symbols displayed on the first special symbol display 41 and the second special symbol display 42 are called "special symbols", and the symbols displayed on the normal symbol display 43 are "normal symbols". Shall be called. Also, the special symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 41 is called "first special symbol", the special symbol displayed on the second special symbol display device 42 is called "second special symbol", and both are called. May be distinguished.

The 1st special figure reservation indicator 44 is constituted by having two LEDs shown by "u-v", and displays the number of reservations of the 1st special symbol judgment by the lighting mode of these LEDs. The 2nd special figure reservation indicator 45 is constituted by having two LEDs shown by "wx", and displays the number of reservations of the 2nd special symbol judgment by the lighting mode of these LEDs. In addition, in the present embodiment, the upper limits of the numbers of these reservations are all set to "4". The ordinary figure holding indicator 46 is configured to have two LEDs indicated by "q to r", and displays the number of holdings of the normal symbol determination by the lighting mode of these LEDs.

The round display 47 is a jackpot game that is executed according to the jackpot corresponding to the jackpot symbol, as the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol indicator 41 or the second special symbol indicator 42. The number of rounds indicating how many rounds the game is executed is displayed. In the present embodiment, the round indicator 47 is configured to have an LED for 5R, an LED for 7R, and an LED for 9R, and the number of rounds is notified by turning on any of these LEDs. To be done.

The gaming status indicator 48 is configured to have three LEDs indicated by "a1 to a3", and displays the gaming status of the gaming machine 1 by the lighting mode of these LEDs. The firing direction indicator 49 is configured to have two LEDs indicated by "y to z", and displays the firing direction of the game ball by the lighting mode of these LEDs. That is, it is displayed whether the left-handed stroke should be performed or the right-handed stroke should be performed.

[Configuration Example of Rendering Means Provided to Gaming Machine 1]
As illustrated in FIGS. 1 and 2, the game board 2 and the front frame 31 are provided with various effects such as a decorative member 13, a movable decorative member 14, a frame lamp 37, a speaker 38, and an effect display 125. An effect first special figure reservation display device 126, an effect second special figure reservation display device 127, etc. are provided. An image display device 7 is provided behind the game board 2.

The decoration member 13 has a built-in panel lamp 5 (see FIG. 5) having a plurality of LEDs, and changes the lighting or blinking pattern of each LED or the emission color of each LED. By doing, various effects by light are performed.

The movable decoration member 14 is arranged in front of the image display device 7 and behind the decoration member 13. The movable decoration member 14 has a plurality of LEDs built therein, and the movable decoration member 14 performs a predetermined effect by the movement of the movable decoration member 14 and/or light. In the present embodiment, a predetermined space in which the movable decorative member 14 can operate is provided between the game board 2 and the display screen 70 of the image display device 7. The movable decorative member 14 extends along the display screen 70. It is configured to move up and down. The movable decorative member 14 is usually arranged at an initial position (see FIG. 2) in which most of the movable decorative member 14 is hidden behind the decorative member 13 and only the lower end portion of the movable decorative member 14 is visible. On the other hand, the movable decoration member 14 emits light in a predetermined light emission pattern and displays on the display screen 70 when a notice effect having a relatively high jackpot reliability is executed using the image display device 7 and the speaker 38. It falls into an operating position that covers most of it.

The frame lamp 37 is configured to have a plurality of LEDs incorporated in various parts of the front frame 31, and it is possible to change the lighting or blinking pattern of each LED or change the emission color of each LED. Depending on the light, various effects are performed.

The image display device 7 is a liquid crystal display device that displays an effect image on the display screen 70, and the player can visually recognize the display screen 70 through an opening formed in the center of the game board 2. On this display screen 70, the effect design for notifying the determination result of the special symbol determination, the character or the item, the reserved image that is displayed in the same number as the number reserved for the first special symbol determination (or the second special symbol determination) (holding) Icon), a production image including various display objects such as a variation suggestion image (the icon) that suggests that the special symbol is being displayed in variation. The image display device 7 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device as long as it can display the effect image, and may be another image display device such as an EL display device.

The speaker 38 outputs an effect sound such as a music piece, a voice, or a sound effect so as to be synchronized with the display effect performed on the display screen 70, or asynchronously, to perform an effect by the sound.

The effect indicator 125 is configured to have two LEDs, and variably displays the symbol along with the variable display of the special symbol and the effect symbol, and the special symbol determination along with the stop display of the special symbol and the effect symbol. The symbol for notifying the determination result of is stopped and displayed. The effect display device 125 notifies the determination result of the special symbol determination by a combination of lighting and extinguishing of each LED and a lighting color.

The effect first special figure reservation indicator 126 is configured to have two LEDs, and is the same as the one displayed on the first special figure reservation indicator 44 depending on the combination of turning on and off each LED. Display the number of 1 special symbol hold. The effect second special figure reservation indicator 127 is configured to have two LEDs, and is the same as that displayed on the second special figure reservation indicator 45 depending on the combination of lighting and extinction of each LED. 2 Display the number of reserved special symbols.

[Example of Configuration of Input Means Provided to Gaming Machine 1]
As illustrated in FIG. 1, the front frame 31 is provided with a first effect button 35 and a second effect button 36 as input means that can be input by the player. The first effect button 35 is a push button for inputting operation information when the player presses it. The second effect button 36 is a push button for the player to input operation information by holding the grip portion of the second effect button 36 and pressing the second effect button 36. In the gaming machine 1, an effect corresponding to the operation of the first effect button 35 or the second effect button 36 may be performed.

Further, the first effect button 35 has a built-in first effect button lamp (not shown) configured to have a plurality of color LEDs for causing the first effect button 35 to emit light, and the second effect button 36 has A second effect button lamp (not shown) configured to have a plurality of color LEDs for causing the second effect button 36 to emit light is incorporated. In the gaming machine 1, in order to prompt the player to operate the first effect button 35 during the effective period in which the operation of the first effect button 35 is effective, the first effect button lamp is one of a plurality of emission colors. Emits in the emission color. Further, the first effect button 35 has a built-in vibrating motor 128 including an eccentric motor that vibrates the first effect button 35, and in the gaming machine 1, the effect symbol of a mode of notifying a big hit is displayed on the display screen 70. The big effect is notified by vibrating the first effect button 35 as it is displayed on the screen. Further, during the effective period, immediately before the effective period starts, immediately after the start of the variable display of the special symbol and the effect symbol, etc., the first effect button 35 may vibrate. Under these circumstances, the first effect button 35 may vibrate. When the effect button 35 vibrates, the jackpot reliability is higher (hit notification effect is easily executed) than when the first effect button 35 does not vibrate. Further, in the gaming machine 1, the second effect button lamp 362 selects one of a plurality of emission colors in order to prompt the player to operate the second effect button 36 during the effective period in which the operation of the second effect button 36 is effective. It emits light in one of the emission colors.

The configuration of the input unit is not limited to that illustrated in the present embodiment, and may be another configuration. That is, for example, in the present embodiment, the case where the gaming machine 1 includes two input means will be described, but the number of input means may be one or three or more. Further, the input means is not limited to the push button, and a touch panel capable of detecting the touch operation of the player, for example, an optical sensor capable of detecting the hand of the player held over the display screen 70, a position that is moved forward, backward, left, and right. It may be other input means such as a joystick for designating a direction or an operation means that the player can grasp and change the posture.

[Example of internal configuration of second winning hole 28]
FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram for explaining opening/closing control of the second special winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287. An opening/closing member 29 (an example of a first opening/closing member) that opens and closes the second special winning opening 28 is provided at the opening of the second special winning opening 28 (an example of a special winning area) (FIGS. 1 and 4). (See (A)). Further, as illustrated in FIGS. 4A to 4C, inside the second special winning opening 28, the second special winning opening sensor 281, the V winning opening sensor 283, the discharge sensor 284, and the slide member 285. (Example of second opening/closing member) and the like are provided.

The second special winning opening sensor 281 detects a game ball that has entered the second special winning opening 28, and in the present embodiment, 15 pieces each time the game ball passes through the second special winning opening switch 281. Prize balls are paid out. The V winning opening switch 283 detects passage of a game ball to the V winning opening 287 (an example of a specific area) divided by the V winning opening switch 283. The discharge switch 284 is for detecting passage of a game ball to the discharge port defined by the discharge switch 284. The slide member 285 guides the game ball that has passed through the second special winning opening sensor 281 to the V winning opening 287 or the discharge opening, and is configured to be slidable in the left-right direction in FIG. 4A and 4B exemplify a state in which the slide member 285 is arranged at the right position that closes the V winning opening 287, and FIGS. 4C and 4D show the slide member 285. The state where it is arranged at the left position where the V winning opening 287 is opened is illustrated.

When the jackpot game is not being played or during the long open round game in which the first big winning opening 26 is long opened, the second big winning opening 28 is closed by the opening/closing member 29, and the V winning opening 287 is It is closed by the slide member 285 (see FIG. 4A). On the other hand, in the round game in which the second special winning opening 28 is opened and closed, the second special winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287 can be in the following states.

Specifically, in the round game in which the second special winning opening 28 is opened and closed, as shown in FIG. 4B, the opening/closing member 29 is rotated to open the second special winning opening 28. In addition, the slide member 285 may be placed at the right position and the V winning opening 287 may be closed. In this case, although the second special winning opening 28 is changed from the difficult-to-enter state where the game ball is difficult to enter to the easy-to-enter state, the V winning opening 287 is blocked by the slide member 285, The game ball that has entered the second special winning opening 28 does not pass through the V winning opening 287 but passes through the discharge sensor 284.

Further, in the round game for opening and closing the second special winning opening 28, as shown in FIG. 4C, the opening/closing member 29 is rotated to be in the open state in which the second special winning opening 28 is opened, and In some cases, the slide member 285 moves from the right position to the left position and the V winning opening 287 is opened. In this case, since the second special winning opening 28 is changed to the easy entry state and the V winning opening 287 is opened, the game ball that has entered the second special winning opening 28 is the V winning opening 287. (That is, detected by the V winning opening sensor 283).

The V winning opening sensor 283 functions as a so-called probability change switch, and as described above, the game ball wins V when both the second big winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287 are open. When the game ball is detected by the V winning opening sensor 283, the game is controlled in the "probably odd gaming state" described later after the jackpot game in which the V winning is finished. On the other hand, when both the second big winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287 are in the open state, if the game ball does not win the V, the jackpot game is finished, and the "time saving game state" described later. The game is controlled by. Further, when one of the second special winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287 is in the closed state (when being in the state illustrated in FIG. 4B or 4D), Basically, the game ball does not win the V prize, and similarly, after the jackpot game is over, the game is controlled in the "time saving game state".

It should be noted that both the second special winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287 are round games that are opened for a long time such that the game balls can easily enter the second special winning opening 28 and pass through the V winning opening 287. There are a valid round game in which a valid period in which the V prize is valid is set, and a non-valid round game in which the V prize is not valid (the valid period is not set). Therefore, when the V winning opening sensor 283 detects the game ball during the valid round game, the game is controlled in the "probability variation game state" after the jackpot game is finished, but the V winning is performed during the non-valid round game. Even if the mouth sensor 283 detects a game ball, the game is not controlled in the “probability variation game state” after the jackpot game is completed, on condition of this detection.

Also, in the round game for opening and closing the second special winning opening 28, as shown in FIG. 4D, the opening and closing member 29 is not operating, so the second special winning opening 28 is closed. In addition, the slide member 285 may move from the right position to the left position to open the V winning opening 287. In this case, although the V winning opening 287 is open, the second special winning opening 28 is in a difficult state to enter, so the game ball does not enter the second special winning opening 28.

It should be noted that the transparent member provided at the position corresponding to the area in which the second special winning opening sensor 281, the V winning opening sensor 283, the discharge opening sensor 284, the slide member 285, etc., correspond to the V winning opening sensor 283. The letter "V" is written at the position where the arrow mark is to be entered (see FIG. 2). Therefore, the player can easily identify the position of the V winning opening sensor 283 (the position of the V winning opening 287) by looking at the character “V”.

[Configuration of control device provided in gaming machine 1]
FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of a control device included in the gaming machine 1.
On the back side of the game board 2, a control device that controls the operation of the game machine 1 is provided. As illustrated in FIG. 5, the control device of the gaming machine 1 is a main control board 80 that controls the progress of the game using the game balls, and a sub that totally controls the effect based on information from the main control board 80. A control board 90, an image/sound control board 100 that controls effects by images and sounds, a lamp control board 120 that controls effects by various lamps and movable members, and the like. In the present embodiment, the main control board 80 functions as a game control section that controls the progress of the game, and the sub control board 90, the image/sound control board 100, and the lamp control board 120 function as an effect control section that controls the effect. .. The configuration of the control device is not limited to this, and for example, the sub-control board 90, the audiovisual control board 100, and the lamp control board 120 may be configured by one board.

<Configuration Example of Main Control Board 80>
The main control board 80 includes a main CPU 81, a main ROM 82, and a main RAM 83. The main CPU 81 performs various kinds of arithmetic processing related to the determination and the number of prize balls to be paid out, based on the programs stored in the main ROM 82. The main RAM 83 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the main CPU 81 executes the above-mentioned programs and a work area for data processing.

On the main control board 80, a first starting opening sensor 211, a second starting opening sensor 221, a gate sensor 251, a first big winning opening sensor 261, a second big winning opening sensor 281, a V winning opening sensor 283, an outlet opening sensor. 284, a general winning opening sensor 241, a second starting opening solenoid 222, a first big winning opening solenoid 262, a second big winning opening solenoid 282, and a V winning opening solenoid 286 are connected. It should be noted that the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes four general winning opening sensors 241 corresponding to the four general winning opening 24, but in FIG. 5, only one general winning opening sensor 241 is provided for convenience of description. It is written.

The first starting opening sensor 211 detects that a game ball has won in the first starting opening 21, and outputs the detection signal to the main control board 80. The second starting opening sensor 221 detects that a game ball has won in the second starting opening 22, and outputs the detection signal to the main control board 80. The gate sensor 251 detects the passage of the game ball to the gate 25 and outputs the detection signal to the main control board 80. The first special winning opening sensor 261 detects that a game ball has entered the first special winning opening 26, and outputs a detection signal to the main control board 80. The second special winning opening sensor 281 detects that a game ball has entered the second special winning opening 28, and outputs the detection signal to the main control board 80. The V winning opening sensor 283 detects the passage of the game ball to the V winning opening 287 and outputs the detection signal to the main control board 80. The outlet sensor 284 detects the passage of the game ball to the outlet and outputs the detection signal to the main control board 80. The general winning opening sensor 241 detects that a game ball has entered the general winning opening 24 and outputs a detection signal to the main control board 80.

The second starting opening solenoid 222 is an electric solenoid connected to the opening/closing member 23 so as to be able to transmit a driving force, and operates the opening/closing member 23 based on a control signal from the main control board 80 to perform a second starting operation. The mouth 22 is opened and closed. The first special winning opening solenoid 262 is an electric solenoid connected to the opening/closing member 27 so as to be capable of transmitting a driving force, and operates the opening/closing member 27 based on a control signal from the main control board 80 to generate the first opening/closing member 27. The special winning opening 26 is opened and closed. The second special winning opening solenoid 282 is an electric solenoid connected to the opening/closing member 29 so as to be capable of transmitting a driving force, and operates the opening/closing member 29 based on a control signal from the main control board 80 to generate a second The special winning opening 28 is opened and closed. The V winning opening solenoid 286 is an electric solenoid connected to the slide member 285 so as to be able to transmit a driving force, and operates the slide member 285 based on a control signal from the main control board 80, so that the V winning opening 287. Open and close.

Although not shown in the figure, the gaming machine 1 supplies a gaming ball to the upper plate 33 or the lower plate 34 by controlling a drive motor that sends out the gaming ball from a ball tank provided on the back side of the gaming board 2. A payout control board is provided. When the main CPU 81 receives a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 211, the second starting opening sensor 221, the first big winning opening sensor 261, the second big winning opening sensor 281, or the general winning opening sensor 241, The payout control board is instructed to pay out a predetermined number of prize balls according to the place where the game balls have won, and the number of prize balls to be paid out is managed based on the information from the payout control board.

Moreover, the main CPU 81 acquires various random numbers as acquisition information at the timing when the detection signal from the first starting port sensor 211 is input, and executes the first special symbol determination using the acquired random numbers. Further, the main CPU 81 acquires various random numbers as acquisition information at the timing when the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 221 is input, and executes the second special symbol determination using the acquired random numbers. Here, the various random numbers are specifically jackpot random numbers, design random numbers, reach random numbers, and fluctuation pattern random numbers.

The big hit random number is a random number for determining a big hit or a loss. The symbol random number is a random number for determining the type of jackpot (the number of rounds of the jackpot game, the gaming state after the jackpot game is over, etc.) when it is determined that the jackpot is a jackpot. The reach random number is a random number for determining whether to perform an effect with reach or an effect without reach when it is determined that there is a loss. The variation pattern random number is a random number for determining the variation pattern of the special symbol when the special symbol is variably displayed.

The main CPU 81 acquires these random numbers at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting opening 21 (or the second starting opening 22). First, the acquired jackpot random number is a predetermined random number stored in the main ROM 82. Based on whether or not it matches the numerical value (winning value), it is determined whether or not to execute the jackpot game. Here, when it is determined that the jackpot game is to be executed based on the jackpot random number matching the winning value, the symbol random number acquired together with the jackpot random number is stored in the main ROM 82 (compared with the symbol random number. ) A jackpot type is determined based on which random number value of a predetermined random number value matches. The type of jackpot will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS. 6(B) and 6(C).

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 determines not to execute the jackpot game based on the fact that the obtained jackpot random number does not match the winning value, the reach random number obtained together with the jackpot random number is stored in the main ROM 82. Based on whether or not there is a predetermined random number value (compared with the reach random number), it is determined whether the production with reach or the production without reach is performed. Further, the main CPU 81 determines the variation pattern of the special symbol when the special symbol is variably displayed, based on the variation pattern random number acquired together with the jackpot random number, regardless of the determination result based on the jackpot random number. Thereby, the variation time of the special symbol is determined.

When determining the type of jackpot, the main CPU 81 controls opening/closing of the first jackpot 26 through the first jackpot solenoid 262 according to the type of jackpot. By controlling the opening and closing of the second big winning opening 28 via the second big winning opening solenoid 282, and controlling the opening and closing of the V winning opening 287 via the V winning opening solenoid 286, a big hit game according to the type of jackpot. To execute.

In addition, the main CPU 81 acquires a random number (normal symbol random number) at the timing when the detection signal from the gate sensor 251 is input, and executes the normal symbol determination using the acquired normal symbol random number. When it is determined that the second starting port 22 is to be opened as a result of the normal symbol determination, the second starting port 22 is opened by controlling the opening and closing of the second starting port 22 via the second starting port solenoid 222. Perform an auxiliary game.

Further, on the main control board 80, the first special symbol display 41, the second special symbol display 42, the normal symbol display 43, the first special symbol reservation display 44, the second special symbol reservation display 45, universal The figure hold indicator 46, the round indicator 47, the game state indicator 48, and the launch direction indicator 49 are connected.

The main CPU 81 controls the display devices 41 to 49 that form the main display device 40 to execute the display processing described above with reference to FIG.

<Configuration Example of Sub Control Board 90>
The sub control board 90 includes a sub CPU 91, a sub ROM 92, a sub RAM 93, and an RTC (real time clock) 94. The sub CPU 91 performs arithmetic processing for controlling the effect based on the program stored in the sub ROM 92. The sub RAM 93 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the sub CPU 91 executes the above-described programs and a work area for data processing. The RTC 94 measures the current date and time (date and time).

A first effect button detection sensor 96 and a second effect button detection sensor 97 are connected to the sub control board 90. When the first effect button 35 (see FIG. 1) is operated, the first effect button detection sensor 96 outputs operation information (operation signal) indicating that fact to the sub control board 90. When the second effect button 36 (see FIG. 1) is operated, the second effect button detection sensor 97 outputs operation information (operation signal) indicating that fact to the sub-control board 90.

The sub CPU 91 sets the effect contents based on the special symbol determination, the normal symbol determination, and the game information regarding the jackpot game and the like transmitted from the main control board 80. At that time, the input of operation information from the first effect button 35 or the second effect button 36 may be accepted, and the effect content according to the operation information may be set. The sub CPU 91 transmits a command instructing execution of the effect of the set effect content to the image acoustic control board 100 and the lamp control board 120.

<Structural Example of Image Acoustic Control Board 100>
The image and sound control board 100 controls the image display by the image display device 7 and the output of the effect sound by the speaker 38. In this embodiment, the image/sound control board 100 includes an image/sound control CPU 101, a control ROM 102, a control RAM 103, a VDP (Video Display Processor) 104, a CGROM 105, a VRAM 106, an acoustic DSP (Digital Signal Processor) 107, an acoustic ROM 108, an SDRAM 109, and an SDRAM 109. And an amplifier 110.

The control ROM 102 is composed of a mask ROM, and various tables such as a control program of the image/sound control CPU 101, a display list generation program for generating a display list, and a display list creation table used for a process of creating the display list. Is remembered. Here, the display list is composed of a group of commands for instructing execution of drawing on a frame-by-frame basis. It includes various parameters such as angle and transmittance. The control RAM 103 is used as a storage area for temporarily storing various data used when the image and sound control CPU 101 executes the control program and a work area for data processing.

The image and sound control CPU 101 causes the image display device 7 to display the image data stored in the CGROM 105 to the VDP 104 based on the control program, various tables such as the display list creation table, and the command received from the sub control board 90. To display on. This instruction is mainly given by the output of the display list. Further, the image-sound control CPU 101 instructs the sound DSP 107 to output the sound data stored in the sound ROM 108 from the speaker 38.

The CGROM 105 stores effect data necessary for executing a change effect associated with a variable display of a special symbol, an effect associated with a jackpot game, and the like. The CGROM 105 is composed of a flash memory, an EEPROM, an EPROM, a mask ROM, and the like, and has sprite data (one image data) including a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32×32 pixels) and a plurality of image data. It stores compressed movie data, etc. The pixel information is composed of color number information designating a color number for each pixel and an α value indicating the transparency of the image. Further, the CGROM 105 stores, without compression, palette data or the like in which color number information designating a color number and display color information for actually displaying a color are associated with each other.

Note that only part of the image data stored in the CGROM 105 may be compressed. As a method for compressing movie data, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

The VRAM 106 is composed of an SRAM capable of writing and reading image data at high speed, and has a display list storage area, a development storage area, a frame buffer, etc., which are not shown in the figure. ing.

The display list storage area temporarily stores the display list output from the image and sound control CPU 101. The expansion storage area stores image data that has been decompressed after being read from the CGROM 105. The frame buffer is a frame buffer that is also used for drawing and displaying the image data displayed on the display screen 70.

The VDP 104 expands the image data stored in the CGROM 105 in a compressed state, and stores the expanded image data in the expansion storage area. The VDP 104 also performs drawing processing on the frame buffer based on the display list stored in the display list storage area, using the image data stored in the expansion storage area. The VDP 104 also generates an RGB signal as a video signal indicating the color of the image from the image data stored in the frame buffer, and outputs the generated RGB signal to the image display device 7.

An acoustic ROM 108, an SDRAM 109, and an amplifier 110 are connected to the acoustic DSP 107. The acoustic ROM 108 stores various acoustic data regarding music, voice, sound effects, warning sounds, and the like. The SDRAM 109 is used as a work area for data processing by the acoustic DSP 107. The acoustic DSP 107 reads acoustic data corresponding to an instruction from the image acoustic control CPU 101 from the acoustic ROM 108 to the SDRAM 109, executes data processing, and outputs the acoustic data after data processing to the speaker 38 (via the amplifier 110). The amplifier 110 adjusts the volume in accordance with a volume-related instruction obtained from the image/sound control CPU 101 via the acoustic DSP 107, and outputs the acoustic data to the speaker 38.

In the present embodiment, the case where the VDP is responsible for drawing management and the acoustic DSP is responsible for sound management will be described. However, in another embodiment, the VDP is responsible for both drawing management and sound management. You may. In this case, it is not necessary to separately provide the acoustic DSP.

<Configuration Example of Lamp Control Board 120>
The lamp control board 120 includes a lamp CPU 121, a lamp ROM 122, and a lamp RAM 123, and includes a frame lamp 37, a board lamp 5, a movable decoration member 14, a performance display device 125, a performance first special figure reservation display device 126, and a performance second feature. The figure hold indicator 127 and the vibration motor 128 are connected. The lamp ROM 122 stores programs executed by the lamp CPU 121, light emission pattern data, operation pattern data, and the like. Here, the light emission pattern data is built in the frame lamp 37, the panel lamp 5 (including a first light emission group 511, a second light emission group 512, and a third light emission group 523 described later based on FIG. 28) and the movable decoration member 14. It is the data which shows each light emission pattern of the LED which is done, the 1st production button lamp which is built in the 1st production button 35, the 2nd production button lamp which is built in the 2nd production button 36 and the like. The operation pattern data is data indicating an operation pattern of the movable decorative member 14 or the like. The vibration pattern data is data indicating a vibration pattern of the first effect button 35 vibrating by the driving force of the vibration motor 128 (driving pattern of the vibration motor 128).

The lamp CPU 121, based on the program stored in the lamp ROM 122, the frame lamp 37, the panel lamp 5, the movable decorative member 14, the effect display device 125, the effect first special figure reservation display device 126, the effect second special figure reservation. The arithmetic processing for controlling the operations of the display 127, the vibration motor 128, etc. is performed.

The lamp CPU 121 reads out the light emission pattern data corresponding to the command received from the sub-control board 90 from the light emission pattern data stored in the lamp ROM 122 to the lamp RAM 123, and then the frame lamp 37, the panel lamp 5, and the movable decoration member. The light emission of the LED built in 14, the first effect button lamp included in the first effect button 35, the second effect button lamp included in the second effect button 36, and the like is controlled. Further, the lamp CPU 121 reads the operation pattern data corresponding to the command received from the sub-control board 90 from the operation pattern data stored in the lamp ROM 122 to the lamp RAM 123 and operates the movable decorative member 14. Control the drive. Further, the lamp CPU 121 reads the vibration pattern data corresponding to the command received from the sub-control board 90 from the vibration pattern data stored in the lamp ROM 122 to the lamp RAM 123, and controls the driving of the vibration motor 128.

Further, the lamp CPU 121 controls the variable display and the stop display of the symbols on the effect display device 125 based on the command from the sub control board 90. Further, the lamp CPU 121 displays the number of holdings related to the first special symbol determination by the effect first special figure reservation display 126 and the second effect special figure reservation display 127 based on the command from the sub-control board 90. 2 Control the display of the number of reservations related to special symbol determination.

[About playing state]
Next, the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 will be described. In the present embodiment, in the gaming machine 1, the game is controlled in any one of the three gaming states of the "normal gaming state", the "probability variation gaming state", and the "time saving gaming state".

The "normal game state" is a special symbol determination in a low probability state in which the probability of being determined to execute a jackpot game is relatively low, and a support function that supports winning of a game ball to the second starting opening 22 (so-called It is a gaming state (low-probability low-base state) to which a function called "electric support" or the like is not added. In the normal gaming state, the probability of being determined to execute the jackpot game by the special symbol determination is set to a relatively low probability (for example, 1/160) (see FIG. 6(A)). In addition, the probability of being determined to open the second starting port 22 by the normal symbol determination is set to a relatively low probability (for example, 1/11), and the variation time of the normal symbol is relatively long (for example, 20 seconds). And the opening time of the second starting port 22 when it is determined to open the second starting port 22 is set to a relatively short time (for example, 0.1 seconds×1 time).

"Probability variation gaming state" is a gaming state (high-probability high base state) in which special symbol determination is performed in a high probability state in which the probability of being determined to execute a jackpot game is relatively high, and the support function is added. is there. That is, in the probability variation gaming state, the probability of being determined to execute the jackpot game by the special symbol determination is set to a relatively high probability (for example, 1/60) (see FIG. 6(A)). Also, the probability of being determined to open the second starting opening 22 by the normal symbol determination is set to a relatively high probability (for example, 11/11), and the variation time of the normal symbol is relatively short (for example, 1.5). Second) and the opening time of the second starting port 22 when it is determined to open the second starting port 22 is set to a relatively long time (for example, 1.5 seconds×3 times).

The "time saving game state" is a game state (low accurate high base state) in which the special symbol determination is performed in the above-mentioned low probability state, and the electric Chu support function is added. That is, in the time saving game state, the probability of being determined to execute the jackpot game by the special symbol determination is set to a relatively low probability (for example, 1/160). Also, the probability of being determined to open the second starting opening 12 by the normal symbol determination is set to a relatively high probability (for example, 11/11), and the variation time of the normal symbol is relatively short (for example, 1.5). Second) and the opening time of the second starting port 12 when it is determined to open the second starting port 12 is set to a relatively long time (for example, 1.5 seconds×3 times).

Comparing these gaming states with regard to the variation time of the special symbol, compared to the variation time of the special symbol in the "normal gaming state", the variation time of the special symbol in the "probability variation gaming state" or the "time saving gaming state" is relatively It is easy to set a short time. The probability of being determined to execute a special game (big hit probability), the probability of being determined to open the second starting opening 22 (ordinary symbol determination winning probability), the variation of the regular symbol shown in the explanation of each gaming state It goes without saying that the time and the opening time of the second starting port 22 are merely examples and may be other probabilities or times.

In the following description, a state in which the game balls are easily won into the second starting opening 22 due to the support function being added is referred to as a "high base state", and the support function is not added. A state in which it is difficult to win a game ball into the second starting opening 22 is referred to as a "low base state".

[Game flow]
The game ball hit by the player to the right can win the second starting port 22 without winning the first starting port 21. However, in the low base state, it is difficult to open the second starting opening 22, and even if it is opened, the opening time is short. Therefore, when the game is controlled in the low base state (the "normal game state" in the present embodiment corresponds to this), the player decides to play the game by left-handed striking the first starting opening 21. Become.

When the gaming ball left-handed in the normal gaming state wins the first starting opening 21, the first special symbol determination is executed, and the determination result of the first special symbol determination is displayed after the first special symbol is variably displayed. As the first special symbol shown, a jackpot symbol or a lost symbol is stopped and displayed.

Here, when the lost symbol is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game is not played and the gaming state does not change. On the other hand, when the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the jackpot game is executed in which a predetermined number of rounds are played according to the jackpot symbol, and after the jackpot game is finished, the "probability variation game state" or "time saving game" The game is controlled by "state".

In addition, when the gaming state shifts to the "probability variation gaming state" or the "time saving gaming state" upon completion of the jackpot game, that is, when the low base state shifts to the high base state, a game ball to the second starting opening 22 With the above support function for facilitating the winning of the game, the second starting opening 22 makes it easier to win the game ball than the first starting opening 21. Therefore, when the game is controlled in the high base state, the player plays the game by hitting the right by aiming at the second starting opening 22. Therefore, when the game is controlled in the probability variation game state or the time saving game state, basically, the second special symbol determination is performed.

When the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol in the probability variation gaming state or the time saving game state, after the jackpot game is finished, basically, the game is controlled in the probability variation gaming state. On the other hand, if the jackpot cannot be attracted in the probability variation gaming state or the time saving gaming state, the gaming state will be returned from the probability variation gaming state (or the time shortening gaming state) to the normal gaming state.

[About special symbol determination using random numbers]
Next, the determination process using the jackpot random number and the symbol random number will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot random number and the symbol random number. It should be noted that in the explanatory diagrams related to each random number illustrated in FIG. 6 and subsequent figures, the range that the random number can take is set to a range smaller than the actual range in order to facilitate the description.

<Process based on jackpot random numbers>
The jackpot random number illustrated in FIG. 6(A) is a random number used in the jackpot determination process (step S308 in FIG. 42) of whether or not to execute the jackpot game, and the probability that the jackpot game is determined to be executed is high. It is set individually for each of a relatively low low probability state and a high probability state in which the probability that a jackpot game is determined to be executed is relatively high.

In the present embodiment, six winning values for the low probability state are stored in the main ROM 82, and the main CPU 81 controls the low probability state (in the present embodiment, the “normal game state” and the “time saving game state” correspond to this). ), the jackpot game is determined to be executed if the obtained jackpot random number matches any of these six winning values while the game is being controlled. Further, with respect to the high probability state (in this embodiment, the “probability variation game state” corresponds to this), 16 winning values are stored in the main ROM 82, and acquired when the game is controlled in the high probability state. When the hit big random number matches with any of these 16 winning values, it is determined to execute the jackpot game.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot random number can take 960 values “0” to “959” in both the low probability state and the high probability state. Therefore, the jackpot probability in the low probability state is 1/160 (=6/960), and the jackpot probability in the high probability state is 1/60 (=16/960).

<Process based on symbol random number>
When the main CPU 81 determines to execute the jackpot game, which random number value out of the preset random number values for each type of jackpot matches the symbol random number acquired together with the jackpot random number used for the determination Based on, determine the type of jackpot. In other words, the first special symbol (second special symbol) to be stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 41 (or the second special symbol display device 42) is selected as a big hit symbol.

(Type of jackpot related to the first special symbol determination)
As illustrated in FIG. 6B, in the present embodiment, "5R probability variation A", "5R probability variation B", and "5R regular A" are provided as the types of jackpots due to the first start opening winning a prize (in the normal gaming state). , And “5R normal B”.

Here, “5R probability variation A” (see FIG. 6B) is a jackpot in which a jackpot game including five round games for opening and closing the second special winning opening 28 is executed. When this “5R probability variation A” is won, both the second special winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287 are controlled to be in an open state, and the valid period in which the V winning of the game ball with respect to the V winning opening 287 becomes effective. A jackpot game including the set valid round game (see "1R" in FIG. 7(A)) is executed, and the passage of the game ball is detected by the V winning opening sensor 283 during the valid round game. , After the jackpot game is over, the game is controlled in the "probability variation game state".

The “5R probability variation B” (see FIG. 6B) is a jackpot in which a jackpot game including five round games for opening and closing the second big winning opening 28 is executed. When this "5R probability variation B" is won, as in the case where "5R probability variation A" is won, a jackpot game including an effective round game (see "3R" in FIG. 7B) is executed, and this effective round is executed. On condition that the passage of the game ball is detected by the V winning opening sensor 283 during the game, after the jackpot game is over, the game is controlled in the "probability variation game state".

"5R normal A" (see FIG. 6B) is a jackpot in which a jackpot game including five round games for opening and closing the second special winning opening 28 is executed. When this "5R normal A" is won, the jackpot game including the ineffective round game (see "2R" and "4R" in FIG. 7C) is excluded from the effective round game. Therefore, even if the game ball passes through the V winning opening 287 during the ineffective round game, the V winning does not occur, and after the jackpot game is over, the game is controlled in the "time saving game state".

"5R normal B" (see FIG. 6B) is a jackpot in which a jackpot game including five round games for opening and closing the second big winning opening 28 is executed. When this "5R normal B" is won, as in the case where "5R normal A" is won, the ineffective round game is not included and the ineffective round game (see "2R" and "4R" in FIG. 7(D)) A jackpot game including is executed. Therefore, even if the game ball passes through the V winning opening 287 during the ineffective round game, the V winning does not occur, and after the jackpot game is over, the game is controlled in the "time saving game state".

As is clear from the notations of FIGS. 7A to 7D, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the jackpot relating to the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state is "5R probability variation A", "5R". Regardless of which jackpot of "probability variation B", "5R normal A", and "5R normal B", the second big winning opening 28 is opened for a long time (only for a time when 10 game balls can easily win). The round game is executed twice. Therefore, all of these four types of jackpots are jackpots of substantially two rounds (2R) that can win two rounds of prize balls (300 balls=15 balls×10 counts×2R).

In this way, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the main CPU 81 determines to execute the jackpot game and selects “5R probability variation A” or “5R probability variation B” as the type of jackpot, (the second By operating the opening/closing member 29 and the slide member 285 (via the special winning opening solenoid 282 and the V winning opening solenoid 286), the second special winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287 are opened so that the game balls can easily pass through. It is possible to execute a plurality of round games including an effective round game (specific round game).

As illustrated in FIG. 6B, in the present embodiment, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a big hit, a random number value for determining the kind of the big hit is stored in the main ROM 82. ing. Specifically, 30 random number values are stored for “5R probability variation A”, 30 random number values are stored for “5R probability variation B”, and 20 random number values are stored for “5R normal A”. A random number value is stored, and 20 random number values are stored for “5R normal B”.

In the present embodiment, the range of possible symbol random numbers is set to "0" to "99", and the jackpot is determined based on the jackpot random number acquired in response to the game ball winning the first starting opening 21. When it is determined, "5R probability variation A" is selected at a rate of 30% (=30/100×100) as the type of jackpot related to the first special symbol determination, and "5R probability variation B" is 30% (=30 /100×100), “5R normal A” is selected at a rate of 20% (=20/100×100), and “5R normal B” is 20% (=20/100×100). The ratio is selected (see FIG. 6B).

Therefore, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is a big hit, as a big hit symbol stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41, the big hit symbol X1 indicating "5R probability variation A" is at a rate of 30%. Selected, the jackpot pattern X2 showing "5R probability variation B" is selected at a rate of 30%, the jackpot pattern X3 showing "5R normal A" is selected at a rate of 20%, and the jackpot pattern showing "5R normal B" X4 is selected at a rate of 20%.

(Type of jackpot related to the second special symbol determination)
As illustrated in FIG. 6C, in the present embodiment, "5R probability variation", "7R probability variation", and "5R probability variation" as the types of jackpots due to the second starting mouth winning (in the probability variation gaming state or the time saving game state). There are three types of jackpots, "9R Probable Change".

Here, the “5R probability change” (see FIG. 6C) is a jackpot in which a jackpot game including five round games for opening and closing the second big winning opening 28 is executed. If the "5R probability variation" is won, the jackpot game including the effective round game is executed, and the passing of the game ball is detected by the V winning hole sensor 283 during the effective round game, after the jackpot game is over. The game is controlled in the "probability variation game state". In the case of this "5R probability change", including the above-mentioned effective round game, the round game for opening the second special winning opening 28 for a long time (only for the time when 10 game balls can easily win) is executed 5 times. To be done. Therefore, the “5R probability variation” related to the second special symbol determination is a jackpot of substantially 5 rounds (5R) capable of winning prize balls for 5 rounds (750=15×10 counts×5R).

"7R probability change" (see FIG. 6(C)) includes a total of seven rounds including five round games for opening and closing the second special winning opening 28 and two round games for opening and closing the first special winning opening 26. It is a jackpot in which jackpot games including round games are executed. When this "7R probability change" is won, the above-mentioned effective round game using the second big winning opening 28 is executed, and the passage of the game ball is detected by the V winning opening sensor 283 during this effective round game. , After the jackpot game is over, the game is controlled in the "probability variation game state". In the case of this "7R probability change", including the effective round game, the second big winning opening 28 is long-opened (only for the time when 10 game balls can easily win), and the round game is executed 5 times. And, the long open round game in which the first big winning opening 26 is opened for a long time (only for the time when 10 game balls can easily win) is executed twice. Therefore, the “7R probability change” related to the second special symbol determination is a real 7 round (7R) jackpot that can win 7 rounds of prize balls (1050 pieces=15 pieces×10 counts×(5R+2R)). ..

"9R probability change" (see FIG. 6(C)) is a total of 9 times including 5 round games for opening and closing the second special winning opening 28 and 4 round games for opening and closing the first special winning opening 26. It is a jackpot in which jackpot games including round games are executed. If this "9R probability change" is won, the above-mentioned effective round game using the second big winning opening 28 is executed, and the passage of the game ball is detected by the V winning opening sensor 283 during this effective round game. , After the jackpot game is over, the game is controlled in the "probability variation game state". In addition, when this "9R probability change" is reached, including the above-mentioned effective round game, the second big winning opening 28 is opened five times (only for the time when 10 game balls can easily win), and a round game is executed five times. And, the long open round game in which the first big winning opening 26 is long opened (only for the time when 10 game balls can easily win) is executed four times. Therefore, the “9R probability variation” related to the second special symbol determination is a real 9-round (9R) jackpot that can win 9 rounds of prize balls (1350=15×10 counts×(5R+4R)). ..

As illustrated in FIG. 6C, in the present embodiment, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a jackpot, a random number value for determining the type of the jackpot is stored in the main ROM 82. ing. Specifically, 25 random number values are stored for “5R probability variation”, 30 random number values are stored for “7R probability variation”, and 45 random number values are stored for “9R probability variation”. Remembered

In the present embodiment, the range of the symbol random numbers related to the second special symbol determination is the same as the range of the symbol random numbers related to the first special symbol determination, and the game ball has won the second starting opening 22. When it is determined to be a big hit based on the big hit random number acquired in accordance with, as a type of big hit according to the second special symbol determination, "5R probability variation" is selected at a rate of 25% (=25/100×100) , “7R probability variation” is selected at a rate of 30% (=30/100×100), and “9R probability variation” is selected at a rate of 45% (=45/100×100).

Therefore, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is a big hit, as a big hit symbol stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 42, the big hit symbol Y1 indicating "5R probability change" is selected at a rate of 25%. The jackpot symbol Y2 indicating "7R probability variation" is selected at a rate of 30%, and the jackpot symbol Y3 indicating "9R probability variation" is selected at a rate of 45%.

<Process based on reach random number>
When the main CPU 81 determines not to execute the jackpot game, the reach random number acquired together with the jackpot random number used for the determination is either a random number value corresponding to the reachable effect or a random number value corresponding to the reachless effect. Based on whether the reachable effect or the reachless effect is performed, it is determined whether or not the reachable effect is performed. Here, the reachable effect is an effect for notifying the winning or failure (the determination result of the special symbol determination) by the reach effect executed in the state where the reach by the effect symbol is established. On the other hand, the reach-less effect is an effect in which this reach effect is not performed, and is basically an effect in which a "big hit" is not notified and a "miss" is notified.

In the present embodiment, the main ROM 82 stores 10 random number values for the reachable effect, and the main CPU 81 determines that the reach random number acquired matches any of these 10 random number values. It is decided to perform the production with reach. Further, 90 random number values are stored for the reachless effect, and the main CPU 81 performs the reachless effect when the acquired reach random number matches any of these 90 random number values. decide. In this embodiment, the reachable random number range is set to "0" to "99", and when it is determined not to execute the jackpot game, the reach effect ratio is 10% (=10/ 100×100), and the ratio in which the reach effect is not performed (the ratio in which the reachless effect is performed) is 90% (=90/100×100).

When determining to perform the reachable effect, the main CPU 81 selects, as the change pattern of the special symbol, the change effect pattern of the effect symbol accompanied by the reach effect that is selected by the sub-control board 90. On the other hand, when it is determined to perform the reach-less effect, the variation pattern of the effect symbol without the reach effect is selected as the variation pattern of the special symbol by the sub-control board 90.

[About the jackpot game executed according to the first hit]
Hereinafter, with reference to FIG. 7, when the game is controlled in the normal game state, the jackpot game executed when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “big hit” will be described. Here, FIG. 7 is a time chart for explaining the jackpot game.

<5R probability variation A jackpot game>
When the 5R probability variation A described above based on FIG. 6B is won, the 5R jackpot game using the second special winning opening 28 is executed in the mode illustrated in FIG. 7A. Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 7A, in the 1R round game, the second special winning opening 28 is in an open state for 0.1 seconds, a closed state for 0.1 seconds, and 10 seconds. The operation of the opening/closing member 29 is controlled so that the state changes in the order of the open state. Along with this, the operation of the slide member 285 is controlled so that the V winning opening 287 changes in the order of the open state for 0.1 second, the closed state for 0.1 second, and the open state for 10 seconds.

In this way, in the 1R round game of the 5R probability variation A, since both the second big winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287 are long-opened, the player simply makes a right-handed hit and the V winning opening It is possible to easily pass the game ball through the sensor 283. The operation of the opening/closing member 29 and the slide member 285 in the 1R round game illustrated in FIG. 7A is performed after the second special winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287 are in the second opened state. It continues until 10 seconds elapse, or after the first round game is started and the second special winning opening sensor 281 detects passage of 10 game balls.

Next, in the 2R round game of the 5R probability variation A, as shown in FIG. 7(A), the second special winning opening 28 makes the same state change as that in the 1R round game. Thus, the operation of the opening/closing member 29 is controlled. On the other hand, the operation of the slide member 285 is controlled so that the V winning opening 287 is opened for 0.1 seconds and then returns to the closed state to maintain the state. As described above, in the second round game of the 5R probability variation A, the second special winning opening 28 is opened for a long time, while the V winning opening 287 is changed to the open state for only 0.1 seconds. It is possible to easily win the game ball to the second special winning opening 28 by performing right-handing, while the game ball enters the second special winning opening 28 and reaches the V winning opening 287. Since it takes 0.1 seconds or more to pass, it is impossible to pass the game ball through the V winning opening sensor 283. The termination conditions for the 2R round game are the same as the termination conditions for the 1R round game.

Subsequently, in the 3R round game of the 5R probability variation A, as shown in FIG. 7(A), the second special winning opening 28 is opened for 0.1 seconds and then returned to the closed state. The operation of the opening/closing member 29 is controlled so as to maintain the lever state. On the other hand, the operation of the slide member 285 is controlled so that the V winning opening 287 changes in the same state as when the 1R round game is being performed. As described above, in the third round game of the 5R probability variation A, the V winning opening 287 is opened for a long time, while the second winning opening 28 is changed to the open state for only 0.1 seconds. Therefore, it is extremely difficult for the player to win the game ball at the second big winning opening 28 even if the player hits the ball right.

Subsequently, in the 3R round game of the 5R probability variation A, as shown in FIG. 7(A), the second special winning opening 28 is opened for 0.1 seconds and then returned to the closed state. The operation of the opening/closing member 29 is controlled so as to maintain the lever state. On the other hand, the slide member 285 does not operate, and the V winning opening 287 does not change to the open state. In this way, in the 3R round game of the 5R probability variation A, the second special winning opening 28 changes to the open state for only 0.1 seconds, so that the player can make a right-handed second winning opening. It is extremely difficult to win 28 game balls.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, regardless of the type of jackpot related to the first special symbol determination, during the 1R round game and the 3R round game, a game ball for the V winning opening 287. The effective period during which the V winning of is valid is set (see FIGS. 7A to 7D), and during another round game (during the 2R round game, during the 4R round game, and at the 5R round). The valid period is not set for the round game). Therefore, even if the passing of the game ball is detected by the V winning hole sensor 283 during another round game, the game is controlled in the "probability variation game state" after the jackpot game is finished based on this detection. There is no.

In the jackpot game related to the 5R probability variation A, the 1R round game is the effective round game. In the 2R round game, although the second winning hole 28 is opened for a long time, the V winning hole 287 is opened for only 0.1 seconds and is not in the valid period. The entered game ball does not win V. Also, during the third round of the round game, although the V winning is in the valid period, the second winning hole 28 is opened for only 0.1 seconds, so the game ball enters the second winning hole 28. The possibility is extremely low, and since the V winning opening 287 is once closed almost at the same time that the second winning opening 28 is closed, even if the game ball enters the second winning opening 28, The game ball never wins V. In addition, in the 4R round game and the 5R round game, the second special winning opening 28 is opened for only 0.1 seconds, and the V winning opening 287 does not change to the open state. Will never win a V.

<5R probability variation B jackpot game>
When the 5R probability variation B described above based on FIG. 6B is won, the 5R jackpot game using the second special winning opening 28 is executed in the mode illustrated in FIG. 7B. Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 7B, in the 1R round game, the second special winning opening 28 shifts to the open state for 0.1 seconds, and then returns to the closed state. The operation of the opening/closing member 29 is controlled so as to maintain the state. Along with this, similarly to the first round game of the 5R probability variation A, the V winning opening 287 changes its state in the order of 0.1 second open state, 0.1 second closed state, and 10 second open state. Thus, the operation of the slide member 285 is controlled.

In the 1R round game of the 5R probability variation B, the V winning opening 287 is opened for a long time, and the second winning opening 28 is opened for only 0.1 seconds, although the V winning is effective. Since it is not performed, the possibility that the game ball enters the second big winning opening 28 is extremely low. Further, since the V winning opening 287 is once closed almost at the same time that the second big winning opening 28 is closed, even if the game ball enters the second big winning opening 28, the game ball is V winning. There is nothing to do.

Next, in the 2R round game of the 5R probability variation B, as shown in FIG. 7B, the second special winning opening 28 is maintained in the open state for 10 seconds and then returned to the closed state. The operation of the opening/closing member 29 is controlled. On the other hand, the operation of the slide member 285 is controlled so that the V winning opening 287 is opened for 0.1 seconds and then returns to the closed state to maintain the state. As described above, in the 2R round game of the 5R probability variation B, the second special winning opening 28 is opened for a long time, while the V winning opening 287 changes to the open state for only 0.1 seconds. It is possible to easily win the game ball to the second big winning opening 28 by making a right hit, but it is impossible to pass the game ball to the V winning opening sensor 283. In this 2R round game, the number of game balls detected by the second special winning opening sensor 281 is 10 before 10 seconds elapse after the second special winning opening 28 is changed to the open state. When reaching, the second round game is finished at that point, and the opening/closing member 29 returns to the initial posture in which it closes the second special winning opening 28.

Subsequently, in the 3R round game of the 5R probability variation B, the opening/closing member 29 and the slide member 285 are controlled similarly to the 1R round game of the 5R probability variation A, and the V winning of the game ball becomes effective. It is an effective round game set for the period. Therefore, the player can easily make the V winning hole sensor 283 pass the game ball by simply making a right hit. The ending condition of the 3R round game of the 5R certainty variation B is the same as the ending condition of the 1R round game of the 5R certainty variation A (see FIG. 7A).

In the jackpot game related to the 5R probability variation B (see FIG. 7(B)), the 3R round game is the effective round game, and the game ball that has entered the second big winning opening 28 can easily win the V prize. In addition, during the 1R round game, the V winning opening 287 is opened for a long time, and although the effective period is set, the second winning opening 28 is opened for only 0.1 seconds, so that the game ball is V. There is no winning. In the second round of the round game, the second winning hole 28 is opened for a long time, but the V winning opening 287 is opened for only 0.1 seconds, and the game ball wins V because it is not in the valid period. There is no such thing. In addition, in the 4R round game and the 5R round game, the second special winning opening 28 is opened for only 0.1 seconds, and the V winning opening 287 does not change to the open state. Will never win a V.

<5R Normal A jackpot game>
When the 5R normal A described above based on FIG. 6B is won, the 5R jackpot game using the second special winning opening 28 is executed in the mode illustrated in FIG. 7C. Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 7C, in the 1R round game, the second special winning opening 28 shifts to the open state for 0.1 seconds, and then returns to the closed state. The operation of the opening/closing member 29 is controlled so as to maintain the state. Along with this, the operation of the slide member 285 is controlled so that the V winning opening 287 changes to the open state for 0.1 seconds and then returns to the closed state and maintains this state.

During the 1R round game of the 5R regular A, as in the 1R round game of the 5R certainty variation A and the 1R round game of the 5R certainty variation B, the V winning of the game ball is valid. However, during the 1R round game of the 5R normal A, both the second special winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287 are opened for only 0.1 seconds, so that the game ball does not win the V winning.

Next, in the 2R round game of the 5R normal A, as shown in FIG. 7C, after the second special winning opening 28 (and the V winning opening 287) is maintained in the open state for 10 seconds. The operation of the opening/closing member 29 (and the slide member 285) is controlled so as to return to the closed state. Therefore, although the player can easily win the game ball into the second big winning opening 28 by making a right-handed hit, in the second round game of R, the V winning of the game ball is effective. Since it is the non-effective round game that does not occur, the passage of the game ball is detected by the V winning opening sensor 283, but the game is not controlled in the "probability variation game state" after the jackpot game is over.

Then, in the 3rd round game of 5R normal A, as shown in FIG. 7C, the second special winning opening 28 shifts to the open state for 0.1 seconds and then returns to the closed state. The operation of the opening/closing member 29 is controlled so as to maintain the lever state. Along with this, the operation of the slide member 285 is controlled so that the V winning opening 287 changes in the order of the open state for 0.1 second, the closed state for 0.1 second, and the open state for 0.1 second. It During the third round of the round game, although the V prize of the game ball is valid, the second special winning opening 28 is opened for only 0.1 seconds, so the game ball is the second big winning opening 28. The possibility of entering the inside is extremely low, and even if the player enters the second big winning opening 28, the game ball does not pass through the V winning opening 287.

Subsequently, in the 4R round game of the 5R normal A, the operations of the opening/closing member 29 and the slide member 285 are controlled as in the 2R round game of the 5R normal A, as illustrated in FIG. 7C. To be done.

Then, in the 5th round game of 5R normal A, as shown in FIG. 7C, the second special winning opening 28 is open for 0.1 seconds, closed for 0.1 seconds, The operation of the opening/closing member 29 is controlled so that the state changes in the order of the open state for 0.1 second, the closed state for 0.1 second, and the open state for 0.1 second. Then, during the round game of the 5th round of this 5R normal A, the V ball of the game ball is not in the valid period in which it becomes effective, and since the V winning opening 287 does not change to the open state, the game ball is There is no V prize.

As is clear from the above description, the 5R normal A jackpot game does not include an effective round game. Therefore, the game ball does not win the V prize during the 5R normal A big hit game, and the game is controlled in the "normal game state" after the big hit game is finished.

<5R normal B jackpot game>
When the 5R normal B described above based on FIG. 6B is won, the 5R jackpot game using the second special winning opening 28 is executed in the mode illustrated in FIG. 7D. Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 7D, the opening/closing member 29 is the same as in the 1R to 4R round games of the 5R normal A in the 1R to 4R round games of the 5R normal B. And the operation of the slide member 285 is controlled. Then, in the 5R round game, except that the number of times the opening/closing member 29 is changed to the open state is small once, the operations of the opening/closing member 29 and the slide member 285 are the same as in the 5R round game of the 5R normal A. Controlled. Therefore, the 5R normal B jackpot game also does not include an effective round game, the game ball does not win V during the 5R normal B jackpot game, and after the jackpot game is over, "normal The game is controlled in the "gaming state".

[Structure for making it difficult to understand whether or not there is a V winning]
By the way, during the jackpot game which is performed in response to winning the "5R probability variation A" or "5R probability variation B", the player is notified of the fact that a V is won in the game ball, so that the player can win the jackpot game. It is possible to clearly recognize that the game is controlled in the "probability variation game state" after the end. On the other hand, even if the game ball wins the V prize, it does not notify that effect (display an effect image notifying the V prize on the display screen 70, or output an effect sound notifying the V prize from the speaker 38). However, after the jackpot game is over, by performing in the production mode in which it is impossible to determine whether the game is controlled in the "probability variation game state" or the game is controlled in the "time saving game state", It is conceivable to improve the fun of the game by not knowing whether or not the game has transitioned to the “probability variation game state”.

However, in this configuration, it is possible to recognize in advance what round game the round game in which both the second big winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287 are long open is, and then the V winning during the round game. If the player pays close attention to the mouth 287, it is possible to easily determine whether or not the game ball has won the V prize, which may rather reduce the interest.

Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the following configuration is adopted in order to prevent such a problem from occurring. That is, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a "5R probability variation A" jackpot game, a "5R probability variation B" jackpot game, a "5R regular A" jackpot game, and a "5R regular B" jackpot game. Regarding, with respect to the round game currently being played, a configuration is adopted in which the number of rounds indicating the round game is not displayed.

By adopting this configuration, even if it is known in advance what round game the round game in which the game ball can win is, whether or not it is currently being played. It becomes difficult to determine whether or not the above problem occurs, and it is possible to easily and effectively suppress the occurrence of the above problem. The configuration in which the number of rounds is not displayed during the jackpot game will be described later in more detail with reference to FIG.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, a configuration is adopted in which the long opening and the short opening of the second special winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287 are alternately performed. Specifically, for example, in the case of a jackpot game of 5R probability variation A (see FIG. 7(A)), a first round game in which both the second special winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287 are shortly opened and then long opened Then, the second big winning opening 28 is opened for a short time and then opened for a long time. The second round game (V winning opening 287 is only one short opening) and the V winning opening 287 is opened for a long time. The 3R round game (the second big winning opening 28 is only one short opening) is played.

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when executing a plurality of round games including an effective round game, it is possible to recognize which round game the round game being executed is. The opening/closing member 29 and the slide member 285 operate in a difficult manner. Therefore, for example, the short opening of the second big winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287 that is first performed after the jackpot game is started is the first round game, and is first played after the jackpot game is started. It is possible to make the player feel that the long opening of the second special winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287 may be the second round game, and it is possible to easily enhance the effect of making the current round number difficult to understand. It is possible.

In addition, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment employs a configuration in which the V winning of the game ball is valid only for a predetermined round game. Specifically, regarding any of the four types of jackpot games that can be executed when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “jack”, the 1R round game and the 3R round game And, when the game ball passes through the V winning opening 287, an effective period during which the V winning is valid is set (see FIGS. 7A to 7D). For example, when "5R probability variation A" or "5R probability variation B" is won, both the second big winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287 are opened long in the 1R round game and the 3R round game in the jackpot game. (See FIGS. 7A and 7B). Therefore, the player can easily win the V game ball by simply making a right hit, and after the jackpot game is completed, the "probability variation game state" is achieved in accordance with the V prize of the game ball. Will control the game.

On the other hand, for any of the above four types of jackpot games, the valid period is not set for the jackpot game of the second round, the round game of the fourth round, and the round game of the fifth round (FIG. 7(A)- (D)). For example, when "5R normal A" or "5R normal B" is won, as illustrated in FIGS. 7C and 7D, in the 2R round game and the 4R round game in the jackpot game. Although both the second special winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287 are opened for a long time, they are not valid during the round game. Therefore, even if the game ball passes through the V winning opening 287, the V winning does not occur, and after the jackpot game is over, the game is controlled in the "time saving game state".

As described above, in addition to not being notified of the V winning of the game ball and not displaying the current number of rounds, in addition to the case where both the second special winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287 are opened for a long time, a certain change occurs. There are times when the game is controlled in the gaming state and times when the game is controlled in the time saving gaming state. Therefore, it is difficult to clearly determine whether the round game in which both the second special winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287 are long open is the effective round game or the ineffective round game. Therefore, it is possible to make it more difficult to determine whether the game ball has won the V prize.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the "5R probability variation A" jackpot game, the "5R probability variation B" jackpot game, the "5R regular A" jackpot game, and the "5R regular B" jackpot game The actual number of rounds is set to 2R. Therefore, based on the actual number of rounds, it is determined whether it is a jackpot game that includes an effective round game or a round game that does not include an effective round game, and based on the determination result (V winning opening 287 It is possible to make it difficult to specify whether or not (the passage of the game ball to) is a V prize.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a jackpot game (see FIGS. 7C and 7D) composed of a plurality of round games that does not include a valid round game may be executed, and the jackpot game may be executed a plurality of times. In the non-effective round game of the round game, it is possible to operate the opening/closing member 29 and the slide member 285. Specifically, regarding the “5R normal A” jackpot game and the “5R normal B” jackpot game, the second big winning opening 28 is opened long in the 2R round game and the 4R round game. The opening/closing member 29 operates, and the slide member 285 operates such that the V winning opening 287 is opened long. In this way, the effective round game (1R round game of "5R probability variation A": see FIG. 7A, 3R round game of "5R probability variation B": see FIG. 7B) is not specified. The opening/closing member 29 and the slide member in both of the round games (the second round game of the "5R normal A": see FIG. 7C, the fourth round game of the "5R normal B": see FIG. 7D) Since 285 operates, it is difficult to specify whether or not it is an effective round game based on the operation of the opening/closing member 29 and the slide member 285.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, although the timing is different for the 5R probability variation A big hit game and the 5R normal A big hit game, the second big winning opening 28 (and the V winning opening 287) are short open and long. A configuration is adopted in which the opening order (opening pattern) is matched. Specifically, in both the 5R probability variation A jackpot game and the 5R normal A jackpot game, the second winning hole 28 is short open, long open, short open, long open, short open, short open, short. They are opened in the order of opening (see FIGS. 7A and 7C). Further, in both the 5R probability variation A jackpot game and the 5R normal A jackpot game, the V winning opening 287 is opened in the order of short opening, long opening, short opening, short opening, long opening (FIG. 7(A ) And (C)).

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, regarding the 5R probability variation B big hit game and the 5R normal B big hit game, although the timings are different from each other, the short opening and long opening of the second big winning opening 28 (and the V winning opening 287). A configuration is adopted in which the opening order (opening pattern) is matched. Specifically, for both the 5R probability variation B jackpot game and the 5R normal B jackpot game, the second winning hole 28 is in the order of short open, long open, short open, long open, short open, short open. It is opened (see FIGS. 7B and 7D). Further, for both the 5R probability variation B jackpot game and the 5R normal B jackpot game, the V winning opening 287 is opened in the order of short opening, long opening, short opening, short opening, long opening (FIG. 7(A ) And (C)).

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, with respect to the 5R probability variation A and the 5R normal A, the opening patterns of the second special winning opening 28 (and the V winning opening 287) during the big hit game are the same, and the 5R probability variation is also Regarding B and 5R normal B, the opening patterns of the second special winning opening 28 (and the V winning opening 287) during the big hit game match. Therefore, based on the opening pattern of the second special winning opening 28 (and V winning opening 287), 5R probability variation A and 5R normal A, or 5R probability variation B and 5R normal B are determined. It is difficult to do so, and as a result, it is possible to effectively suppress the occurrence of the above-mentioned problem that it is possible to easily determine whether or not the game ball has won the V prize.

[About the flow of games]
Next, the flow of the game will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the flow of the game in the gaming machine 1. Due to the board surface configuration of the game board 2, the game balls launched in the left game area 3L can enter the first starting port 21, while the game balls launched in the right game area 3R enter the first starting port 21. There is no such thing. Further, in the normal gaming state, the second starting port 22 is unlikely to be in the open state, and even if it is in the open state, the opening time of the second starting port 22 is extremely short, and the game ball is in the second starting port 22. The chances of winning a prize are extremely low. For this reason, there is no merit that the player hits right in the normal gaming state. As is clear from these, in the normal game state, it is easier for the player to hit the game ball in the left game area 3L than in the right game area 3R to attract a big hit (the special symbol determination is easily executed) on the left side advantageous state. Is. For this reason, the player performs left-handing in the normal gaming state.

When the game ball left-handed in the normal gaming state wins the first starting opening 21, the first special symbol determination is executed, and after the first special symbol is variably displayed on the first special symbol display 41. , The first special symbol showing the determination result of the first special symbol determination is stopped and displayed. Here, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "miss", the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol. On the other hand, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit", as the big hit symbol, one of the big hit symbols X1 to X4 (see FIG. 6B) is stopped and displayed, and the big hit symbol that is stopped and displayed. The jackpot game corresponding to is executed.

When the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit", when the jackpot symbol that notifies the probability variation jackpot is stopped (see FIG. 8A), the jackpot symbol that normally notifies the jackpot is stopped and displayed. (See FIG. 8E).

Here, when the jackpot pattern X1 for notifying the probability variation jackpot is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game (including the valid round game) described above based on FIG. 7A is executed, and the jackpot symbol for notifying the probability variation jackpot as well. When X2 is stopped and displayed, the jackpot game (including the valid round game) described above based on FIG. 7B is executed. When a jackpot game including these valid round games is executed, if the jackpot does not occur on the way after the jackpot game is finished, provided that the game ball has won V during the valid round game, the second special The game is controlled in the probability variation game state which continues until the symbol determination (or the first special symbol determination) is executed 80 times (see FIG. 8(B)). On the other hand, if the game ball does not win V due to the fact that the player did not make a right hit during the effective round game, etc., even though the effective round game was executed, the big hit is a big hit on the way at the end of the game. If does not occur, the second special symbol determination (or the first special symbol determination) shifts to the time saving game state which continues until it is executed 80 times (see FIG. 8(G)).

Here, the probability variation gaming state is set to a probability (11/11 in the present embodiment) that the winning probability of the normal symbol determination performed on the condition that the gaming ball has passed through the gate 25 is relatively high, and is also ordinary. When the symbol determination is won, the opening time of the second starting opening 22 is set to a relatively long time (1.5 seconds×3 times in this embodiment). For this reason, the probability variation gaming state is a right advantageous state in which a player who launches a game ball in the right gaming region 3R is more likely to hit a jackpot than is launched in the left gaming region 3L (a special symbol determination is easily executed). Therefore, when the game is controlled in the probability variation game state, the player makes a right-handed hit. This is the same when the game is controlled in the normal game state.

When the game ball that is hit to the right when the game is controlled in the probability variation gaming state wins the second starting opening 22, the second special symbol determination is executed, and in the second special symbol display 42, the second special symbol. After variably displayed, the second special symbol showing the determination result of the second special symbol determination is stopped and displayed. Here, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "miss", the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol. On the other hand, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is “big hit”, one of the big hit symbols Y1 to Y3 (see FIG. 6C) is stopped and displayed, and the big hit symbol that is stopped and displayed. The jackpot game corresponding to is executed.

When the determination result of the second special symbol determination is “big hit”, the jackpot symbol that notifies the probability variation jackpot is stopped and displayed (see FIG. 8C), while the jackpot symbol that normally notifies the jackpot is stopped and displayed. (See FIG. 6C). Here, when any of the jackpot symbols Y1 to Y3 for notifying the probability variation jackpot is stopped and displayed, a jackpot game including an effective round game using the second jackpot 28 is executed, and a game ball during this effective round game. After the jackpot game ends, the game is controlled again in the probability variation game state on the condition that the player has won the V prize (see FIGS. 8C and 8B). On the other hand, if the game ball does not win V during the effective round game despite the execution of the effective round game, at the end of the jackpot game, the time saving game state is entered (see FIG. 8(G)).

In addition, when the determination results of the 80th second special symbol determination (or the first special symbol determination) performed in the probability variation gaming state are all “miss”, the gaming state is changed from the probability variation gaming state to the normal game. It will be returned to the state (see FIG. 8D).

On the other hand, when the big hit symbol X3 (or the big hit symbol X4) is stopped and displayed as the big hit symbol for notifying the big hit in the normal gaming state (see FIG. 8E), when the big hit game ends, if the big hit does not occur on the way. The second special symbol determination (or the first special symbol determination) shifts to a time saving game state that continues until it is executed 80 times (see FIG. 8(F)).

When the game ball that has been hit to the right when the game is controlled in the time saving game state wins the second starting opening 22, the second special symbol determination is executed, and in the second special symbol display 42, the second special symbol. After variably displayed, the second special symbol showing the determination result of the second special symbol determination is stopped and displayed. Here, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "miss", the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the second special symbol. On the other hand, when the determination result of the second special symbol determination is “big hit”, one of the big hit symbols Y1 to Y3 (see FIG. 6(C)) is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol for notifying the probability variation big hit, and stopped. The jackpot game corresponding to the displayed jackpot pattern is executed (see FIG. 8(H)). This jackpot game is a jackpot game including an effective round game, and the gaming state shifts to the probability variation gaming state at the end of the jackpot game, provided that the gaming ball has won V during this valid round game (FIG. 8 ( See I)). On the other hand, if the game ball does not win V during the effective round game despite the effective round game being executed, the jackpot game is transitioned to the time saving game state (see FIG. 8(J)).

In addition, when the determination results of the 80th second special symbol determination (or the first special symbol determination) performed in the time saving game state are all “miss”, the game state is changed from the time saving game state to the normal game. It will be returned to the state (see FIG. 8(K)).

[Variation production]
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, various effects are performed on the display screen 70 as the first special symbol (or the second special symbol) is variably displayed and then stopped and displayed, but here, The variation effect performed on the display screen 70 in association with the variation display of the first special symbol will be described.

In the gaming machine 1, when the game ball wins the first starting opening 21 and the first special symbol determination is executed, the first special symbol display 41 variably displays the first special symbol and then the first special symbol. The first special symbol showing the determination result of the symbol determination is stopped and displayed. The display screen 70 is provided with an effect symbol display area 73 (see FIG. 2) in which an effect symbol for notifying the determination result of the first special symbol determination (or the second special symbol determination) is displayed, and the display screen 70 Then, along with the variable display of the first special symbol, the variable effect including the variable display of the effect symbol is performed (see FIG. 2). Then, when the first special symbol is variably displayed for the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern selected when the first special symbol determination is executed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, and The effect symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode showing the determination result of the first special symbol determination.

A so-called reach effect may be performed during such variable display of effect symbols. Specifically, in the effect symbol display area 73 of the display screen 70, for example, a part of the symbol row of the effect symbols in which the numbers 1 to 9 are continuously written in the vertical direction from bottom to top is in the horizontal direction. Three columns are displayed, and when the variable display of the first special symbol is started, these symbol columns are variably displayed (scroll display) so as to scroll from top to bottom. On the other hand, when the reach effect is performed, before all the effect symbols are stopped and displayed, first, for example, the effect symbol in the left column (left symbol) and the effect symbol in the right column (right symbol) , But in order or at the same time, make a pseudo stop so as not to stop completely. FIG. 2 exemplifies a state in which 3 symbols are pseudo-stopped as the left symbol and 3 symbols are similarly pseudo-stopped as the right symbol, and the middle symbol symbol column continues scrolling display. It should be noted that the pseudo stop is an effect in which the effect symbol is oscillated on the spot with almost no movement, and in the following description, the effect symbol is completely stopped (may be simply referred to as “stop display”). In some cases, it is called a pseudo stop.

When the same effect symbol as the left symbol and the right symbol is pseudo-stopped on the activated line, the reach is established, and the reach effect that causes the player to expect that the same effect symbol will be three is performed. This reach production, the reach design (the left design and the right design) in the state where the pseudo stop is done, the production design which forms the design row of the middle row (the middle design) is scrolled at a low speed so that the player can identify, and finally. , A medium symbol common to the reach symbol, or a medium symbol different from the reach symbol is stopped on the activated line to notify the winning or losing.

Although detailed description is omitted, in addition to the effect design, other display objects such as characters and items are used for such reach effect. Further, in the following description, in the variable effect in which the reach effect is performed, the effect performed until the reach is established may be referred to as “pre-reach effect”.

Although the type of reach effect will be described in detail later, if the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “miss”, three effect symbols indicating reach miss eyes (for example, “323”) are pseudo-stopped to notify the loss. Then, as the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, these three effect symbols are completely stopped. On the other hand, if the reach effect is not performed, the three effect symbols indicating the gaps (for example, “629”) are pseudo-stopped to notify the loss, and the lost symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol. Along with this, these three effect symbols are permanently stopped. In this way, when it is determined that the big hit game is not executed, the three (3) effect symbols are pseudo-stopped by the reach lose eye or the broken eye indicating the lose, and then the main stop is performed to notify the lose (the big hit game is not executed). The loss notification effect is executed.

When this loss notification effect is executed, the jackpot game is not executed, and if the right of the first special symbol determination is reserved, the first special symbol and the effect symbol only for a predetermined fixed time (for example, 0.5 seconds). After the stop display, the first special symbol determination is performed, and the next variable display of the first special symbol is started.

On the other hand, if the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit", the reach effect is usually executed during the variable display of the first special symbol, and a doublet (for example, "333") is shown to notify the big hit. The three effect symbols are pseudo-stopped, and as the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, these three effect symbols are permanently stopped. In this way, when it is determined that the jackpot game is to be executed, the hit notification effect of notifying the jackpot (that the jackpot game is to be executed) by stopping the three effect symbols in a manner indicating the jackpot in a pseudo manner and then stopping this Executed. When this hit notification effect is executed, a big hit game is executed.

[Screen configuration of display screen 70]
FIG. 2 illustrates the screen configuration of the display screen 70 in the normal game state. When the game is controlled in the normal game state, a hold icon display area 71, the icon display area 72, and an effect symbol display area 73 are formed on the display screen 70 as illustrated in FIG. In the effect symbol display area 73, as described above, the left symbol constituting the symbol column in the left column, the middle symbol constituting the symbol column in the middle column, and the right symbol constituting the symbol column in the right column are displayed. This is the display area.

<Hold icon display area 71>
The hold icon display area 71 is a display area in which a hold icon indicating that the first special symbol determination is held is displayed. In the gaming machine 1, in the situation where the special symbol determination and the variable display of the special symbol cannot be immediately started, such as during the variable display of the special symbol or during the big hit game, when the game ball wins the first starting opening 21, the first special The right of symbol determination is reserved with a predetermined number (four in this embodiment) as an upper limit.

In this way, when the right for the first special symbol determination is suspended, the suspension icon display area 71 displays the same number of suspension icons as the suspension number for the first special symbol determination shown by the first special symbol suspension display 44. To be done. FIG. 2 exemplifies a state in which two hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 71 in order to suggest that the hold number of the first special symbol determination is “2”.

If a hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 71 during a highly reliable reach effect such as SPSP reach described later, not only the display area used for the reach effect is limited, but also the hold effect is held. Displaying the icon may reduce the fun of the reach production. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, during normal reach or SP reach, the display object (the pedestal of the hold icon in the present embodiment) or the hold icon forming the hold icon display area 71 is displayed, while the normal reach or SP is displayed. As the reach effect develops from reach to SPSP reach, the display objects and hold icons that form the hold icon display area 71 are deleted from the display screen 70, and the hold icon display area 71 is formed after the SPSP reach is completed. The display object and the hold icon are displayed again.

Further, when the game is controlled in the normal game state, the game ball does not basically win the second starting opening 22. Therefore, in the normal game state, basically, the right of the second special symbol determination is not suspended, and the display screen 70 displays a suspension icon related to the second special symbol determination, or this suspension icon. A display area for displaying is not formed.

<The icon display area 72>
The icon display area 72 is a display area for displaying the icon as a variation suggesting image that suggests that the first special symbol is variably displayed. The icon is displayed in the icon display area 72 with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, and, for example, at the timing when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed (the timing at which the fluctuating effect symbol is stopped). It is erased from the icon display area 72. However, the deletion timing of the icon is not limited to this, and the icon may be deleted during the variable display of the first special symbol, for example, during the SPSP reach development described later or during the SPSP reach. The icon may be deleted.

By the way, if the variation display of the special symbol is not performed, and the game ball is won in the first starting opening 21 in the state where the right of the special symbol determination is not reserved, the variation display of the first special symbol is started. Accordingly, the icon is displayed in the icon display area 72. On the other hand, in the state where the hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 71, when the variable display of the symbol corresponding to the icon displayed in the icon display area 72 ends, the display is displayed in the hold icon display area 71. The first special symbol determination corresponding to the earliest hold icon (hold icon displayed at the position closest to the icon display area 72) is executed. Then, as the variable display of the first special symbol is started according to the execution of this first special symbol determination, the earliest hold icon is shifted from the hold icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72, It will be displayed as a new icon. In this way, the hold icon (here, the icon) shifted to the icon display area 72 is displayed larger than when it is displayed in the hold icon display area 71 (see FIG. 2 ). Therefore, it is possible to cause the player to pay attention to the icon displayed in the icon display area 72 rather than the held icon displayed in the hold icon display area 71.

If another hold icon different from the first hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 71, the hold icon display area 71 is moved along with the shift of the first hold icon to the icon display area 72. In, the other hold icon shifts toward the icon display area 72. As is clear from the description so far, in the gaming machine 1, since the icon corresponding to the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 71 may be displayed in the icon display area 72, the following description will be given. In the case where the hold icon and the icon are not distinguished, they may be collectively referred to simply as "icons".

(About icon change production)
By the way, the hold icon is normally displayed as a white hold icon (default hold icon: white icon) (see FIG. 21A). On the other hand, when the hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 71, an icon change effect in which the display mode of the hold icon changes may be performed. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, there are cases where the display color of the hold icon changes and cases where the display color and shape of the hold icon change depending on the icon change effect. When this icon change effect is performed, the white hold icon changes to a hold icon of a color such as blue, green, red, or iridescent that indicates the jackpot reliability. The colors suggesting the jackpot reliability illustrated here are arranged in the order of low to high jackpot reliability. The iridescent color is selected only when the determination result of the suspended first special symbol determination is “big hit”, and is not selected when the result is “miss”. Red, if the determination result of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the red holding icon is a "big hit", or if it is "miss" but the variation time of the special symbol is set to a relatively long time (As the reach effect, when it is developed to reach effect with relatively high jackpot reliability such as SP reach or SPSP reach), it is easily selected. Green is easy to be selected when it is a "big hit" or when it is "missing" but when the variation time of the special symbol is set to a medium time. Blue is easy to be selected when it is "miss" or "miss" and when the variation time of the special symbol is set to a relatively short time, and is difficult to be selected when it is "big hit". In the present embodiment, the jackpot reliability of the blue hold icon is set to about 3%, the jackpot reliability of the green hold icon is set to about 15%, and the jackpot reliability of the red hold icon is set to about 45%. It is set, and the jackpot reliability of the iridescent hold icon is set to 100%.

Here, the case where the icon change effect in which the display color changes only once when the hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 71 is described as an example, but the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment Then, another icon change effect may be performed. That is, for example, when a white hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 71, it changes to a blue hold icon and then to a green hold icon. In some cases, an icon change effect in which the display color of the hold icon changes a plurality of times may be performed. Further, when the white hold icon shifted from the hold icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72 is displayed as the icon, an icon change effect in which the display color changes may be performed.

In addition, the display color of the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 71 changes, and then the display color changes when the hold icon is shifted to the icon display area 72 and displayed as the icon. In some cases, an icon change effect in which the display color of the icon changes in both the hold icon display area 71 and the icon display area 72 is performed. In addition, an icon change effect in which the hold icon is initially displayed in a display color other than white (for example, blue) or an icon change effect in which the display color of the hold icon whose initial color is other than white is changed may be performed. .. Further, for example, when the right of the first special symbol determination is not reserved, and when the game ball wins the first starting opening 21 in a state where the first special symbol is not variably displayed, it is white at the winning timing. There may be a case where an icon change effect in which the icon of a display color other than the above (for example, green) is displayed or an icon change effect in which the display color of the icon changes to another display color (for example, red).

In this way, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment can display the hold information indicating that the right for special symbol determination is held on the display screen 70, and change the display mode of the hold information. .. In addition, in the following description, a hold icon having a display color other than white and the icon may be referred to as a “special icon” to be distinguished from a normal hold icon having a white display color and the icon.

[Modification regarding display control of hold information]
The display control of the hold information is not limited to the one illustrated in the present embodiment, and may be the following. That is, in the present embodiment, for convenience of description, a case where the display colors of the icons (holding icon and the icon) are five colors of white, blue, green, red, and iridescent will be described as an example, but other implementations In the form, a gold color may be prepared, which indicates that the jackpot reliability is higher than the red color but the jackpot reliability is lower than the iridescent color.

Further, in the present embodiment, in addition to the icon change effect for the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 71, the icon change effect for the icon displayed in the icon display area 72 can be executed. Although a case will be described, in another embodiment, a configuration capable of executing only the former icon change effect without providing the icon display area 72 (without displaying the icon) may be adopted.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case where a hold icon as hold information is displayed on the display screen 70 and the display color of the hold icon is changed will be described as an example. On the other hand, in another embodiment, for example, four color LEDs whose emission colors can be changed are provided, and the same number of LEDs as the number of holdings of the first special symbol determination are turned on, and the emission color of any of the LEDs is changed. The display mode of the hold information may be changed by changing it.

[Flow of production accompanying variable display of the first special symbol]
FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the flow of the reach effect. When the first special symbol determination is executed, the first special symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode showing the determination result of the first special symbol determination after the first special symbol is variably displayed. On the other hand, on the display screen 70, as the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the scroll display of the three symbol columns in the effect symbol display area 73 is started (see FIG. 9(A)). ..

Here, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "miss", for example, different production symbols as left symbols and right symbols are pseudo-stopped on the activated line, and the middle row symbol row in this non-reach mode. An effect without reach (see FIG. 9(B)) in which only the scroll is displayed may be performed. When this reach-less effect is performed, the three effect symbols showing the variability are pseudo-stopped at the end of the variable display of the first special symbol, and these are accompanied by the stop symbol being displayed as the first special symbol. A loss notification effect (see FIG. 9(C)) for permanently stopping the three effect symbols will be performed.

On the other hand, if the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit", or if it is decided to perform an effect with reach even though it is "miss", during the variable display of the first special symbol, for example, Pre-reach production where a predetermined left symbol is pseudo-stopped on the effective line of the production symbol display area 73, and then the right symbol which is the same production symbol as the left symbol is moved to the effective line (see FIG. 9(D)). Is done. Then, when the same left symbol and the right symbol are pseudo-stopped on the activated line, reach is established (see FIG. 9(E)). Then, when the reach is established in this way, the predetermined reach that causes the player to expect that the middle design, which is the same production design as the reach design (left design and right design), stops on the effective line and becomes the design alignment. The performance is performed.

In the present embodiment, three types of reach effects, normal reach, SP reach, and SPSP reach, are prepared as reach effects that can be executed with the variable display of the first special symbol (see FIG. 9).

The normal reach (see FIG. 9F) is a reach effect in which the jackpot reliability is relatively low (for example, jackpot reliability: about 2%). When the reach is established, first the normal reach is performed, and during the normal reach, the scroll speed of the middle row of symbols, which is scroll-displayed at high speed between the two reach symbols (left symbol and right symbol), gradually decreases. Go

Here, the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "miss", for example, the variation pattern E (see FIG. 10(B)) having a variation time of 30 seconds at the start of variation display of the first special symbol is selected. If it is, the effect symbol of reach reach eyes (for example, "434") is displayed by pseudo-stopping the middle symbol different from the reach symbol on the activated line, and the loss notification effect (fig. 9(G)).

On the other hand, the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit", for example, a variation pattern A (see FIG. 10(A)) having a variation time of 30 seconds at the start of variation display of the first special symbol is selected. If it is, the same medium symbol as the reach symbol is pseudo-stopped on the activated line to display the effect symbols of the double eyes (for example, “444”), and the hit notification effect for permanently stopping these effect symbols (FIG. 9 ( G) is performed).

In addition, when a variation pattern in which the variation time of the first special symbol is relatively long is selected, the hit symbol effect or the loss alert effect is not performed in the normal reach, and the middle symbol which is the same effect symbol as the reach symbol is effective. After passing along the line, the scroll speed of the middle row of symbols increases, and SP reach (see FIG. 9(H)) or SPSP reach (see FIG. 9(I)) develops.

Although not shown in the figure, in the case of developing to a highly reliable reach production such as SP reach or SPSP reach, the left symbol that has been pseudo stopped moves to the upper left position on the display screen 70 while shrinking. Along with, the right symbol that has been pseudo-stop moves to the upper right position on the display screen 70 while shrinking, and these left symbol and right symbol stop pseudo at the position after the movement, and the symbol column in the middle row is , Is hidden until the end of the high-reliability reach production (see, for example, FIGS. 12A to 12E). Then, the display object and the hold icon forming the hold icon display area 71 are also hidden. As a result, it is possible to perform the highly reliable reach production in a display area wider than the effect symbol display area 73, and it is possible to improve the interest of the highly reliable reach production.

SP reach and SPSP reach are, for example, configured as battle productions in which the player's character fights against enemy characters. SP reach is positioned as the first half of the battle, and SPSP reach is positioned as the second half of the battle. Then, the enemy character who fights is common. That is, for example, in the case where the battle production in which the enemy character A is battled is performed in the SP reach in the first half of the battle, and then the SPSP reach in the second half of the battle is developed, the battle production in which the enemy character A is battled is performed in the SPSP reach. ..

When these SP reach and SPSP reach are compared, SPSP reach has a higher jackpot reliability than SP reach, and the case where SPSP reach develops is better than the case where only SP reach is developed. There is a feature that the notification effect is easily executed.

In the gaming machine 1, the normal reach (see FIG. 9(F)) has evolved from the SP reach in the first half of the battle (see FIG. 9(H)), and at this SP reach, the hit notification effect or loss of FIG. 7(G) is generated. Notification production may be performed. In addition, there are cases where the normal reach develops to SPSP reach via SP reach (see FIG. 7(I)), and cases where normal reach develops directly to SPSP reach without passing through SP reach. In this case, the hit notification effect or the loss notification effect of FIG. 9(G) is performed in this SPSP reach.

It should be noted that the type of reach production and the way of developing the reach production illustrated in FIG. 9 are merely examples, and the type and the way of development of the reach production may be other.

[Variable pattern selection table used in the normal gaming state]
Next, with reference to FIG. 10, a process of selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol in the normal game state will be described. Here, FIG. 10 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the variation pattern selection table used in the process of selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol in the normal gaming state.

In the main ROM 82, as a variation pattern selection table to be referred to when selecting a variation pattern of the special symbol (here, the first special symbol) in the normal gaming state, a variation pattern selection table for jackpot (see FIG. 10A) ), the reach loss variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 10B), and the reach loss variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 10C) are stored. The variation pattern selection table for jackpot is a table that is referred to for selecting a variation pattern of the first special symbol when the determination result of the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state is "big hit". Reach loss variation pattern selection table, the determination result of the first special symbol determination in the normal game state is "miss", and (based on the reach random number), if it is determined to perform the production with reach, the first special symbol 3 is a table that is referred to for selecting the variation pattern of the. In the variation pattern selection table for reach-less loss, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination in the normal game state is “miss”, and it is determined (based on the reach random number) to perform the reach-less effect, the first It is a table referred to for selecting a variation pattern of the special symbol.

(Big hit variation pattern selection table)
In the jackpot variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 10A), the variation pattern of the first special symbol and the random number value that is compared with the variation pattern random number are associated with each other. In addition, in FIG. 10, for convenience of description, in addition to the variation pattern and the number of random numbers associated with each variation pattern, the variation time of the first special symbol, each variation pattern is selected by the sub CPU 91. The types of variation effect patterns, the specific effect contents of the variation effect patterns, the possible range of variation pattern random numbers, and the proportions at which each variation pattern is selected are also shown.

When the main CPU 81 determines to execute the jackpot game based on the jackpot random number obtained in response to the game ball winning the first starting opening 21 in the normal game state, the variation obtained together with the jackpot random number The variation pattern of the first special symbol is selected by reading the variation pattern associated with the same random number as the pattern random number from the jackpot variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 10A).

As illustrated in FIGS. 10A and 10B, the range of the variation pattern random number for selecting the variation pattern of the first special symbol is “0” to “99” in the present embodiment. It is set. In the jackpot variation pattern selection table, as illustrated in FIG. 10A, variation pattern A is associated with two random number values, and variation pattern B is associated with 18 random number values. The variation pattern C is associated with 35 random number values, and the variation pattern D is associated with 45 random number values.

Therefore, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “big hit”, the variation pattern A is selected at a rate of 2% (=2/100×100), and the variation pattern A is 18% (=18/100×100). The variation pattern B is selected at a rate, the variation pattern C is selected at a rate of 35% (=35/100×100), and the variation pattern D is selected at a rate of 45% (=45/100×100). Then, for example, when the variation pattern A is selected, the variation effect pattern A is selected by the sub CPU 91, and the variation effect of performing the hit notification effect by the normal reach is performed. In addition, for example, when the variation pattern D is selected, the variation effect pattern D is selected by the sub CPU 91, and a variation effect is performed in which the SPSP reach developed from the normal reach through the SP reach provides a hit notification effect. become.

(Variable pattern selection table for reach loss)
If the main CPU 81 determines in the first special symbol determination that the jackpot game is not to be executed, whether or not the reachable effect is performed based on the reach random number acquired together with the jackpot random number, the symbol random number, and the variation pattern random number. To decide. Specifically, whether any variation pattern is selected from the variation pattern group in which the reach effect is performed (see FIG. 10B) or the reach effect is not performed (the reach-less effect is performed) It is determined which variation pattern is selected from the pattern group (see FIG. 10C). Here, when it is determined to perform the effect with reach, the variation pattern of the first special symbol is selected with reference to the reach/loss variation pattern selection table.

In the reach loss variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 10B), the variation pattern of the first special symbol and the random number value to be compared with the variation random number are associated with each other. In the normal game state, the main CPU 81 determines not to execute the jackpot game based on the jackpot random number obtained in response to the game ball winning the first starting opening 21, and the reach random number obtained together with the jackpot random number. When it is decided to perform the production with reach based on, the variation pattern associated with the same random number value as the variation pattern random number acquired together with these random numbers is used for the reach loss variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 10B). ), the variation pattern of the first special symbol is selected.

In the reach/displacement variation pattern selection table, as illustrated in FIG. 10B, 40 random number values are associated with the variation pattern E, and 30 random number values are associated with the variation pattern F. The variation pattern G is associated with 20 random number values, and the variation pattern H is associated with 10 random number values.

Therefore, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “miss” and it is determined to perform the effect with reach, the variation pattern E is selected at a rate of 40% (=40/100×100), and 30 The variation pattern F is selected at a rate of% (=30/100×100), the variation pattern G is selected at a rate of 20% (=20/100×100), and the variation pattern G is selected at a rate of 10% (=10/100×100). The variation pattern H is selected in proportion. Then, for example, when the variation pattern F is selected, the variation effect pattern F is selected by the sub CPU 91, and the variation effect of performing the loss notification effect is performed in the SP reach that has evolved from the normal reach. In addition, for example, when the variation pattern H is selected, the variation effect pattern H is selected by the sub CPU 91, and variation effect is performed in which the SPSP reach developed from the normal reach through the SP reach provides the loss notification effect. become.

(Variable pattern selection table for loss without reach)
When the main CPU 81 determines not to execute the jackpot game based on the jackpot random number, and determines to perform the reachless effect based on the reach random number acquired together with the jackpot random number, the reachless loss variation pattern selection table is displayed. The variation pattern of the first special symbol is selected with reference.

No reach reach variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 10 (C)), the variation pattern of the special symbol, and the number of holding of the first special symbol determination when the variation display of the first special symbol this time is started, It is associated.

Main CPU81, with the start of variable display of the first special symbol this time, when the number of reservations of the first special symbol determination is "0" or "1", the variation time of the first special symbol is 13 seconds When a certain variation pattern J is selected and the number of holding of the first special symbol determination is "2", the variation pattern K in which the variation time of the first special symbol is 8 seconds is selected. Further, the main CPU 81, the number of suspension of the first special symbol determination is the upper limit of "4" during the variable display of the first special symbol, and the first special symbol determination with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol this time. When the number of reservations of “3” is “3”, the variation pattern L in which the variation time of the first special symbol is 4 seconds is selected.

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the jackpot game is not executed, and when it is determined that the reach-less effect is performed, it is the number of the reserved first special symbol determination right. If the number of holdings is relatively large, the holding of the first special symbol determination can be newly stored according to the new winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 21, so that the variation time is relatively short. A fluctuation pattern is selected. On the other hand, if the number of holdings is relatively small, the variation pattern of the first special symbol in which the variation time is relatively long in order to prevent the first special symbol and the effect symbol from varying and stopping the progress of the game Is selected.

The following can be said from the description of the two variation pattern selection tables illustrated in FIGS. 10A and 10B. That is, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit", a variation pattern having a long variation time is likely to be selected, and conversely, a variation pattern having a short variation time tends to be difficult to be selected (FIG. 10). (See (A)). Further, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “miss” and the reach effect is performed, it is difficult to select a variation pattern having a long variation time, and conversely, a variation pattern having a short variation time is likely to be selected. There is a tendency (see FIG. 10(B)).

From these, it can be said that the longer the variation time of the first special symbol is, the easier the notification effect is executed, and conversely, the shorter the variation time of the first special symbol is, the easier the notification information of loss is executed. In other words, when the reach production is performed over a relatively long time, such as when the normal reach is developed to the SPSP reach via the SP reach, the hit notification production is easily executed, and the reach reach is performed only in the normal reach. It can be said that the loss notification effect is easily executed when the time required for the effect is relatively short. That is, instead of being notified of the winning by the normal reach production, it is developed from normal reach to SP reach or SPSP reach, or from normal reach to SP reach (or directly without SP reach) SPSP reach It can be said that jackpot reliability is higher when it develops into.

[Preliminary judgment processing]
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the right of the first special symbol determination is suspended, prior to the first special symbol determination being performed for the right, whether or not to execute the jackpot game Pre-judgment processing may be performed. Specifically, the main CPU 81 obtains a jackpot random number in response to the game ball winning the first starting opening 21, and based on the obtained jackpot random number, it is performed at the start of variable display of the first special symbol. Large jackpot determination process in the 1 special symbol determination (see step S308 of FIG. 42) similar to the jackpot determination process, if the first special symbol determination is executed "whether to be a jackpot" Determine in advance. Further, based on the variation pattern random number acquired together with the jackpot random number, the same processing as the variation pattern selection processing (see step S309 in FIG. 42) described above with reference to FIGS. Which variation pattern will be selected when the 1 special symbol determination is executed is determined in advance.

In this way, the main CPU 81, when performing the preliminary determination process in response to the right of the first special symbol determination being suspended, issues a suspension command including the preliminary determination information indicating the preliminary determination result to the sub-control board 90. Send. On the other hand, the sub CPU 91 determines whether to execute the icon change effect described above, based on the preliminary determination information included in the hold command. Then, when it is determined to execute the icon change effect, it is determined in what change pattern the display mode (the icon color in the present embodiment) of the icon (the hold icon or the icon) is changed, and the determination result The image/sound control board 100 is caused to execute the icon change effect based on.

[About production mode]
When the game ball is won in the first starting port 21 while the game is controlled in the normal game state, the first special symbol determination is executed. When this first special symbol determination is executed, in the first special symbol display 41, after the first special symbol is variably displayed, the first special symbol showing the determination result of the first special symbol determination is stopped and displayed. It On the other hand, on the display screen 70, the variable effect of displaying the effect symbol in accordance with the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, and the determination result of the first special symbol determination is accompanied by the stop display of the first special symbol. The effect design is stopped and displayed in a manner of informing. Although not shown in the figure, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, three types of normal mode, chance mode, and intense heat mode are prepared as effect modes when the variable effect is performed in the normal game state. Has been done.

When these three effect modes are compared, the composition of the effect symbol, the variation mode of the effect symbol, the background image displayed on the display screen 70 during the variable effect, the effect sound output from the speaker 38 during the variable effect, the variable effect. There is a feature that the type of the notice effect executed during, the light emission pattern of the frame lamp 37 and the board lamp 5 during the variable effect may be different from each other. In addition, the chance mode is a production mode that suggests that the jackpot reliability is higher than the normal mode, and the intense heat mode is a production mode that suggests that the jackpot reliability is even higher than the chance mode. Moreover, the jackpot reliability varies depending on the effect mode.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, if the jackpot reliability is relatively high, that is, if the determination result of the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state is "big hit", or if there is "miss", it fluctuates When the variation pattern of the first special symbol having a relatively long time is selected, the effect mode is changed from the normal mode to the chance mode and the variable effect is performed in the chance mode, or the effect mode is intense heat from the normal mode. The mode may be changed to the intense heat mode, or the effect mode may be changed from the normal mode to the intense heat mode via the chance mode and the variable effect may be performed in the intense heat mode. is there.

Further, when the right of the first special symbol determination is suspended, the above-described pre-determination process (see FIG. 41) may be executed by the main CPU 81. When this pre-determination process is executed, based on the result of the pre-determination, it is a variable display of the first special symbol (and effect symbol) corresponding to the first special symbol determination that is the target of the pre-determination process. Before the "target change" is started, the production mode shifts from the normal mode to the chance mode, from the normal mode to the intense heat mode, or from the normal mode to the intense heat mode via the chance mode. There are also things to do. Further, the effect mode may shift from the normal mode to the chance mode before the change of the prefetch target starts, and the effect mode may shift from the chance mode to the intense heat mode after the change of the prefetch target starts.

In the normal mode, there are a first normal mode, a second normal mode, and a third normal mode, and when these normal modes are compared, the composition of the effect symbol, the variation mode of the effect symbol, the variable effect The background image displayed on the display screen 70, the effect sound output from the speaker 38 during the change effect, the type of the notice effect executed during the change effect, the light emission of the frame lamp 37 and the board lamp 5 during the change effect. Although the patterns are different from each other, there is no difference in the jackpot reliability.

[Specific Example of Effect in First Normal Mode in Normal Game State]
Next, a specific example of the effect in the first normal mode in the normal game state will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12 are screen diagrams illustrating the effect in the first normal mode in the normal game state, and here, as the variation pattern of the first special symbol in the normal game state, the SPSP reach that has evolved from the normal reach is notified of a hit. The effect executed when the variation pattern C (see FIG. 10A) in which the effect is to be performed is selected will be described. In addition, here, during the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state, as a notice effect for notifying that the jackpot symbol may be executed, the first notice, the second notice, the third notice, and A case where four types of notice effects of the fourth notice are executed will be described as an example.

In the first normal mode, the effect symbol composed of the numbers to which the character image is not added is displayed on the display screen 70, and each effect symbol scrolls downward. Further, during the variation effect in the first normal mode, the background image dedicated to the first normal mode is displayed on the display screen 70, and the BGM dedicated to the first normal mode is output from the speaker 38.

In FIG. 11(A), on the display screen 70, with one hold icon (for example, a red hold icon) displayed in the hold icon display area 71, the icon displayed in the icon display area 72 is displayed. In order to inform that the determination result of the corresponding first special symbol determination is “miss”, as the first special symbol is displayed as a stop symbol, an effect symbol showing “526” is displayed. The state in which the display is stopped is illustrated. In this way, when the predetermined confirmation time (0.5 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the lost symbol was stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the earliest hold displayed in the hold icon display area 71 The first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon (here, red reserved icon) is executed. Then, the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit", and when the variation pattern C is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the following effect is performed.

That is, as the variable display of the first special symbol is started in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the earliest hold icon, the earliest displayed in the hold icon display area 71. The hold icon of is shifted to the icon display area 72, and the scroll display of the three symbol columns is started (see FIGS. 11A and 11B). When a predetermined time has elapsed after the scroll display of these three symbol columns was started, the first notice may be executed (see FIG. 11(C)). For example, as the first notice, the display mode of the effect image relating to the step-up notice (first notice effect image) displayed in the central area of the display screen 70 is changed stepwise, and the effect sound relating to the step-up notice is changed. The step-up notice output from the speaker 38 is executed.

Following the above-mentioned first notice, a pseudo-relational effect may be executed. Here, the pseudo-relational effect is such that the effect symbol displayed in the effect symbol display area 73 is variably displayed multiple times during one variable display of the special symbol (here, the first special symbol). It is a production that looks like it. With regard to this pseudo continuous effect, the following effect display is performed.

That is, the scroll speed of the symbol row in the left column is reduced and the left symbol (for example, 6 symbols) is pseudo stopped, and subsequently, the scroll speed of the symbol column in the right column is reduced (the left symbol that was pseudo stopped earlier). Right symbol (for example, 4 symbols) is pseudo-stopped, then the scroll speed of the symbol column in the middle column is reduced, and the 7 symbols are pseudo-stopped as the middle symbol for notifying the execution of the pseudo continuous production (FIG. 11). (D)).

In this way, after the effect symbols that are different from each other as the left symbol and the right symbol are pseudo-stopped, when the seven symbols are pseudo-stopped in the middle row, the variation effect of the pseudo-second series following the variation effect of the pseudo-first station is started. .. Specifically, after the character “×2” that suggests the start of the pseudo second variation effect is displayed in a large size in the central area of the display screen 70, the character “×2” is displayed on the upper left of the display screen 70. It is displayed in a smaller size in one area, and along with this, scroll display of three symbol rows is restarted in the effect symbol display area 73 (see FIGS. 11D and 11E).

When the pseudo second consecutive variation effect is being performed, for example, a dialogue announcement is executed as the second announcement. Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 11(F), an effect image (second notice effect image) showing how a predetermined character makes a dialogue is displayed in the central area of the display screen 70, and the dialogue is performed. The effect sound (for example, the voice of the character) related to the advance notice is output from the speaker 38.

As described above, when the dialogue notice is executed as the second notice during the pseudo second consecutive change effect, the second pseudo consecutive effect during the change display of the first special symbol this time is executed (FIG. 11). (See (G)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 11(G), the scroll speed of the symbol row in the left column is reduced and the left symbol (for example, 2 symbols) is pseudo stopped, and subsequently, in the symbol column in the right column. The scroll speed is decreased and the right symbol (for example, 5 symbols) is pseudo-stopped, and then the scroll speed of the middle row of symbols is reduced and the 7 symbols are pseudo-stopped as the middle symbol.

When the second pseudo continuous effect is executed during the variable display of the first special symbol, the pseudo third continuous variable effect following the pseudo second continuous effect is started. Specifically, after the character “×3” indicating the start of the fluctuating effect of the third pseudo sequence is displayed large in the central area of the display screen 70, the character “x3” is displayed on the upper left of the display screen 70. It is displayed in a smaller size in one area, and along with this, scroll display of three symbol rows is restarted in the effect symbol display area 73 (see FIGS. 11G and 11H).

Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation effect of the pseudo third series in this way, the scroll speed of the symbol row in the left column is reduced and the left symbol (for example, 3 symbols) is pseudo stopped, and subsequently. , The scroll speed of the symbol row in the right column decreases (same as the left symbol) and the right symbol (here, 3 symbols) is pseudo-stopped to establish the reach (see FIG. 11(I)).

In addition, here, the case where "pre-reach pseudo link" for restarting the scroll display of each symbol row is executed before the reach is established (pseudo stop) has been described as an example, but after the reach is established (pseudo stop). There is also a case where "post-reach pseudo-run" for restarting scroll display of each symbol row is executed. In addition, the pseudo continuous effect may be executed both before the reach is established and after the reach is established.

As described above, when the same effect symbol as the left symbol and the right symbol is pseudo stopped and the reach is established, the normal reach is executed (see FIG. 12(A)). Specifically, the scroll speed of the middle row of symbols gradually decreases after the reach is established, and the middle symbol (here, middle 3 symbols) that is the same as the reach symbol (here, left 3 symbols and right 3 symbols) is reached. An effect display is displayed to show how the effective line defined by the design is approaching.

Here, when developing from normal reach to SPSP reach, the following effect display is performed. That is, when scroll display of the middle row of symbols is being performed, the same middle symbols as the reach symbol (three symbols here) pass on the active line, and along with this, the scroll speed of the middle columns of symbols. Rises to a state where it is difficult to identify a middle symbol, and a development effect is suggested that the SPSP reach is developed (see FIG. 12B). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 12(B), one rotation is made clockwise with the scroll direction as the axial direction in the process of moving to the upper left area of the display screen 70 while the left three symbols are reduced. Then, it moves to the upper left area, and at the same time, in the process of moving to the upper right area of the display screen 70 while the right three symbols are reduced, it makes one rotation clockwise with the scroll direction as the axial direction and then the upper right area. Move to one area. After that, until the final stage of the variable display of the first special symbol this time, the left three symbols are pseudo-stopped in the upper left region, and the right three symbols are pseudo-stopped in the upper right region (FIG. 12(C)- (See (H)).

Next, when the development effect (see FIG. 12(B)) that suggests the development to SPSP reach is performed as described above, the third notice (see FIG. 12(A)) described above is generated. The blackout effect that is expected to be performed is performed (see FIG. 12C). Specifically, until a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses after the development effect is performed, as shown in FIG. 12C, the reach pattern (here Then, the effect display is performed in which only the left 3 symbols and the right symbol) and the icon are superimposed and the other effect symbols are hidden.

Following this darkening effect, for example, a group notice may be given as a third notice (see FIG. 12D). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 12(D), effect display is displayed, which shows how many characters move from right to left on the display screen 70.

It should be noted that such a third notice is not necessarily executed if the darkening effect is performed, and if the SPSP reach is started after the third notice is executed following the darkening effect, and following the darkening effect. In some cases, SPSP reach may be started without executing the third notice.

In this way, when the SPSP reach is started, the SPSP reach effect image which is the effect image related to the SPSP reach is displayed on the display screen 70 (see FIG. 12(E)). As a result, for example, an effect display that shows how the own character and the enemy character engage in offense and defense is performed. When the end of SPSP reach is reached, a first effect button operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the first effect button 35 is performed (see FIG. 12(F)). Specifically, a first effect button image imitating the first effect button 35 and an effective period gauge indicating the remaining time of the effective period in which the operation of the first effect button 35 is effective are displayed.

In the first effect button operation promotion effect, the fourth notice is issued at the timing when the first effect button 35 is operated during the effective period or when the effective period ends without the first effect button 35 being operated. As an example, cut-in is performed in which a predetermined cut-in image is superimposed and displayed on the effect image (other than the reach pattern) displayed on the display screen 70 (see FIG. 12(G)). This cut-in is an effect that suggests how big the jackpot reliability is, and when a green cut-in that includes a single character and displays a cut-in image expressed in green is displayed in a superimposed manner. And a case where a red cut-in is performed in which a cut-in image including two characters and expressed in red is superimposed and displayed, and a cut-in image including three characters and expressed in gold is displayed. There are cases where gold cut-ins to be displayed in an overlapping manner are performed, and when these cut-ins are arranged in order from the one with the highest jackpot reliability to the one with the highest jackpot reliability, the order is green cut-in, red cut-in, and gold cut-in. It should be noted that FIG. 12(G) exemplifies how gold cut-in is performed.

When the cut-in occurs in this way and the end of the SPSP reach is reached, the second effect button operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the second effect button 36 is performed (see FIG. 12(H)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 12H, during the effective period of the second effect button operation promotion effect, the second effect button image imitating the second effect button 36 and "press!" A character indicating the operation content of the second effect button 36 and a valid period gauge indicating the remaining time of the valid period are displayed.

When the second effect button 36 is operated during the effective period of the second effect button operation promotion effect, as an operation corresponding effect corresponding to the operation, the three effect symbols showing the double eyes are pseudo-stopped and then the main stop is performed. A hit notification effect is performed (see FIG. 12(I)).

In addition, here, since the variation pattern C (see FIG. 10A) is selected when the variation display of the first special symbol this time is started, the hit notification effect is performed as the operation corresponding effect. When the variation pattern G or the variation pattern H illustrated in FIG. 10(B) is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, as the operation corresponding effect, the three effect symbols showing the reach lost pattern are pseudo-stopped. A loss notification effect in which the game is stopped after being made to be performed is performed.

[Regarding the performance performed during the jackpot game]
As described above, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state is “big hit”, one of the big hit symbols X1 to X4 (see FIG. 6B) is stopped and displayed. Along with this, on the display screen 70, for example, the three effect symbols such as "222" showing the double eyes are stopped. Here, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the doublet of "777" and the doublet of "333" definitely notify that the game is controlled in the probability variation game state after the jackpot game is over. With regard to a part of the case where 5R probability variation A or 5R probability variation B is selected as the type of jackpot relating to the first special symbol determination, these Zoro are used as three effect symbols for notifying the probability variation jackpot. Either one of the eyes is permanently stopped on the display screen 70.

In this way, when the three production symbols showing the double stitches of "777" or "333" which definitely informs the probability variation jackpot are stopped, the jackpot game which always includes the effective round game is executed. Therefore, during the effective round game, a launch promotion effect (see FIGS. 13B and 13C) that prompts the player to launch a game ball aiming at the V winning opening 287 is executed, and during the effective round game. When the game ball passes through the V winning opening 287, a V winning notification effect (see FIGS. 13D and 13E) for notifying that the game ball has won V is executed.

On the other hand, when the 5R normal A or 5R normal B is selected as the type of jackpot related to the first special symbol determination, and when 5R certainty variation A or 5R certainty variation B is selected, “777” and “333” Any of the seven types of doublet eyes, “111”, “222”, “444”, “555”, “666”, “888”, and “999”, except the doublet eyes, are stopped on the display screen 70. Will be done. When these 7 types of double stitches are stopped, when 5R probability variation A is selected as the type of jackpot, when 5R probability variation B is selected, when 5R normal variation A is selected, There are times when 5R probability variation B is selected. Then, in order to make it difficult to understand whether or not the big hit this time is a probability variation big hit and whether or not the effective round game is executed during the big hit game, the above-mentioned launch promotion effect is executed during the big hit game. However, even if the game ball wins V during the effective round game, the above V winning notification effect is not executed.

<When V prize is notified>
FIG. 13 is a screen view showing an example of an effect when a V winning is notified during a big hit game. Here, as an example of the type of jackpot related to the first special symbol determination, a case where 5R certainty variation A (see FIG. 7A) in which the first round game is an effective round game is selected is described. The determination result of the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state is “big hit”, and the big hit symbol X1 (see FIG. 6B) indicating the 5R probability variation A is stopped and displayed, for example, a doublet of “777” There are cases in which the three effect symbols indicating “are stopped. In this case, the following effects are performed during the 5R probability variation A jackpot game.

First, in the opening period of the jackpot game of the 5R probability variation A, a predetermined opening effect is executed (see FIG. 13(A)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 13(A), the character "RUSH bonus" for notifying the type of the big hit this time is displayed in the central area of the display screen 70, and the player is right-handed. The prompting “right hit” character and the right arrow are displayed in the upper right area of the display screen 70.

Then, along with the first round game (refer to FIG. 7A) of the 5R probability variation A (which is an effective round game), a predetermined in-round effect is executed (refer to FIGS. 13B and 13C). .. Specifically, as illustrated in FIGS. 13(B) and 13(C), three arrows pointing to the V winning opening 287 (in which the character “right hit” is written) and “target V” are shown. A large character is displayed on the display screen 70, and a launch promotion effect is output in which a voice "Aim for V" is output from the speaker 38. In addition, three production symbols of "777" which are stopped before the jackpot game of this time is started are displayed in the upper left area of the display screen 70, and the jackpot of this time is displayed in the upper right area of the display screen 70. The total number of prize balls paid out in response to the game balls winning the second big winning opening 28 after the game is started is displayed.

In this way, in the 1R round game in which the launch promotion effect that prompts the player to launch the game ball aiming at the V winning opening 287 is performed, as described above with reference to FIG. The mouth 28 and the V winning opening 287 are opened for 0.1 second and then opened for 10 seconds. Therefore, the player can easily win the game ball into the V winning opening 287 by performing a right-handed hit in accordance with the launch promotion effect. In the present embodiment, the case where the launch promotion effect is started with the start of the 1R round game will be described as an example, but in other embodiments, the launch promotion effect is started from the middle of the opening period. You can

Next, when the game ball passes through the V winning opening 287 during the 1R round game which is an effective round game, a predetermined V winning notification effect for notifying that the game ball has won V is executed (FIG. 13 ( See D)). Specifically, for example, an effect display indicating that two characters lift the star-shaped emblem including the letter "V" and is pleased, and a predetermined V winning notification sound is output from the speaker 38. ..

In this way, during the 1R round game, when the V winning notification effect for notifying that the game ball has won the V is executed, the star-shaped emblem is displayed on the display screen during the subsequent 2R round game. It is displayed small in the lower left area of 70 (see FIG. 13E). In the 1R round game and the 2R round game, the second special winning opening 28 is opened for a long time. Therefore, each time the second special winning opening sensor 281 detects the passage of the game ball, the payout is made. The total number of the prize balls thus played is updated (see FIGS. 13B to 13E). Although not shown in the figure, during the period in which the second special winning opening 28 is shortly opened and the third to fifth round games are played, the effect display illustrated in FIG. 13(E) continues. Done. Then, when it comes to the ending period of the jackpot game, in order to notify that the production in the production mode named "Gekito RUSH" that definitely informs that it is "probability variation game state" is started, "Gekito RUSH rush entry" The character "!" is displayed in a large size in the central area of the display screen 70, and the sound "Fighting RUSH rush!"

<When V prize is not notified>
FIG. 14 is a screen view showing an example of an effect when the V winning is not notified during the big hit game. Here, as an example of the type of jackpot related to the first special symbol determination, a case where 5R certainty variation A (see FIG. 7A) in which the first round game is an effective round game is selected is described. The determination result of the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state is “big hit”, and the big hit symbol X1 (see FIG. 6(B)) indicating the 5R probability variation A is stopped and displayed, for example, “444” doublet There is a case where the three effect symbols indicating “” are stopped. In this case, the following effects are performed during the 5R probability variation A jackpot game.

First, in the opening period of the jackpot game of the 5R probability variation A, a predetermined opening effect is executed (see FIG. 14(A)). Specifically, as illustrated in FIG. 14(A), the character “Challenge Bonus” for notifying the type of the big hit this time is displayed in the central area of the display screen 70, and the player is right-handed. The prompting “right hit” character and the right arrow are displayed in the upper right area of the display screen 70. In addition, the same opening effect is performed even during the opening period in the jackpot game of 5R normal A and 5R normal B.

Next, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the opening period, the opening effect is switched to the opening effect that functions as a right-handing promotion effect (see FIGS. 14A to 14C). Specifically, as illustrated in FIGS. 14(A) to 14(C), instead of the letters “challenge bonus”, the letters “Aim for the right!” and the letters “energy reserve” , And an arrow that draws an arc are displayed on the display screen 70, and when a predetermined time elapses after the switching of the opening effect, the characters “store energy” are switched to the characters “prepare for battle!”.

By the way, even if the game ball passes through the V winning opening 287 during the non-effective round game in the 5R normal A or 5R normal B jackpot game, the game is controlled in the probability variation game state after the jackpot game is finished on the condition that the ball passes. Never. Therefore, it can be said that it is not necessary to perform the right-handing promotion effect illustrated in FIGS. 14(B) and 14(C). However, if the right-handing promotion production is not performed during the effective round game in the jackpot game of the 5R-probability variation A or the 5R-probability variation B, the player does not perform the right-handing, so the opportunity is controlled in the probability variation gaming state. May be accidentally missed.

Therefore, in order to prevent such problems from occurring, it is conceivable to perform the above-mentioned launch promotion effect (see FIGS. 13B and 13C) during the round game, but this is during the effective round game. Therefore, it may be difficult to make it difficult to know whether or not the game ball has won the V prize.

Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, during the round game in the jackpot game that is executed in response to the fact that the three effect symbols indicating any of the seven types of double stitches are stopped, the above-mentioned launch 14B and 14C during the opening period in which both the second special winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287 are in the closed state without the promotion effect (see FIGS. 13B and 13C). The illustrated right-handing promotion effect is to be performed.

Next, when the 1R round game is started, the right-handed promotion effect is ended, and a predetermined in-round effect is performed (see FIGS. 14D and 14E). Specifically, three effect symbols, for example, "444", which are stopped before the big hit game of this time is started, are displayed in the upper left area of the display screen 70, and in the upper right area of the display screen 70. , The total number of prize balls paid out in response to the fact that the game balls have won in the second big winning opening 28 since the present big hit game is started is displayed. Further, in the central area of the display screen 70, a gauge image is displayed in which the black area expands to the right as the payout prize balls increase, and the game ball is displayed in the second big winning opening 28. Each time you win, it will be updated with the total number of prize balls.

The 1R round game in which the effect display illustrated in FIGS. 14D and 14E is performed is an effective round game, and if the player normally makes a right hit, the game ball is a V prize. Although V prize is easily applied to the mouth 287, even if the game ball wins V, the fact is not notified (see FIGS. 14D and 14E).

The gauge image is continuously displayed until the 2R round game (see FIG. 7A) is completed (see FIG. 14F). Then, when 10 gaming balls win both the first round game and the second round game, the gauge image becomes full of black areas, and the second big winning port 28 is short. During the 3rd to 4th round games to be released, the character "charge completed!" is displayed in the central area of the display screen 70 in order to notify that the gauge image is filled with the black area ( See FIG. 14G). In addition, during the subsequent 5R round game (the second big winning opening 28 is opened for a short time), the character “Fight battle RUSH plunge with battle victory!” is displayed in the central area of the display screen 70 ( See FIG. 14(H).

In addition, as illustrated in FIG. 14, although the number of rounds indicating the number of rounds of the current round game is not displayed, each time the game ball wins the second big winning opening 28. The black area in the gauge image increases. Therefore, the player can grasp the progress of the big hit game based on the accumulation degree of the black area in the gauge image.

In this way, when the round game of the 5th round in the jackpot game of the 5R probability variation A ends, the "challenge mode" that does not notify whether the "probability variation gaming state" or the "time saving gaming state" is set in the ending period of the jackpot game. The word "Challenge mode plunge!" is displayed large in the central area of the display screen 70 and the voice of "Challenge mode plunge!" It is output from the speaker 38.

As is clear from the above description based on FIG. 14, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the gaming ball passes through the V winning opening 287 during the valid round game, that is notified (FIG. 13(D)), and there is a case where the fact is not notified. Therefore, it may be possible to effectively increase the expectation for the jackpot of the player who recognizes that the game is controlled in the "probability variation game state" after the jackpot game is over, and the "probability variation game state". It is possible to expect the player to make a transition to the “probability variation gaming state” even if the game does not shift to “”, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a plurality of round games including a valid round game are executed (see FIGS. 7A and 7B), a round that can identify the round game being executed. No numbers are displayed (see Figure 14). For this reason, it becomes difficult to confirm whether or not the game ball has won V by watching the V winning opening 287 after specifying that the round game being executed is an effective round game. It can be effectively improved.

[About stage suggestion production]
Next, with reference to FIG. 15, a stage suggestion effect executed by the gaming machine 1 will be described. Here, FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the stage suggestive effect. FIG. 16 is an explanatory diagram for describing a table used for the process of determining the number of effects during the period suggested by the stage suggestion effect. FIG. 17 is a detailed flowchart of the stage suggestive effect pattern setting process in step S172 of FIG. FIG. 18 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of the stage suggestion effect. FIG. 19 is a screen view illustrating an effect that is performed after the stage suggestion effect is completed.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the normal game state, a stage suggestive effect is produced from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol until a predetermined time (for example, a suggestion period of 3 seconds) elapses. It may be executed. This stage suggestion effect is an effect that continues until one of a predetermined number of stages (“3” in the present embodiment) or less, and an advance effect that is executed in the same symbol variation as the stage suggestion effect is executed It is a production that can be suggested to.

<Stage suggestion ending in the first stage>
FIG. 15A is an explanatory diagram for describing a stage suggestive effect that ends in the first stage. As illustrated in FIG. 15A, the stage suggestive effect that ends in the first stage is an effect that suggests an effect executed during the first period (effect during the first period) during the suggestion period. Here, the suggestion period is a period from when the symbol variation in which the stage suggestion effect is executed is started until a predetermined time (3 seconds in the present embodiment) elapses. The first period is a period from the end of the suggestion period to the end of the symbol variation. For example, when the variation pattern E (see FIG. 10B) having a variation time of 30 seconds is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the first 3 seconds is the suggestion period, and the remaining 27 seconds (=30 The second period is (second-3 seconds).

When the stage suggestion effect ending in the first stage is executed, the success effect or the failure effect is executed as illustrated in FIG. 15(A). Here, when the success effect is executed after the stage suggestive effect ending in the first stage, the effect suggested by the stage suggesting effect ending in the first stage is executed during the first period, while the first effect is performed. When the failure effect is executed after the stage suggesting effect ending in the stage, the effect suggested by the stage suggesting effect ending in the first stage is not executed in the first period. That is, the stage suggestive production and the failure production that end in the first stage function as so-called gaze production.

<Stage suggestion that ends in the second stage>
FIG. 15B is an explanatory diagram for describing a stage suggestive effect that ends in the second stage. As shown in FIG. 15B, the stage suggestive effect that ends in the second stage is an effect that is executed during the first period (an effect during the first period) and an effect that is executed during the second period. (Production during the second period) is a production that is suggested during the suggestion period, and the production in the first stage suggests the production in the first stage, and the production in the second stage suggests the production in the second period. . Here, the suggestion period is the same period as described above with reference to FIG. The first period is a period from the end of the suggestion period to the start of the second period, and the second period is a period from the end of the first period to the end of the symbol variation. For example, when the variation pattern B having a variation time of 55 seconds (see FIG. 10A) is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the first 3 seconds is the suggestion period, and the following 26 seconds (= (55-3)÷2) is the first period, and the remaining 26 seconds (=(55-3)÷2) seconds is the second period.

When the stage suggestive effect ending in the second stage is executed, as in the case where the stage suggesting effect ending in the first stage is executed, as shown in FIG. Failure production is executed. Here, when the success effect is executed after the stage suggesting effect ending in the second stage, the effect suggested by the first stage effect of the stage suggesting effect is executed during the first period, and the stage suggesting effect The effect suggested by the second-stage effect is executed during the second period. On the other hand, when the failure effect is executed after the stage suggestive effect ending in the second stage, the two effects suggested by the stage suggesting effect ending in the second stage are executed in each of the first period and the second period. There is a feature that it is not done. That is, the stage suggestive production and the failure production ending in the second stage function as a gaze production, like the stage suggestive production and the failure production ending in the first stage.

<Stage suggestion ending in the third stage>
FIG. 15C is an explanatory diagram for describing a stage suggestive effect that ends in the third stage. As shown in FIG. 15C, the stage suggestive effect that ends in the third stage is an effect that is executed during the first period (an effect during the first period) and an effect that is executed during the second period. It is an effect that suggests during the suggestion period the effect during the second period and the effect that is executed during the third period (the effect during the third period). The effect of the second stage suggests the effect during the second period, and the effect of the third stage suggests the effect during the third period. Here, the suggestion period is the same period as described above with reference to FIG. The first period is a period from the end of the suggestion period to the start of the second period, and the second period is a period from the end of the first period to the start of the third period. The period is a period from the end of the second period to the end of the symbol variation. For example, when the variation pattern D having a variation time of 90 seconds (see FIG. 10(A)) is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the first 3 seconds is the suggestion period, and the following 29 seconds (= (90-3)÷3) is the first period, 29 seconds (=(90-3)÷3) following this first period is the second period, and 29 seconds (=(90 -3)÷3) is the third period.

When such a stage suggestion effect ending in the third stage is executed, as in the case where the stage suggesting effect ending in the first stage or the stage suggesting effect ending in the second stage is executed, FIG. As illustrated in, the success effect or the failure effect is executed. Here, when the success effect is executed after the stage suggestive effect ending in the third stage, the effect suggested by the first stage effect of the stage suggestive effect is executed during the first period, and the stage suggestive effect The effect suggested by the second stage effect is executed during the second period, and the effect suggested by the third stage effect of the stage suggesting effect is executed during the third period. On the other hand, when the failure effect is executed after the stage suggestive effect ending in the third stage, the three effects suggested by the stage suggesting effect ending in the third stage are executed in each of the first period to the third period. There is a feature that it is not done. That is, the stage suggestive effect and the failing effect ending in the third stage are similar to the stage suggesting effect and the failing effect ending in the first stage and the stage suggesting effect and the failing effect ending in the second stage. Function as.

By the way, when the reach effect is executed during the variation display of the first special symbol in the normal game state, there is a possibility of a big hit, so in such a case (functioning as a gasse effect) stage suggestion effect and failure It is not desirable to perform the performance. For this reason, in the present embodiment, the three types described above when the variation pattern for jackpot described above based on FIG. 10A and the variation pattern for reach loss described above based on FIG. 10B are selected. When any one of the stage suggestive effects is executed, the success effect is always executed without executing the failure effect after the stage effect. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to cause the stage suggesting effect and the successful effect ending in any of the first to third steps to function as the reach confirming effect, and to allow the player to win the jackpot. It is possible to effectively improve expectations.

On the other hand, since the reach effect is not executed when the variation pattern for loss without reach described above based on FIG. 10C is selected, in such a case, the success effect is performed after the stage suggestion effect. This is not preferable, and the stage suggestion effect and the success effect cannot be functioned as the reach confirmation effect. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the variation pattern for loss without reach is selected, the success effect is always executed without executing the success effect after the stage suggestion effect.

When the variation pattern L (see FIG. 10(C)) in which the variation time of the first special symbol is 4 seconds is selected and the stage suggestion production and the failure production are executed, the variability is shown immediately after the failure production. The effect design is stopped and displayed, which is not preferable as an effect. Further, when the variation pattern J (see FIG. 10C) in which the variation time of the first special symbol is 13 seconds is selected, and the variation pattern K in which the variation time of the first special symbol is 8 seconds (FIG. 10) When both (C)) is selected, if the stage suggesting effect and the failing effect are configured to be executed, the appearance rate of the stage suggesting effect and the failing effect functioning as a gasse effect becomes higher than necessary. , There is a possibility that the effect of the stage suggestion effect is rather lowered.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the stage suggestion effect and the failure effect are executed in a part of the case where the variation pattern J (see FIG. 10C) in which the variation time of the first special symbol is 13 seconds is selected, and the variation occurs. When the pattern K or the variation pattern L is selected, the configuration in which the stage suggestion effect and the failure effect are not executed is adopted. By adopting such a configuration, it is possible to effectively suppress the problem that the stage suggestion effect and the failure effect frequently appear, resulting in an unpleasant feeling for the player.

<Selecting the number of performances during the period>
In the sub ROM 92, for the jackpot, as a table to be referred to by the sub CPU 91 when determining the number of productions during the period suggested by the stage suggestion production, in other words, how many stages to finally continue the stage suggestion production. Performance number selection table during period (see FIG. 16(A)), performance number selection table for reach loss (see FIG. 16B), and performance number selection table for reach loss without reach (FIG. 16(C)) (See) and are stored. When the sub CPU 91 receives the variation start command related to the first special symbol determination transmitted from the main control board 80, information indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination included in the variation start command, Based on the information indicating the variation pattern of the selected first special symbol and the above-described three types of during-period effect number selection tables, the during-period effect number is determined.

(About selection of the number of performances during the period when it is a big hit)
Refer to the case where the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “big hit”, and the sub CPU 91 determines that the stage suggestion effect is executed, in the big hitting period effect number selection table illustrated in FIG. 16(A). It is a performance number selection table during the period. The sub CPU 91 is appropriately updated every time the random number updating process of step S46 of FIG. 49 is performed when the variation start command including the information indicating that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “big hit” is received. For the random number for determining the number of effects during the period, the value of the timing at which the variation start command is received is acquired and stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 93. Then, the large hit period effect number selection table is read out from the sub ROM 92 and set in the sub RAM 93, and the period effect number associated with the obtained random number for determining the effect number during period is set to the large hit period. By reading from the intermediate performance number selection table, the number of intermediate performances is determined.

In this embodiment, the possible range of the random number for determining the number of effects during the period is set to “0” to “99”. On the other hand, in the big hit period effect number selection table, 15 random number values are associated with the period effect number “1” and 35 random number values with the period effect number “2”. And the random number values of 50 are associated with the number of presentations “3” during the period. For this reason, the ratio in which the number of effects during the period is determined to be “1” is 15% (=15/100×100), and the ratio in which the number of effects during the period is determined to be “2” is 35% (=35/ 100×100), and the ratio in which the number of presentations during the period is determined to be “3” is 50% (=50/100×100).

(Selecting the number of performances during the period when reach is lost)
In the reach loss period effect production number selection table illustrated in FIG. 16(B), the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “loss”, the variation pattern for reach loss is selected, and the stage suggestion effect is executed. It is a production number selection table during a period referred to when it is determined by the CPU 91. When the sub CPU 91 receives the fluctuation start command including the information that the judgment result of the first special symbol judgment is “miss” and the fluctuation pattern for reach loss is selected, and the above “big hit” Similarly, the random number for determining the number of effects during the period is acquired and stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 93. Then, the reach-during-period effect number selection table is read from the sub ROM 92 and set in the sub RAM 93, and the variation pattern of the first special symbol is associated with the random number value corresponding to the acquired in-period effect number determining random number. The number of effects during the period is determined by reading the number of effects during the period from the reach-during-reduction-period effect number selection table.

In the reach-difference period effect number selection table, as illustrated in FIG. 16(B), the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the period effect number, and (compared with the period effect number determination random number) It is associated with a random number value. For example, with regard to the variation pattern E (see FIG. 10B), which is the variation pattern for reach loss, 70 random numbers are associated with the production number "1" during the period, and the production number "2" during the period. On the other hand, 20 random number values are associated with each other, and 10 random number values are associated with the number of productions “3” during the period (see FIG. 16B). Therefore, when the sub CPU 91 receives a fluctuation start command relating to the first special symbol determination including information indicating that the fluctuation pattern E is selected by the main CPU 81, the ratio during which the number of effects during the period is determined to be "1" Is 70% (=70/100×100), and the proportion of the number of performances to be determined to be “2” is 20% (=20/100×100), and the number of performances to be “3” during the period. The determined ratio is 10% (=50/100×100).

On the other hand, for example, regarding a variation pattern H (see FIG. 10B) that is a variation pattern for reach loss, 20 random number values are associated with the number of productions during the period “1”, and the number of productions during the period “ 20" is associated with 2", and 10 random values are associated with "3" during the period (see FIG. 16(B)). Therefore, when the sub CPU 91 receives a variation start command relating to the first special symbol determination including information indicating that the variation pattern H has been selected by the main CPU 81, the ratio during which the number of effects during the period is determined to be "1" Is 20% (=20/100×100), and the proportion of the number of performances to be determined to be “2” during the period is 30% (=30/100×100), and the number of performances to be during the period is “3”. The determined ratio is 50% (=50/100×100).

The following can be said about the tendency of determining the number of performances during the period. That is, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “big hit”, a large value is easily selected as the number of effects during the period (see FIG. 16A), and the determination result of the first special symbol determination is When the variation pattern is "miss" and the reach loss is selected, a large value tends to be selected as the number of effects during the period as the variation time becomes longer. From this, it can be said that when the jackpot reliability is relatively high, a large value is easily selected as the number of effects during the period, in other words, the stage suggestion effect is easily continued to a higher stage.

Therefore, instead of the stage suggestive effect ending in the first stage (see FIG. 15A), the stage suggesting effect ending in the second stage (see FIG. 15B) or the stage suggesting effect ending in the third stage By executing (see FIG. 15(C)), it is possible to effectively improve the player's expectation for the jackpot.

(Selecting the number of performances during the period when there is a loss without reach)
In the number-of-reproductions selection table for reach-free loss illustrated in FIG. 16C, the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “miss”, and the variation pattern for loss without reach is selected, and the stage suggestion effect is produced. Is a production number selection table during a period referred to when it is determined by the sub CPU 91 when is executed. When the sub CPU 91 receives the variation start command including the information indicating that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “miss” and the variation pattern for reachless loss is selected, the sub CPU 91 uses the above “big hit”. Similar to the case, a random number for determining the number of effects during the period is acquired and stored in a predetermined area of the sub RAM 93. Then, the number-of-effects selection table for reach-less loss is read from the sub ROM 92 and set in the sub RAM 93, and the variation pattern of the first special symbol corresponds to the random number value corresponding to the acquired random number for determining the number of effects during the period. The number of productions during the period is determined by reading the number of productions during the attached period from the number-of-reproductions selection table for loss without reach.

In the no-reach-during-loss period effect number selection table, as shown in FIG. 16(C), the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the period effect number, and (compared with the period effect number determination random number Random value is associated with. For example, regarding a fluctuation pattern J (see FIG. 10C) that is a fluctuation pattern for loss without reach, 55 random number values are associated with the number of performances during the period “1” and the number of performances during the period “2”. 35 random number values are associated with each other, and 10 random number values are associated with the number of productions during the period "3" (see FIG. 16C). Therefore, when the sub CPU 91 receives a variation start command relating to the first special symbol determination including information indicating that the variation pattern J has been selected by the main CPU 81, the ratio during which the number of effects is determined to be "1" Is 55% (=55/100×100), and the proportion of the number of performances to be determined to be “2” is 35% (=35/100×100), and the number of performances to be “3” during the period. The determined ratio is 10% (=50/100×100).

On the other hand, with regard to the variation pattern K and the variation pattern L, which are variation patterns for reach-less loss, a random number value is not associated with any number of presentations during the period, and the number of productions during the period is not selected. , Stage indication production and failure production are not executed.

(About stage suggestion production pattern selection processing)
Next, the stage suggestive effect pattern selection processing executed by the sub CPU 91 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 17 is a detailed flowchart of the stage suggestive effect pattern setting process in step S172 of FIG. 57 described later. Sub CPU91 performs the following processes following the notice effect pattern setting process of step S164 mentioned later.

That is, as illustrated in FIG. 17, the sub CPU 91 acquires and stores the stage suggestion effect random number used in the process of determining whether to execute the stage suggestion effect (step S1721). Specifically, regarding the stage suggestive effect random number updated every time the random number update process of step S46 in FIG. 49 is performed, the value of the timing at which the fluctuation start command is received from the main control board 80 is acquired, and the sub RAM 93 is acquired. Stored in a predetermined area.

Next, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not to execute the stage suggestion effect, based on whether or not the acquired stage suggestion effect random number matches the random number value stored in advance in the sub ROM 92 (step S1722). .. Here, if it is determined that the stage suggesting effect is not executed (step S1722: NO), the stage suggesting effect pattern setting process ends, and the process proceeds to step S174 in FIG. 57.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines to execute the stage suggestion effect (step S1722: YES), as described above, the random number for determining the effect number during the period is acquired and stored in the sub RAM 93 (step S1723). Then, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the first special symbol determination identified based on the information included in the variation start command received from the main control board 80 is a “big hit” (step S1724), When it is determined that it is a "big hit" (step S1724: YES), the above-mentioned big hit period effect number selection table (see FIG. 16A) is read from the sub ROM 92 and set in the sub RAM 93 (step S1725).

On the contrary, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is not “big hit” (step S1724: NO), based on the information included in the variation start command received from the main control board 80. Then, it is determined whether the variation pattern of the first special symbol selected by the main CPU 81 is a variation pattern for reach loss (step S1726). Here, when it is determined that the variation pattern is for reach loss (step S1726: YES), the reach loss effect production number selection table (see FIG. 16B) is read from the sub ROM 92 and set in the sub RAM 93 (step S1726). S1727), when it is determined that it is not the variation pattern for reach loss (step S1726: NO), that is, when it is the variation pattern for loss without reach, the number-of-reproductions selection table during reach-less loss (FIG. 16C). Reference) is read from the sub ROM 92 and set in the sub RAM 93 (step S1728).

When the process of step S1725, the process of step S1727, or the process of step S1728 is executed, the sub CPU 91 executes the production number determination process during the period (step S1729). The effect number determination process during this period is as described above with reference to FIGS.

Subsequently, the sub CPU 91 executes the effect selection process during the period (step S1730). Specifically, when the number of performances during the period is determined to be "1" in the process of step S1729, the first performance during the period described above is selected based on FIG. Further, when the number of effects during the period is determined to be "2", the effect during the first period and the effect during the second period described above are selected based on FIG. Further, when the number of effects during the period is determined to be "3", the effect during the first period, the effect during the second period, and the effect during the third period described above are selected based on FIG. 15C.

As will be described later in detail, the variation mode of the effect symbol, the presence/absence of the reach effect, the presence/absence of the pseudo continuous effect, the type of the effect symbol forming the reach symbol, the reach effect, by the effect effect pattern setting process in step S163 of FIG. 57. , The content of the pseudo-relational effect, the type of effect symbol to be stopped and displayed, and the like are determined. Further, similarly, the notice effect pattern setting process in step S164 of FIG. 57 sets various notice effect effect patterns that are executed when the effect symbols are variably displayed in the change effect pattern set in the process of step S163. It Therefore, the sub CPU 91, based on the variation effect pattern set in the process of step S163 and the notice effect pattern set in the process of step S164, which effect is associated with the variable display of the first special symbol, which effect is at which timing. It is possible to specify what will be done in.

When executing the stage suggestive effect ending in the first stage (see FIG. 15(A)), the sub CPU 91 refers to the above-described variable effect pattern and the notice effect pattern to determine the effect executed during the first period. One of the specified effects is specified as the effect during the first period (for example, by performing a lottery using a random number).

Further, when executing the stage suggesting effect ending in the second stage (see FIG. 15(B)), the sub CPU 91 refers to the variation effect pattern and the notice effect pattern, and is executed during the first period. The effect and the effect executed during the second period are specified. Then, one of the effects to be executed during the first period is selected (for example, by performing a lottery using a random number) as the effect during the first period, and one of the effects to be executed during the second period (for example, It is selected as an effect during the second period by performing a lottery using a random number.

Further, when executing the stage suggesting effect (see FIG. 15C) that ends in the third step, the sub CPU 91 refers to the above-described variable effect pattern and the notice effect pattern, and is executed during the first period. The effect, the effect executed during the second period, and the effect executed during the third period are specified. Then, one of the effects to be executed during the first period is selected (for example, by performing a lottery using a random number) as the effect during the first period, and one of the effects to be executed during the second period (for example, A lottery using a random number is performed) and is selected as an effect during the second period, and one of the effects executed during the third period is selected as an effect during the third period (for example, by performing a lottery using a random number). ..

When the sub CPU 91 selects an effect during one or a plurality of periods in this way, information indicating the selection result is set as a stage suggestion effect pattern, and the setting information is stored in the sub RAM 93 (step S1731). If the variation pattern of the first special symbol is a variation pattern for jackpot or a variation pattern for reach loss, setting information indicating that a success effect is executed after the stage suggestion effect is stored, and for reach without loss If the variation pattern is, the setting information indicating that the failure effect is executed after the stage suggestion effect is stored.

The setting information relating to the stage suggestion effect stored in the sub RAM 93 in this way is included in the variation effect start command set in the sub RAM 93 by the process of step S174 of FIG. 57, and the image and sound control board 100 and the lamp control are performed. By being transmitted to the board 120, and the image and sound control CPU 101 and the lamp CPU 121 perform effect control based on the fluctuation start command, the stage suggestion effect described above based on FIG. 15 is realized.

Although not shown in FIG. 17, even if the process proceeds from step S1728 to step S1729, the variation pattern K or the variation pattern L, which is the variation pattern for the reachless loss, is the variation pattern of the first special symbol. If it is selected, the number of effects during the period is not determined in the process of step S1729, and thus the series of stage suggestion effect pattern setting processes is ended without executing the processes of step S1730 and step S1731.

(Specific example of stage suggestive production ending in the third stage)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 18 and 19, a stage suggestive effect that ends in the third stage (see FIG. 15C) and an effect that is performed after this stage suggestive effect is completed (first period to third effect) A specific example of the performance during the period) will be described. Here, FIG. 18 is a screen view showing a specific example of the stage suggestive effect ending in the third stage, and FIG. 19 is a screen diagram illustrating an effect performed after the stage suggesting effect is finished.

Note that, here, a case will be described as an example in which, while the effect is controlled in the second normal mode, the stage suggestion effect that ends in the third step described above based on FIG. 15C and the like is performed. In the above-described first normal mode, the effect symbol composed of the numbers to which the character image is not added is displayed on the display screen 70, whereas in the second normal mode, the effect symbol is distinguished from other effect symbols. An effect design including a possible number and a character image unique to the number is displayed on the display screen 70. Specifically, the scroll display of each symbol row is performed, so that one symbol in which the character image of the character A is added to the number "1" and the symbol image of the character B in the number "2" are added. 2 designs, 3 designs in which the character image of the character C is added to the number "3", 4 designs in which the character image of the character D is added to the number "4", character images of the character E in the number "5" 5 symbols added with, 6 symbols with the character image of the character F added to the number "6", 7 symbols with the character image of the character G added to the number "7", character to the number "8" 8 symbols to which the character image of H is added, 9 symbols in which the character image of the character I is added to the number "9" are displayed in order so that the effect symbols of each symbol row are displayed on the display screen 70. It

Further, in the second normal mode, similarly to the first normal mode, each symbol row is scrolled downward so that the effect symbols arranged side by side in the vertical direction are sequentially displayed on the display screen 70. Although not shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the background image dedicated to the second normal mode is displayed on the display screen 70 during the variation effect in the second normal mode, and the BGM dedicated to the second normal mode is displayed. It is output from the speaker 38.

In FIG. 18A, in the display screen 70, one hold icon (for example, a red hold icon: see FIG. 21A) is displayed in the hold icon display area 71, and in the icon display area 72. In order to inform that the determination result of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the displayed icon is “miss”, the loss symbol of “251” is displayed as the first special symbol is stopped and displayed. An example is shown in which the effect design showing the crosses is stopped and displayed. In this way, when the predetermined confirmation time (0.5 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the lost symbol was stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the earliest hold displayed in the hold icon display area 71 The first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon (here, red reserved icon) is executed. Then, for example, the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "big hit", and the variation pattern D as the variation pattern of the first special symbol (reach effect develops in the order of normal reach, SP reach, SPSP reach) (See FIG. 10(A)) is selected, and when it is determined to execute the stage suggestion production that ends in the third stage in the symbol variation in which the first special symbol is variably displayed in this variation pattern D, The following effects are performed.

That is, as the variable display of the first special symbol is started in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the earliest hold icon (here, the red hold icon), the hold icon display The earliest hold icon displayed in the area 71 is shifted to the icon display area 72, and scroll display of three symbol rows is started (see FIGS. 18A and 18B). Then, during the suggestion period from the start of scroll display of these three symbol rows to the elapse of a predetermined time (3 seconds in the present embodiment), the first stage effect of the stage suggestion effect, the second stage effect The effect and the effect of the third stage are sequentially executed.

In the first stage effect (see FIG. 18(C)), the same character G as the character image added to the number “7” forming the seven symbols is arranged side by side and “7 An effect image (first stage effect image) in which the characters “10?” are arranged below these characters G is displayed in the center of the display screen 70.

In addition, in the present embodiment, even if the stage suggestive effect is performed, if the success effect is not performed thereafter, the reach is not actually established. Therefore, at least the successful effect is performed. Until that is done, the scroll display of the three symbol rows is continuously executed, for example, in the lower right area of the display screen 70 (see FIGS. 18C to 18H).

In addition, taking the first stage effect as an example, even if the stage suggestion effect including the first stage effect that suggests that the reach is established is performed, if the success effect is not performed thereafter, the reach amount is actually reached. Does not hold. For this reason, in the first-stage effect, the character "7 ten!" that definitely informs that the reach is achieved with 7 symbols as the effect during the first period (reach establishment effect) is used, not 7 A first stage effect image composed of characters including a "?" mark such as "7 ten?" that suggests that the reach may be established in the design is to be displayed (Fig. 18(C )reference).

In the first stage effect illustrated in FIG. 18C, the 7 symbols themselves are not displayed, but represent the same character image G that is added to the numeral "7" forming the 7 symbols, and 7 Since the first stage effect image showing the character "7 ten?" which indicates that the reach may be established in the design is displayed, the player is in the first period when the reach is established in the 7 design. It is possible to easily recognize that there is a possibility that it will be executed as an intermediate presentation.

By the way, for example, by adopting a configuration in which the first stage effect image showing the 7 symbols itself is displayed, it is thought that the player can more clearly recognize that the reach may be established with the 7 symbols. Be done. However, if such a configuration is easily adopted, the player may mistake the first stage effect as a reach establishment effect, and as a result, the effect of the stage suggestion effect may be significantly reduced. there is a possibility.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when performing the first stage effect that suggests that the reach establishment effect may be executed as the effect during the first period, the effect pattern that may form the reach It is supposed that the first stage effect image representing a part of the constituent elements (here, the character image of the number and the character image) is displayed.

In addition, in order to further reduce the possibility of the above problems occurring, in the present embodiment, the effect design to which the color character image is added is displayed, while the character image is expressed in monochrome in the first stage effect image. Is also adopted.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state is “big hit”, that is, when the hit notification effect is executed in the reach effect, a reach forming effect is formed. The probability that 7 symbols are selected as a symbol (reach symbol) is highest, the probability that 3 symbols are selected as a reach symbol is next highest, and the probability that another effect symbol is selected as a reach symbol is set to a low value. ing. Further, the determination result of the first special symbol determination in the normal game state is "miss", in the case of performing the loss notification effect in the reach effect, contrary to the case of "big hit", other effect symbols ( Probability symbols other than 7 symbols and 3 symbols) are the most likely to be selected as reach symbols, the next 3 symbols are selected as reach symbols, and the probability that 7 symbols are selected as reach symbols is low. Is set to.

For this reason, the jackpot reliability of the reach formation effect that establishes the reach with 7 symbols is relatively high, and the first stage effect that suggests that the reach may be established with the 7 symbols (FIG. 18 ( By executing C), it is possible to effectively improve the player's expectation for the jackpot.

Up to this point, the reach establishment effect may be executed as the effect during the first period, and the case where the first stage effect that suggests this reach establishment effect is executed has been described as an example, but the effect during the first period is The present invention is not limited to the reach establishment effect, and for example, the first stage effect that suggests the execution of the pseudo continuous effect as the effect during the first period is executed, or the step-up notice as the effect during the first period is announced. There may be a case where the first-stage effect that suggests the execution of the effect is executed.

When the effect of the first stage is performed, subsequently, the effect of the second stage (indicating the effect during the second period) is performed (see FIG. 18D). In FIG. 18(D), in the second period (see FIG. 15(C)) of the symbol change this time, SP reach may be performed as an effect during the second period. Therefore, the character "SP?" It is illustrated that the second-stage effect of displaying the second-stage effect image representing is being performed.

It should be noted that, also here, since the SP reach is not determined to be executed as the effect during the second period until the success effect is executed after the stage suggestion effect is finished, the SP reach such as “SP!” is executed. The second stage effect image including not the character that definitely indicates that the SP reach may be executed such as “SP?” is displayed.

In addition, during the second stage effect (see FIG. 18D) or during the third stage effect (see FIG. 18E), after completion of the stage suggestion effect (see FIGS. 18F to 18H). Also, in order for the player to easily recognize the effect during the first period suggested by the effect in the first stage, the first character including a character that is common to the character shown in the first-stage effect image (here, "7 ten?") The one-step correspondence image is displayed small in the upper left area of the display screen 70.

Therefore, the player can easily recognize the effect during the first period suggested by the effect of the first step based on the image corresponding to the first step even after the effect of the first step is completed. is there.

In addition, here, the case has been described as an example in which the second stage effect is suggested, which suggests that SP reach may be executed as the effect during the second period, but the effect during the second period is changed to SP reach. For example, a second stage production that suggests execution of a reach development production (for example, a production that notifies that the reach production is developed from normal reach to SP reach) as a production during the second period is not limited. It may be executed, or a second-stage effect that suggests the execution of the icon change effect as the effect during the second period may be executed.

When the effect of the second stage is performed in this manner, subsequently, the effect of the third stage (indicating the effect during the third period) is performed (see FIG. 18E). In FIG. 18(E), in the third period (see FIG. 15(C)) of the present symbol change, there is a possibility that a group notice (see FIG. 12(D)) will be given as an effect during the third period. From the figure, it is illustrated that a third stage effect is displayed in which a third stage effect image representing a part of the plurality of characters appearing in the group notice and the characters “group?” is being performed.

Note that, also here, it is not decided that the group notice will be executed as the effect during the third period until the success effect is executed after the stage suggestion effect is finished, so that the group notice such as “group!” is executed. A third stage effect image including not a character that definitely indicates that the group notice is likely to be executed, such as “group?”, is displayed.

In addition, during the third stage performance (see FIG. 18E) and after the completion of the stage suggestion production (see FIGS. 18F to 18H), the second period performance suggested by the second stage performance. In order for the player to easily recognize, the second stage corresponding image including the character common to the character shown in the second stage effect image (here, "SP?") is displayed small in the upper left area on the display screen 70. To be done.

Therefore, the player can easily recognize the effect during the second period suggested by the effect of the second step based on the image corresponding to the second step even after the effect of the second step is completed. is there.

In addition, even after the completion of the stage suggestion production (see FIGS. 18F to 18H), the third stage production is performed so that the player can easily recognize the production during the third period suggested by the production of the third stage. The third stage corresponding image including the characters common to the characters shown in the image (here, “group?”) is displayed small in the upper left area of the display screen 70.

Therefore, the player can easily recognize the effect during the third period suggested by the effect of the third step based on the image corresponding to the third step even after the effect of the third step is completed. is there.

Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 18F to 18H, the first stage corresponding image showing the characters “7 ten?”, the second stage corresponding image showing the characters “SP?”, and the “group? Since the three stage corresponding images of the third stage corresponding image indicating the character "" are displayed, the player is based on the fact that the number of stage corresponding images displayed immediately after the stage suggesting effect is finished is three. Thus, it is possible to continue to recognize that the stage suggestive effect has continued up to the upper limit of the third stage, even after the stage suggestive effect has ended.

Here, the example in which three stage corresponding images are displayed in order to continue the stage suggesting effect to the third stage has been described as an example, but when the stage suggesting effect ending in the first stage is executed, When only the first stage corresponding image is displayed in the upper left area of the display screen 70 and the stage suggesting effect ending in the second stage is executed, two images of the first stage corresponding image and the second stage corresponding image are displayed. The stage-corresponding image is displayed in the upper left area of the display screen 70.

In addition, here, the case has been described as an example in which a third-stage effect is suggested as a possibility that a group notice may be executed as an effect during the third period. The present invention is not limited to this, and suggests, for example, execution of a cut-in (occurs in the latter half of SPSP reach and does not occur during other reach effects) as an effect during the third period (see FIG. 12(G)). A third stage effect is executed, or a second effect button operation promotion effect (refer to FIG. 12H) as an effect during the third period (executed in the latter half of SPSP reach and not executed during other reach effects). ) Is performed, or a third-stage effect that suggests the execution of a hit notification effect (see FIG. 12(I)) as an effect during the third period is executed. There are also things to do.

When the third stage effect is performed in this manner, the character appearance effect that functions as the above-described success effect or failure effect introduction effect is performed (see FIG. 18F). In this character appearance production, a success production is informed that the production during the period suggested by the stage suggestion production is actually performed, or the production during the period suggested by the stage suggestion production is not actually performed. It is an effect representing that a character having a role of notifying of is displayed on the display screen 70.

18(G) to 18(H) exemplify a state in which a character who appears in this character appearance effect performs a judge effect (success effect). Specifically, in this judge effect, the first stage corresponding image is displayed so as to ask whether or not the reach by the 7 symbols is established, and the second stage corresponding image is displayed so as to ask whether or not the reach reaches the SP reach. Is displayed and a third stage corresponding image is displayed so as to ask whether or not a group notice will be generated, and is configured as an effect to display how the character lifts the placard marked with "YES" Has been done.

In this way, when the effect display indicating that the character lifts the placard marked with "YES" is displayed, the character switches the placard to the sword, and the character indicated by the first stage corresponding image is "7". TEN?” to “7 TEN!”, the characters shown in the second stage corresponding image change from “SP?” to “SP!”, and the characters shown in the third stage corresponding image change from “group?” to “SP!”. "Group!", and an effect display showing that the characters "Get!!" indicating that the character has acquired these effects is displayed.

Note that in FIGS. 18G and 18H, it is shown that the judge effect (as a successful effect) is performed in a state where the three-step corresponding images of the first step corresponding image to the third step corresponding image are displayed. Although illustrated, when the stage suggestive effect that ends in the second stage is performed or when the stage suggestive effect that ends in the first stage is performed, the number of displayed stage corresponding images is different. Judgment effects similar to those illustrated in FIGS. 18G and 18H are performed.

On the other hand, when the effect suggested during each stage (the effect during the period) is not actually performed, although not shown in the figure, the character appearance effect illustrated in FIG. Then, a judge effect as a failure effect is performed. Specifically, an effect display showing that the character appearing in the character appearance effect lifts up the placard on which the character "NO" is written is performed, and along with this, the first indication indicating the character "7 ten?" An effect display is displayed in which the stage corresponding image, the second stage corresponding image showing the characters “SP?”, and the third stage corresponding image showing the characters “group?” are scattered. Such a series of effect display is similarly performed when the judgment effect as the failure effect is performed after the stage suggestive effect ending in the first stage and the stage suggesting effect ending in the second stage are performed.

Returning to the description of FIG. 18, when the judge effect as the successful effect is performed, the first-stage effect (see FIG. 18C) and the first-stage corresponding images (FIGS. 18D to 18G) are illustrated. As a production during the first period that was suggested by "7 Ten?"), a reach establishment production showing that a reach is established with 7 symbols is performed (see FIG. 18(I)). Note that, in FIG. 18(I), success occurs after the first-stage effect (see FIG. 18(C)) that displays the first-stage effect image including the character “7 ten?” and the character G is performed. It is illustrated that the reach formation effect representing the manner in which the reach is established with the 7 symbols is performed because the effect has been performed. For example, the first including the character “3 ten?” and the character C. When the success effect is performed after the effect of the first step of displaying the stage effect image is performed, the reach establishment effect that represents the manner in which the reach is established with the three symbols is performed.

When the reach establishment effect is performed in this manner, first, the normal reach (see FIG. 19A) is performed. This normal reach is performed in the same manner as the normal reach described above with reference to FIG. 12A, only the configuration of the effect symbol is different, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted here.

Next, since the SP reach is executed in advance by the second stage effect of the stage suggestion effect and the success effect, the reach effect is developed from the normal reach to the SP reach (FIG. 19). (See (A) and (B)). Then, the period in which this SP reach is performed is a period included in the second period illustrated in FIG. 15C, and the SP reach is executed as suggested by the second stage effect. After that, for example, in the final stage of SP reach, after the pseudo loss effect (see FIG. 19(C)) in which the three effect symbols showing the reach lost eyes of "787" are pseudo-stopped to make them look like they are lost, As an effect for developing the reach effect from SP reach to SPSP reach, the same effect as described above based on FIG. 12B is performed (see FIG. 19D).

The period in which SPSP reach is performed via this development effect is a period included in the third period illustrated in FIG. 15C, and the group notice is executed by the effect and the successful effect in the third stage. Since it has been suggested in advance, a group notice will be generated during SPSP reach as an effect during the third period (see FIG. 19(F)). The group announcement is the same effect as the group announcement described above with reference to FIG. 12D except that the occurrence timing is different, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

After that, when the end of SPSP reach is reached, a first effect button operation promotion effect (see FIG. 19(G)) that prompts the player to operate the first effect button 35 is performed, and this first effect button operation promotion effect is performed. When the first effect button 35 is operated during the effective period related to, cut-in occurs (see FIG. 19(H)). Then, at the final stage of SPSP reach, the second effect button operation promotion effect (see FIG. 19(I)) that prompts the player to operate the second effect button 36 is performed, and the second effect button operation promotion effect is involved. When the second effect button 36 is operated during the valid period, the hit notification effect (or the loss notification effect) is executed (see FIG. 19(J)). In addition, here, since the determination result of the first special symbol determination performed at the start of the present symbol variation is “big hit”, according to the operation of the second effect button 36 for the second effect button operation promotion effect. The hit notification effect is executed.

Up to this point, a series of effects since the end of SPSP reach has been briefly described with reference to FIGS. 19(G) to (J), but these effects are shown in FIGS. 12(F) to (I). The same is done based on the above.

(Regarding the gaming machine 1 capable of executing the stage suggestion production)
Up to this point, the stage suggestion effect executed by the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment and the effect performed within the same variation after the stage suggesting effect have been described, but such a game machine 1 is as follows. Can be regarded as a game machine.

A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game) (for example, a main CPU 81 that executes a jackpot determination process of step S308 of FIG. 42 described later),
When the determination is made, the symbol display means (for example, the first special symbol display 41) causes the special symbol (for example, the first special symbol) to be variably displayed, and then the special symbol indicating the result of the determination is stopped and displayed. Symbol display control means (for example, the main CPU 81 that controls the first special symbol display 41),
An effect control unit (for example, a sub CPU 91, an image/sound control CPU 101, a lamp CPU 121) that controls execution of an effect is provided,
The effect control means,
The effect symbol is variably displayed along with the variable display of the special symbol, and along with the stop display of the special symbol, the effect symbol for notifying the result of the determination is stopped and displayed,
During the variable display of the special symbol, it is possible to establish a reach by the effect symbol and execute a predetermined reach effect (for example, normal reach illustrated in FIG. 19A).
From the start of the variable display of the effect symbols to the time when the reach by the effect symbols is established, an effect display capable of specifying the effect symbol that establishes the reach (for example, the stage illustrated in FIG. 18C). Perform the first stage production of suggestive production,
When the effect display is executed, the reach according to the effect design suggested by the effect display is established, and then the predetermined reach effect is executed (see FIGS. 18(I) and 19(A)),
When the reach by the first effect symbol (for example, 7 symbols) is established, than when the reach by the second effect symbol (for example, any of 1 symbol to 6 symbols, 8 symbols, 9 symbols) is established. A gaming machine characterized by a high possibility that the special game is executed.

According to the gaming machine 1 having such a configuration, before the reach is established, an effect display capable of specifying an effect design for establishing the reach (for example, the first stage effect of the stage suggestion effect: FIG. 18C). Is executed, the case where the reach by the first effect symbol (for example, 7 symbols) is established is more special than the case when the reach by the second effect symbol (for example, effect symbols other than the 7 symbols) is established. Is likely to be executed. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game while expecting that the effect display that can specify the first effect symbol rather than the second effect symbol is executed.

(Other configurations related to stage suggestion production)
You may employ the following structures regarding stage suggestion production.
That is, in the present embodiment, a part of the effect symbol (in the present embodiment, a character image forming the effect symbol) displayed as the reach symbol when the reach is established by the first stage effect of the stage suggestion effect. The case of displaying is explained as an example. On the other hand, in another embodiment, the first stage effect image may be displayed that represents the effect symbol itself (that is, the entire effect symbol) to be displayed as the reach symbol. However, in this case, for example, a first stage effect image in which the effect symbol displayed in color as the reach symbol is expressed in monochrome is displayed so that the player does not mistakenly think that the first stage effect is the reach establishment effect. Alternatively, it is preferable to also employ a configuration in which a first-stage effect image showing a state in which the numbers and the character images configuring the effect symbol to be displayed as the reach symbol are separated is displayed together.

In addition, in FIG. 18, as an example, a case where the player performs a first-stage effect in which the player can specify the effect design under the condition that the reach by the effect design including the numbers and the character image may be established. I gave an explanation. On the other hand, for example, there is a possibility that reach may be established by the effect design that is configured to include a number, a character image added to the number, and a panel image that functions as a background of the number and the character image. Below, the player may perform the first stage effect in which the reach symbol can be specified.

In this case, as the first-stage effect, for example, it is conceivable to display a first-stage effect image similar to that obtained by removing only the numbers from the effect image. With this configuration, since the first stage effect image shows the character image and the panel image that are common to the reach pattern, the player can easily specify the reach symbol based on the first stage effect image. Is. In addition, since the first stage effect image does not include the numbers forming the effect symbol as the reach symbol, the display content is different from the actual reach symbol, and the effect for displaying the first stage effect image is the reach establishment factor. It is also possible to easily suppress the problem that the player mistakenly recognizes that.

Further, when the effect design displayed as the reach pattern is configured to include a number, a character image, and a panel image, the first stage effect that represents the number and the character image but does not represent the panel image. An image may be displayed, or a first stage effect image that represents numbers and a panel image but does not represent a character image may be displayed. Moreover, you may display the 1st stage effect image showing any one of the three components (a number, a character image, and a panel image) which comprise an effect image.

Further, in the present embodiment, the reach may be established with a predetermined effect symbol by the effect (refer to FIG. 18C) in the first stage in a state where scroll display is performed for all three symbol strings. It is suggested that there is, and the succeeding succession will determine the reach establishment (in the effect design suggested by the first stage effect) as an example. On the other hand, in another embodiment, for example, the 7 symbols included in the left column are pseudo stopped on the display screen 70, and the scroll display of the symbol columns in the right column and the middle column is continued, In the case where the first stage effect that suggests 7 symbols is performed, a configuration in which the reach establishment with the 7 symbols is determined at the time when the first stage effect is performed may be adopted.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case will be described in which the stage suggestion effect (and the success effect) is executed during the suggestion period until a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses from the start of the pattern variation in which the stage suggestion effect is performed. did. On the other hand, in another embodiment, the period from the start of the pattern variation in which the stage suggestive effect is performed to the time when the reach by the effect symbol is established is the suggestion period, and the stage suggestive production (and success) is performed during the suggestion period. Production) may be executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, for example, a case of suggesting the production during the first period, the production during the second period, and the production during the third period in the same order as the actual execution order by the stage suggestion production ending in the third stage explained. On the other hand, in another embodiment, for example, the first stage effect suggests the third period effect, the second stage effect suggests the first period effect, and the third stage effect It is also possible to suggest the effect during the period in a different order from the actual execution order, such as suggesting the effect during the period.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the case where the upper limit of the number of stages of the stage suggestive production is “3” has been described as an example, but the upper limit of the number of stages of the stage suggestive production is not limited to “3”, but “2” and “ It may be 4" or more. Further, the upper limit of the number of stages may be set to "1" so that the stage suggestion production may not be continued stepwise.

Further, in the present embodiment, the success effect or the failure effect is executed after the stage suggestion effect is executed, and only when the success effect is executed, the period effect suggested by the stage suggestion effect is actually executed. I explained about the case. On the other hand, in another embodiment, as a configuration that does not perform the success effect or failure effect, when the stage suggestion effect is executed, the effect during the period suggested by the stage suggestion effect is always within the same variation. A configuration such as execution may be adopted.

In addition, here, the case where the stage suggestion production is executed when the production is controlled in the second production mode has been described as an example, but the stage suggestion production is executed when the production is controlled in the first production mode. You may do so. In this case, in the first effect mode, since the effect symbol configured with the number to which the character image is not added is displayed, the number (for example, “3”) configuring the effect symbol is displayed in color. On the other hand, the first-stage effect image in which the number is expressed in monochrome is displayed, or the first-stage effect image in which the above-mentioned number such as "may reach by three?" is displayed in another form is displayed. You can do it.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the stage suggestion effect is executed based on the determination result of the first special symbol determination has been described as an example, but in another embodiment, it corresponds to the reserved right of the first special symbol determination. Based on the pre-determination result, the pre-reading target variation (variation display of the first special symbol which is started in response to execution of the first special symbol determination that has been held) is started, stage suggestive effect May be executed. Further, the stage suggestion effect may be executed using both the period until the prefetch target variation starts and the period until the predetermined time elapses after the prefetch target variation starts.

[About the finalized notification production]
Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the confirmation notification effect executed in the gaming machine 1 will be described. Here, FIG. 20 is an explanatory diagram exemplifying the features of each confirmation notification effect that can be executed by the gaming machine 1. Note that the use effect means in FIG. 20 is an effect means used for each confirmation notification effect described in the effect type column, “image display” means the display screen 70, and “speaker” means a speaker. 38, “lamp” means the frame lamp 37 and the panel lamp 5, and “vibration” means the vibration motor 128. In addition, "○" in these "image display", "speaker", "lamp", and "vibration" means that the rendering means is used, and "-" means that the rendering means is not used. Means For example, when the “image display” and “speaker” columns are “◯” and the “lamp” and “vibration” columns are “−”, the frame lamp 37, the panel lamp 5, and the vibration motor 128 are used. It means that the confirmation notification effect using the display screen 70 and the speaker 38 is executed without performing.

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the main CPU 81 determines that the jackpot game is to be executed, the sub CPU 91 executes the hit notification effect (see FIG. 12(I)). In addition, when the main CPU 81 determines that the sub CPU 91 executes the jackpot game, the jackpot game is executed prior to the hit notification effect (in other words, the hit notification effect is executed). There may be a case of executing a finalized notification effect that definitely notifies. As described above, since the confirmation notification effect is an effect that notifies in advance that the hit notification effect will be executed, it has a feature that it is not executed when the hit notification effect is not performed.

As shown in FIG. 20, the final notification effect is the final notification effect executed when the game is controlled in the normal gaming state, and when the game is controlled in the probability variation gaming state or the time saving gaming state. And the final notification effect executed during the jackpot game.

<Confirmation notification effect in normal game state>
As illustrated in FIG. 20, the confirmation notification effect executed when the game is controlled in the normal game state includes an icon display effect in the confirmation notification mode, a notice effect in the confirmation notification mode, and a confirmation notification mode. Title display effect, cut-in during specific reach, first first notification effect, second first notification effect, confirmation button effect, special character appearance effect, and button strong vibration effect.

When the game is controlled in the normal game state, it is difficult to win the game ball into the second starting opening 22, so the player hits the first starting opening 21 to the left. Therefore, when the game is controlled in the normal game state, the second special symbol determination is not executed, and basically, the first special symbol determination is executed. The determination information effects in the normal game state are all determination results of the first special symbol determination executed on the condition that the game ball is won in the first starting opening 21 when the game is controlled in the normal game state. Is a "big hit" and is executed under the condition that the winning lottery performed by the sub CPU 91 is won by using the confirmation notification effect random number (see step S1662 in FIG. 61). In other words, the execution condition of the confirmation notification effect in the normal game state is that the determination result of the first special symbol determination in the normal game state is “big hit”, and that the selection lottery using the confirmation notification effect random number is won. is there.

However, in the fixed notification effect in the normal game state, there is something that definitely notifies that the probability is a big jackpot. Regarding this fixed notification effect, the fact that the type of jackpot is the probability jackpot is one of the execution conditions. Become.

(Icon display effect of confirmation notification mode)
The icon display effect in the confirmation notification mode is a confirmation notification effect performed by using the display screen 70 and the speaker 38 without using the frame lamp 37, the panel lamp 5, and the vibration motor 128. Specifically, the icon display effect of the confirmation notification mode is a display effect for displaying a rainbow-colored holding icon (or a rainbow-colored corresponding icon), and starts the variable display of the first special symbol (and the effect symbol). It is performed at the time or during the variable display of the first special symbol (and the effect symbol).

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the hold icon or the icon change effect for the icon is performed, but the icon of the confirmation notification mode is given by any of the five icon change effects exemplified below. A display effect is realized. The first icon change effect is such that the display color of the hold icon is changed as the hold icon is shifted in the hold icon display area 71 at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol (and the effect symbol). It is an icon change effect of changing from a display color other than the color) to a rainbow color. The second icon change effect is in a predetermined position in the hold icon display area 71 because the first special symbol (and effect symbol) corresponding to the icon being displayed in the icon display area 72 is being changed and displayed. It is an icon change effect that changes the display color of the displayed hold icon to the iridescent color (from the display color other than the iridescent color).

The third icon change effect is that the variable display of the first special symbol is not performed, and the game ball is won in the first starting opening 21 in a state where the right of the first special symbol determination is not reserved. Accordingly, it is an icon change effect of newly displaying the rainbow-colored icon in the icon display area 72. The fourth icon change effect changes the display color of the icon (other than the rainbow color) as the hold icon is shifted from the hold icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72 and displayed as the new icon. It is an icon change effect that changes from the display color of () to a rainbow color. The fifth icon change effect is during the pre-reach effect, when the reach is established, at the timing when the reach effect develops from one reach effect to another reach effect, at a predetermined timing during a predetermined reach effect (for example, SPSP reach), and the like. , Is an icon change effect of changing the display color of the icon displayed in the icon display area 72 to a rainbow color (from a display color other than the rainbow color).

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the icon change effect pattern is set by the icon change effect pattern setting process (see FIG. 50) of step S517 executed in response to the sub CPU 91 receiving the hold command from the main control board 80. The effect pattern is set, and in the icon change effect pattern setting process, the rainbow color is selected as the final display color of the icon, so that the icon display effect in the finalized notification mode is realized.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case where a special effect sound dedicated to the icon display effect of the final notification mode is output from the speaker 38 when the icon display effect of the final notification mode is performed on the display screen 70 is described as an example. As will be described, in addition to this, for example, in the period from when the display color of the icon changes to iridescent until a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses, both the frame lamp 37 and the panel lamp 5 or either Either one may be made to emit rainbow color, or the vibration motor 128 may be driven to vibrate the first effect button 35.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the icon display effect of the final notification mode can be executed regardless of whether the type of jackpot relating to the first special symbol determination in the normal game state is "probable variation jackpot" or "normal jackpot" As will be described, in another embodiment, the icon display effect of the confirmation notification mode is executed for a part of the case of “probability variation jackpot”, while the icon display effect of the confirmation notification mode is performed for “normal jackpot”. A configuration such as not executing may be adopted.

(Preliminary notice of finalized notification mode)
The notice effect of the confirmation notification mode is a confirmation notification effect performed using the display screen 70, the speaker 38, the frame lamp 37, and the panel lamp 5 without using the vibration motor 128. There are a plurality of notice effects that function as the notice effect of this confirmation notification mode, for example, an effect of displaying a cut-in image expressed in rainbow color, an effect of displaying a button image expressed in rainbow color, As an example, an effect of displaying the number of steps expressed using a rainbow color and an effect of displaying a background image expressed using a rainbow color can be given.

The effect of displaying a cut-in image expressed using rainbow colors is as follows.
That is, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, when the end of the SPSP reach is approached, the first effect button operation promotion effect (see FIG. 12F) is executed, and the first effect button operation promotion is executed. In response to the operation of the first effect button 35 for the effect, a cut-in in which a predetermined cut-in image is superimposed and displayed on the effect image displayed on the display screen 70 occurs (see FIG. 12(G)). In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, although not shown in the figure, as the cut-in, a cut-in image including five characters and expressed using a rainbow color is displayed on the display screen 70. A rainbow cut-in to be displayed superimposed on the effect image may occur.

As described above with reference to FIG. 12(G) and the like, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, one of three types of cut-in of green cut-in, red cut-in, and gold cut-in occurs, These cut-ins may occur both when the determination result of the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state is "big hit" and "miss". On the other hand, the above-mentioned rainbow cut-in, in order to function as a notice effect (a notice effect with a jackpot reliability of 100%) that functions as a final notification effect, the determination result of the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state is "big hit". Has a different characteristic from the above three types of cut-ins, that is, it occurs in a part of the above cases and does not occur in the case of “miss”.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first effect button operation promotion effect illustrated in FIG. 12(G) is executed only at the timing near the end of SPSP reach, during pre-reach effect or normal reach. , Never executed during SP reach. Also, if the first effect button 35 is not operated during the effective period in which the first effect button operation promotion effect is performed, cut-in does not occur. Therefore, the rainbow cut-in is during the variable display of the first special symbol for which SPSP reach is executed, and at the timing when the first effect button 35 is operated during the effective period related to the first effect button operation promotion effect. It has the feature that it is only executed. Therefore, for example, immediately after the start of the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state, or during the variable display of the first special symbol that SPSP reach is not performed, the rainbow cut-in does not occur. The same applies to the above three types of cut-ins.

In the present embodiment, a case will be described as an example in which cut-in does not occur unless the first effect button 35 is operated during the effective period related to the above-described first effect button operation promotion effect, but in other embodiments. In the case where the first effect button 35 is not operated during the effective period, a cut-in (one of the above three types of cut-in and rainbow cut-in) may be generated at the timing when the effective period ends. Good.

The effect of displaying a button image expressed in rainbow colors is as follows.
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first effect button operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the first effect button 35 during the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal game state (for example, FIG. 12(F)). Or the second effect button operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the second effect button 36 (see, for example, FIG. 12(H)) is the first effect button image expressed in rainbow colors. There are cases where it is displayed during the first effect button operation promotion effect, and cases where the second effect button image expressed using rainbow colors is displayed during the second effect button operation promotion effect.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first effect button image expressed using the same color (normal color) as the actual color of the first effect button 35 during the effective period related to the first effect button operation promotion effect. Is displayed, a first effect button image expressing the first effect button 35 using red is displayed, and a first effect button image expressing the first effect button 35 using rainbow is displayed. It may be displayed. The colors of these first effect button images represent the jackpot reliability, and the case where the red first effect button image is displayed is larger than the case where the normal color first effect button image is displayed. High reliability. Further, the jackpot reliability is higher when the iridescent first effect button image is displayed than when the red first effect button image is displayed.

The normal color first effect button image and the red first effect button image are the determination results of the first special symbol determination performed at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol accompanied by the first effect button operation promotion effect. It is displayed whether "is a big hit" or "is a loss". On the other hand, the rainbow-colored first effect button image is displayed in a part of the case of “big hit” in order to function as a notice effect (a notice effect having a jackpot reliability of 100%) that functions as a confirmation notification effect. , Which is different from the normal color first effect button image and the red first effect button image, that is not displayed in the case of “miss”.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the second effect represented by using the same color (normal color) as the actual color of the second effect button 36 during the effective period related to the second effect button operation promotion effect. A case where a button image is displayed, a case where a second effect button image that expresses the second effect button 36 using red is displayed, and a case where a second effect button 36 that expresses the second effect button 36 using rainbow color is displayed. Images may be displayed. The colors of these second effect button images represent the jackpot reliability, and the case where the red second effect button image is displayed is larger than the case where the normal color second effect button image is displayed. High reliability. Further, the jackpot reliability is higher when the rainbow-colored second effect button image is displayed than when the red second effect button image is displayed.

The normal color second effect button image and the red second effect button image are the determination result of the first special symbol determination performed at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol accompanied by the second effect button operation promotion effect. It is displayed whether "is a big hit" or "is a loss". On the other hand, the rainbow-colored second effect button image is displayed in a part of the case of "big hit" in order to function as a notice effect (a notice effect having a jackpot reliability of 100%) that functions as a confirmation notification effect. , Which is different from the normal color second effect button image and the red second effect button image, that is not displayed in the case of “miss”.

Since the effect of displaying these first effect button images (or second effect button images) in rainbow color is to prompt the player to operate the first effect button 35 (or second effect button 36). , The first effect button operation promotion effect (or the first effect button operation promotion effect) is performed during the valid period, but not outside the valid period (for example, immediately after the start of the variable display of the first special symbol) There is a feature called.

Further, although not shown in the figure, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first effect button operation promotion is performed and the first effect button is promoted even during SPSP reach such as pre-reach effect or normal reach. A predetermined effect is performed according to the operation of 35. For example, when the first effect button 35 is operated in response to the promotion of the first effect button operation performed during the pre-reach effect, a notice effect called a serif notice in which a predetermined character makes a statement may be performed. Therefore, regarding the promotion of the first effect button operation other than during the SPSP reach, an effect of displaying the first effect button image in a rainbow color may be performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the first effect button image and the second effect button image are displayed in a rainbow color will be described as the notice effect that functions as the confirmation notification effect, but these effect button images are common. As the effect button image to be displayed, for example, a first effect button image expressing the first effect button 35 using gold and a second effect button image expressing the second effect button 36 using gold may be further displayed. Good.

The effect of displaying the number of steps expressed in rainbow colors is as follows.
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the step-up notice described above based on FIG. 11C and the like may be executed during the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state. This step-up notice is, for example, a notice effect performed during the pre-reach effect. The display mode of the effect image related to the step-up notice is changed stepwise, and the effect sound related to the step-up notice is output from the speaker 38. It is a production.

In this step-up notice, in order to make it easy to understand what stage of the production is being performed, the letters "STEP 1" are displayed during the production of step 1, and the letters "STEP 2" are displayed during the production of step 2. Is displayed and the character indicating the current stage number is displayed such that the character “STEP 3” is displayed during the effect of step 3.

When such a step-up notice is given, the character indicating the current number of steps is normally displayed in black. On the other hand, regarding the part of the case where the determination result of the first special symbol determination performed at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol for which a step-up notice is made is "big hit", the current stage number is shown. The letters are displayed in rainbow colors.

Here, the effect of displaying the character indicating the current stage number in black is that the determination result of the first special symbol determination performed at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol for which a step-up notice is given is "big hit". It is possible to execute either in some cases or in case of "miss". On the other hand, the effect of displaying the character indicating the current number of steps in rainbow color (the effect of displaying the number of steps expressed using rainbow color) is an effect that functions as a confirmation notification effect. There is a feature that it is executed in a part of the case of "big hit" while it is not executed in the case of "loss".

In addition, in the present embodiment, for example, all the characters of “STEP1”, the characters of “STEP2”, and the characters of “STEP3” displayed as the step-up notice changes from step 1 to step 3 The case of displaying in rainbow colors will be described as an example, but in another embodiment, for example, the characters “STEP 1” are displayed in black, the characters “STEP 2” are displayed in black, and the characters “STEP 3” are displayed in rainbow. Only the character indicating the final step number may be displayed in rainbow color, such as displaying in color.

The effect of displaying the background image expressed in rainbow colors is as follows.
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, whether the determination result of the first special symbol determination performed at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state is "big hit" or "miss" However, basically, when the effect is controlled in the first normal mode, the background image dedicated to the first normal mode is displayed on the display screen 70, and when the effect is controlled in the second normal mode. The background image dedicated to the second normal mode is displayed on the display screen 70, and when the effect is controlled in the third normal mode, the background image dedicated to the third normal mode is displayed on the display screen 70.

On the other hand, with respect to a part of the case where the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “big hit”, not the background image dedicated to each normal mode but the special background image expressed using rainbow color is displayed. Displayed on the screen 70. Specifically, with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, a special background image of one of the normal modes (for example, a background image of the first normal mode) is changed to a special background image. Or, in the middle of the variable display of the first special symbol, a second background change in which one of the normal background dedicated background images is changed to a special background image is performed.

Since the effect of displaying the special background image in this way is an effect that functions as a confirmation notification effect, the determination result of the first special symbol determination performed at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal game state When is “miss”, the first background change described above is not performed at the start of the symbol variation, or the second background change is not performed in the middle of the symbol variation.

Up to this point, as the notice effect of the confirmation notification mode, the effect of displaying the cut-in image expressed in rainbow color, the effect of displaying the button image expressed in rainbow color, and the effect expressed in rainbow color Although the effect of displaying the number of steps and the effect of displaying the background image expressed using the rainbow color have been described, the sub CPU 91 receives the fluctuation start command from the main control board 80 in the notice effect of these confirmation notification modes. In the notice effect pattern setting process of step S164 (see FIG. 57) executed in response to the action, the effect pattern for displaying the effect image expressed using the rainbow color is selected, and the variation including the information indicating the selection result is selected. It is realized by transmitting a production start command to the image sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the notice effect of the confirmation notification mode is performed using the display screen 70, a special effect sound dedicated to the notice effect of the confirmation notification mode is output from the speaker 38, and the notice effect of the confirmation notification mode is performed. The case where the frame lamp 37 and the panel lamp 5 are made to emit light by a dedicated light emission pattern will be described as an example, but in addition to this, in another embodiment, the vibration motor 128 is driven at the execution timing of the notice effect in the confirmation notification mode. Alternatively, the first effect button 35 may be vibrated.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case will be described in which the notice effect in the finalized notification mode can be executed regardless of whether the type of jackpot relating to the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state is "probable variation jackpot" or "normal jackpot". However, in another embodiment, the notice effect of the final notification mode is executed for a part of the case of “probable variation big hit”, while the notice effect of the final notification mode is not executed for “normal big hit”. A configuration may be adopted.

(Title display effect of confirmation notification mode)
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, at the start of SPSP reach, for example, as a content of SPSP reach, a title such as “VS enemy character X” indicating that the main character battles with enemy character X during SPSP reach is displayed. To be done. This title may be displayed in black or red, and the jackpot reliability of the effect of displaying a black title (black title) is set to about 20%, and the red title (red title). The jackpot reliability of the effect of displaying the title is set to about 45%.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination performed at the start of the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state in which SPSP reach is “big hit” In some cases, an effect of displaying the above title in rainbow color may be performed at the start of SPSP reach. The jackpot reliability of the effect for displaying this rainbow title is 100%, and as described above, it is executed in a part of the case of "big hit", while it is not executed in the case of "miss". ..

In addition, in the present embodiment, the title display effect of the confirmation notification mode (effect of displaying the rainbow title) uses only the display screen 70 without using the speaker 38, the frame lamp 37, the panel lamp 5, and the vibration motor 128. However, in another embodiment, at least one of the speaker 38, the frame lamp 37, the board lamp 5, and the vibration motor 128 is further used to perform the confirmation notification mode. The title display effect may be executed.

(Cut-in during specific reach)
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, the cut-in occurs according to the operation of the first effect button 35 for the first effect button operation promotion effect during the SPSP reach. On the other hand, a cut representing a special character (special character) is performed during normal reach or SP reach regardless of the player's operation on the first effect button 35 without performing the first effect button operation promotion effect. There may be a case where a special character cut-in in which the in-image is superimposed and displayed on the effect image being displayed.

This special character cut-in basically occurs during SP reach, and when the special character cut-in occurs during SP reach, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the special character cut-in does not occur during SP reach. It has the characteristic of increasing the degree. That is, the special character cut-in functions as a chance-up effect during SP reach.

On the other hand, if normal reach is performed along with the variation display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state, regarding the case where the determination result of the first special symbol determination performed at the start of this symbol variation is "big hit" , Special character cut-in occurs during normal reach. Since this special character cut-in is an effect that functions as a confirmation notification effect, if the result of the first special symbol determination is “miss”, the special character cut-in occurs during SP reach. Yes, but it does not occur during normal reach.

In this way, since the special character cut-in during normal reach functions as the confirmation notification effect, the player can enjoy the game while expecting that a special character cut-in will occur during normal reach.

Note that, in the present embodiment, a case will be described in which a special effect sound dedicated to the special character cut-in is output from the speaker 38 as the effect image related to the special character cut-in is displayed on the display screen 70. The effect means used for the special character cut-in is not limited to the two of the display screen 70 and the speaker 38. For example, at least one of the frame lamp 37, the board lamp 5, and the vibration motor 128 is further used. Then, the special character cut-in may be executed.

(First announcement announcement)
1st 1st announcement production, when the decision result of the 1st special design decision in the normal game state becomes "big hit", the 1st special design which is done according to the fact that the 1st special design decision is executed Immediately after the start of the variable display, or when the reach is established during the variable display of the first special symbol, the hit notification effect is definitely notified. Specifically, the first first notification effect is an effect in which a part of the color LEDs forming the panel lamp 5 emits a rainbow color and a predetermined single notification sound is output from the speaker 38.

In addition, since the first one-shot notification effect is an effect that definitely notifies the "big hit" prior to the hit notification effect, like the other fixed notification effects, the determination result of the first special symbol determination described above. Has a feature that it is executed in a part of the case of "big hit" while it is not executed in the case of "miss".

(No. 2 first announcement production)
The second 1st announcement effect, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state is "big hit", the first special symbol determination is made according to the execution of the first special symbol determination In the final stage of the predetermined reach effect (for example, SP reach or SPSP reach) during the variable display of, the hit notification effect is definitely notified to be executed. Specifically, the second one-shot notification effect displays a one-shot notification effect image expressed in rainbow color on the display screen 70, causes the frame lamp 37 to emit light in rainbow color, and This is an effect in which a single notification sound different from the one notification sound output during the one notification effect is output from the speaker 38.

Although the second one-shot notification effect is different from the first one-shot notification effect in the above-described manner, the execution conditions are common, and the sub-CPU 91 determines to execute the one-shot notification effect. In this case, one of the one-shot announcement effects is selected by, for example, an effect lottery, and the one-shot announcement effect is executed. Therefore, both the first first notification effect and the second first notification effect are not executed within the same fluctuation.

(Confirm button production)
The confirmation button effect is a confirmation notification effect that uses the frame lamp 37 around the first effect button 35 and the vibration motor 128 to definitely notify that the hit notification effect will be performed.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the jackpot reliability is suggested by the combination of the emission color of the frame lamp 37 around the first effect button 35 and the strength of the vibration of the first effect button 35 (the driving pattern of the vibration motor 128). The button effect to be performed is executed. In the present embodiment, this button effect may occur as a chance-up effect during the effective period of the second effect button operation promotion effect in the final stage of SPSP reach. That is, there is a case where the button effect is generated and a case where the button effect is not generated, and there is a feature that the jackpot reliability is higher when it occurs than when it does not occur. Note that there are the following types of button effects.

For example, a first button effect may be performed in which the frame lamp 37 around the first effect button 35 emits blue light and the first effect button 35 is slightly vibrated, and the jackpot reliability of this first button effect is about 12%. Is set to. For example, a second button effect may be performed in which the frame lamp 37 around the first effect button 35 emits green light and the first effect button 35 vibrates strongly, and the jackpot reliability of this second button effect is about 56%. Is set to.

In addition, for example, a third button effect may be performed in which the frame lamp 37 around the first effect button 35 emits red light and the first effect button 35 vibrates strongly, and the third button effect is the jackpot reliability. Is set to 100%, and functions as the above-described confirmation button effect. This third button effect is not executed unless the determination result of the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state is “big hit”, and becomes a big hit rich when the third button effect is executed.

Further, for example, there may be a fourth button effect in which the frame lamp 37 around the first effect button 35 emits iridescent light and the first effect button 35 vibrates strongly, and the fourth button effect is the jackpot reliability. The degree is set to 100% and functions as the above-mentioned confirmation button effect. This fourth button effect is not executed unless the determination result of the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state is "big hit", and the kind of the big hit is "probable variation big hit", and the fourth button effect is When executed, the probability variation jackpot becomes rich. That is, when the fourth button effect is generated during the variable display of the first special symbol, the hit notification effect of notifying the sure variation big hit is always executed at the end of the variable display of the first special symbol.

In addition, during the effective period related to the second effect button operation promotion effect in which the first to fourth button effects are generated, the operation of the second effect button 36, instead of the first effect button 35, is effective. Therefore, in another embodiment, a vibration motor for vibrating the second effect button 36 is provided, and the first motor effect to the fourth button effect are produced by using the vibration motor and the frame lamp 37 around the second effect button 36. May be executed. In addition, the player can operate only one effect button, and the vibration motor for vibrating the effect button and the frame lamp 37 around the effect button are used to execute the first button effect to the fourth button effect. You may do so.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the case where the first button effect to the fourth button effect are executed by using the frame lamp 37 and the vibration motor 128 without using the display screen 70, the speaker 38, and the board surface lamp 5. As will be described, in another embodiment, at least one of the display screen 70, the speaker 38, and the panel lamp 5 may be further used to execute these button effects.

(Special character appearance production)
The special character appearance effect in the normal game state is a finalized notification effect that uses the display screen 70 and the speaker 38 to definitely notify that the probability notification big hit is notified and a special character (special This is an effect in which an effect display showing the appearance of a character is displayed on the display screen 70, and the sound of the special character, for example, “Probably strange!” is output from the speaker 38. In this special character appearance production, in the case where the determination result of the first special symbol determination in the normal game state is "big hit", and the probability variation big hit is selected as the kind of the big hit, this first special symbol judgment Is executed during the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to. In the present embodiment, the special character appearance production is executed at various timings, such as during pre-reach production, when reach is established, during normal reach, during SP reach, during SPSP reach.

In this embodiment, the case where the special character appearance effect in the normal game state is executed using the display screen 70 and the speaker 38 without using the frame lamp 37, the board surface lamp 5, and the vibration motor 128 will be described. However, in another embodiment, at least one of the frame lamp 37, the board surface lamp 5, and the vibration motor 128 may be further used to execute the special character appearance effect.

(Direction of strong button vibration)
The button strong vibration effect is a confirmed notification effect that definitely notifies that the hit notification effect is performed by controlling the drive of the vibration motor 128 to strongly vibrate the first effect button 35. The strong button vibration effect differs from the above-described first button effect to fourth button effect in the following points.

That is, the first button effect to the fourth button effect are executed by using the frame lamp 37 and the vibration motor 128 as described above, whereas the strong button vibration effect is performed without using the frame lamp 37. This is different from the first to fourth button effects in that it is executed using only the vibration motor 128. Further, the first button effect to the fourth button effect are executed during the effective period of the second effect button operation promotion effect at the end of the SPSP reach, whereas the button strong vibration effect is the first in the normal game state. Immediately after the start of the variable display of the special symbol, or when the cut-in occurs during SPSP reach, it is different from the first button effect to the fourth button effect.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a configuration in which only the vibration motor 128 is used to execute the strong button vibration effect so that only the player who is playing the game machine 1 can recognize that the jackpot is rich is adopted. ing. On the other hand, in another embodiment, at least one of the display screen 70, the speaker 38, the frame lamp 37, and the panel lamp 5 may be further used to execute the strong button vibration effect. ..

Up to this point, various confirmation notification effects executed when the game is controlled in the normal gaming state have been described, but in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state is started. In some cases, the confirmation notification effect may be executed a plurality of times from the time it is performed to the time it ends. In this way, when the confirmation notification effect is executed a plurality of times within the same fluctuation, when the same confirmation notification effect is executed a plurality of times and two or more different confirmation notification effects are executed in order, as a result. There are times when the confirmation notification effect is executed a plurality of times within the same fluctuation.

<Confirmation notification effect in probability variation game state (or time saving game state)>
As illustrated in FIG. 20, in the final notification effect executed when the game is controlled in the normal game state (or the time saving game state), the special character appearance effect, the one-shot notification effect, and the rainbow color There are effects, 7-pattern tempai, and reach voice effects.

When the game is controlled in the probability variation game state (or the time saving game state), it is easy to put a game ball in the second starting opening 22, so that the player can hit the second starting opening 22 to the right. Is done. In addition, when both the first special symbol determination and the second special symbol determination are suspended, the second special symbol determination is executed with priority over the first special symbol determination, so the probability variation game state ( Or, when the game is controlled in the time saving game state), the second special symbol determination is basically executed.

The confirmation notification effect in the probability variation gaming state (or the time saving gaming state) is that the game ball is won in the second starting opening 22 when the game is controlled in the probability variation gaming state (or the time saving gaming state). As a condition that the determination result of the second special symbol determination executed as "is a big hit" and that the winning lottery executed by the sub CPU 91 using the confirmation notification effect random number (see step S1662 of FIG. 61) is won. Executed. In other words, the execution condition of the confirmation notification effect in the probability variation gaming state (or the time-shortening gaming state) is that the determination result of the second special symbol determination in the probability variation gaming state (or the time-saving gaming state) is “big hit”, and the confirmation notification is made. It is to win the production lottery using the production random numbers.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the jackpot related to the first special symbol determination may be a “probable variation jackpot” or a “normal jackpot” (see FIG. 6(B)), and thus, a regular game. When the fixed notification effect is executed when the game is controlled in the state, after that, when the hit notification effect that notifies the "probable variation big hit" is executed, and the hit notification effect that notifies the "normal jackpot" It may be executed. On the other hand, since the jackpots related to the second special symbol determination are all "probability variation jackpots" (see FIG. 6(C)), the confirmation notification effect is given when the game is controlled in the probability variation gaming state (or normal gaming state). When executed, except when the first special symbol determination is exhausted, the probability variation big hit becomes rich at the time when the finalization notification effect is executed.

(Special character appearance production)
The special character appearance effect in the probability variation game state (or the time-saving game state) is a fixed notification effect that definitely notifies that the hit notification effect will be performed using the display screen 70, and is a special character (special character). Is an effect that is displayed on the display screen 70 to represent the appearance of. This special character appearance production is the second special corresponding to the second special symbol determination in a part of the case where the determination result of the second special symbol determination in the probability variation game state (or the time saving game state) is “big hit”. It is executed during variable display of symbols. In the present embodiment, the special character appearance production is executed at various timings, such as immediately after the variable display of the second special symbol is started and when the reach is established.

In the present embodiment, the special character appearance effect in the probability variation game state (or time saving game state) is achieved by using only the display screen 70 without using the speaker 38, the frame lamp 37, the board lamp 5, and the vibration motor 128. In the other embodiment, at least one of the speaker 38, the frame lamp 37, the board lamp 5, and the vibration motor 128 is further used to execute the special character appearance effect, although the case where it is executed is described. You can

(One-shot announcement production)
One probability notification effect in the probability variation gaming state (or time saving game state), if the determination result of the second special symbol determination in the probability variation gaming state (or time saving game state) is "big hit", the second special symbol determination Immediately after the start of the variable display of the second special symbol that is performed in response to the execution, or when the reach is established during the variable display of the second special symbol, it is definitely notified that the hit notification effect is executed. It is a production. Specifically, this one-shot notification effect is an effect in which the frame lamp 37 and the board lamp 5 are made to emit rainbow colors and a predetermined one-shot notification sound is output from the speaker 38.

In addition, since the one-shot notification effect in the probability variation game state (or the time-saving game state) is an effect that definitely notifies "big hit" prior to the hit notification effect, like the other fixed notification effects, There is a feature that the determination result of the second special symbol determination is executed in a part of the case of “big hit”, while it is not executed in the case of “miss”.

(Rainbow production)
Iridescent effect, if the determination result of the second special symbol determination in the probability variation game state (or time saving game state) is "big hit", the variation of the second special symbol that is performed according to this second special symbol determination It is an effect of displaying an effect image expressed using a rainbow color on the display screen 70 during display. Since this iridescent effect is an effect in which the "big hit" is definitely notified prior to the hit notification effect, like the other fixed notification effects, the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "big hit". There is a feature that it is executed in a part of a certain case, but not executed in the case of "miss".

(7 patterns tempai)
The 7 symbol tempai is an effect that establishes a reach with 7 symbols during the variation display of the second special symbol in the probability variation game state (or the time saving game state), and the player can win the most prize balls. Big hit game (see FIG. 6(C)) is notified that a hit notification effect (for example, a hit notification effect in which three effect symbols showing a doublet of "777" are virtually stopped and then stopped) is performed. This is a finalized notification effect that notifies in advance that it will be hit.

In this way, since the 7 symbol tempai is an effect that notifies the 9R jackpot (probability variation jackpot) in advance, the determination result of the second special symbol determination in the probability variation gaming state (or time saving gaming state) is "bonus". And, the execution condition is that the big hit symbol Y3 (see FIG. 6(C)) is selected as the big hit symbol stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display 42, and even if it is a "big hit", another big hit. It is not executed when a symbol is selected or when it is "miss".

In the probability variation game state (or time saving game state), the reach is established with 7 symbols during the variable display of the second special symbol. The jackpot reliability of the reach establishment effect is 100%, while the reach is established with 3 symbols. The jackpot reliability of the reach establishment effect is 50%, and the jackpot reliability of the reach establishment effect that establishes the reach with the other effect symbols is set to 20%.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a case where a seven-pattern template is performed using the display screen 70 and the speaker 38 will be described as an example, but in other embodiments, the frame lamp 37, the board surface lamp 5, and the vibration motor 128. You may make it perform 7 symbol tempai by using at least any one further.

(Reach voice production)
The reach voice effect is a voice suggesting the reach establishment from the speaker 38 when the reach is established in any one of the symbols 1 to 9 during the variation display of the second special symbol in the probability variation game state (or the time saving game state). It is a production to output. This reach voice effect includes a reach voice effect in which a voice such as "Geki Atsu!" is output from the speaker 38, and a reach voice effect in which a voice such as "Reach!" is output from the speaker 38 with a slight delay from the reach establishment timing. Thus, any of the reach voice effects functions as a finalized notification effect.

In addition, in the present embodiment, if the determination result of the second special symbol determination in the probability variation game state (or time saving game state) is "miss", the variation of the second special symbol corresponding to this second special symbol determination Even if the reach is established during the display, the speaker 38 does not output the voice suggesting that the reach is established, and for a part of the case of “big hit”, the case where the reach voice effect is executed with the reach established is an example. Will be explained. On the other hand, in the other embodiment, when the reach is established during the variation display of the second special symbol in the probability variation game state (or the time saving game state), it is performed at the start of the variation display of the second special symbol. Regardless of whether or not the determination result of the second special symbol determination is "big hit", a voice (may be a sound effect or the like) indicating that the reach is established is output, and the big hit is given depending on the content and output timing of this voice. A configuration in which the reliability changes may be adopted.

For example, the jackpot reliability is about 15% when the voice "REACH!" is output when the reach is established, and the jackpot reliability when the voice "CHANCE!" is output when the reach is established. It is about 35%, and it is a big jackpot when the sound "Gekiatsu!" is output with the reach establishment. It is also a jackpot rich when the sound "Reach!" is output a little after the reach is established. There is an example of such a configuration.

(Other configuration related to the confirmation notification effect in the probability variation gaming state (or the time saving gaming state))
In the present embodiment, the case where all the jackpots related to the second special symbol determination are “probable variation jackpots” will be described as an example, but in other embodiments, “probability variation jackpots” as the types of jackpots related to the second special symbol determination. And a "normal jackpot" may be prepared.

In this case, when executing the confirmation notification effect that definitely notifies the jackpot regardless of whether or not the type of jackpot is the “probable variation jackpot”, the execution conditions common to those exemplified in the present embodiment are satisfied. In this case, the confirmation notification effect may be executed. On the other hand, in the case of executing the definite notification effect for definitely informing that the jackpot related to the second special symbol determination is the "probable variation jackpot", in addition to the execution conditions exemplified in the present embodiment, the second special symbol determination The confirmation notification effect may be executed on condition that the execution condition that the type of jackpot related to “is a probability variation jackpot” is further satisfied.

<Confirmation notification production during jackpot game>
As illustrated in FIG. 20, there are a special winning sound output effect and a special V winning notification effect as the confirmation notification effects executed during the jackpot game.

(Special winning sound output production)
The special winning sound output effect in the present embodiment, as is clear from the notation after step S236 of FIG. 63, during the round game of the predetermined round of opening and closing the second winning opening 28, to the second winning opening 28 It is an effect that a special winning sound is output from the speaker 38 each time a game ball wins. This special winning sound output effect, the right of the second special symbol determination is reserved at the start of the round game of the predetermined round to open and close the second special winning opening 28, in the reserved right "big hit It is performed on the condition that the one that is to be determined is included, and that an effect lottery for determining whether to execute the special winning sound output effect is won. That is, the execution condition of the special winning sound output effect is that the right of the second special symbol determination is reserved at the start of the round game of the predetermined round that opens and closes the second special winning opening 28, and that of the reserved right. That is, there is something that will be determined as a "big hit", and it is to win the effect lottery for determining whether or not to execute the special winning sound output effect.

In the present embodiment, the right to be judged as a “big hit” in the right of the second special symbol judgment that is held at the start of the round game of the predetermined round for opening and closing the second special winning opening 28. If is not included, a configuration is adopted in which the winning sound is not output even if a game ball wins the second big winning opening 28 during this round game. Therefore, as described above, by outputting the special winning sound from the speaker 38 every time the game ball wins the second big winning opening 28 during the round game of the predetermined round, the suspension related to the second special symbol determination It is possible to inform the player in an easy-to-understand manner that a "big hit" is included in.

In addition, in another embodiment, if even one of the execution conditions of the special winning sound output effect is not satisfied, it is normal every time the game ball wins the second special winning opening 28 during the round game of the predetermined round. When the winning sound is output and all the execution conditions of the special winning sound output effect are satisfied, each time the game ball wins the second big winning opening 28 during the round game of the predetermined round (normal winning sound) It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which a special winning sound is output.

(Special V winning notification production)
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, with regard to the big hit related to the first special symbol determination, in order to make it difficult to understand whether the gaming state after the big hit game is the probability variation gaming state, it is determined by the type of the probability variation jackpot. A configuration in which the effective round games are different (see FIGS. 7(A) and 7(B)) and a configuration in which even if a game ball wins a V prize, the fact is not notified is adopted. On the other hand, since the jackpots related to the second special symbol determination are all probability variation jackpots (see FIG. 6C), it is not necessary to apply the same configuration to the jackpots related to the second special symbol determination. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the effective round game in which the V prize of the game ball is valid is fixed to the fifth round game in which the second big winning opening 28 is opened, and this round game is performed. When the game ball wins V, the V winning notification effect for notifying that effect is always executed.

The above V winning notification effect is an effect that is executed on condition that the game ball has won V during the fifth round game. On the other hand, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, at the start of the round game of the fifth round, the right of the second special symbol determination is suspended, and in the reserved rights, "big hit". In some cases, the special V-winning notification effect may be executed on the condition that the items to be determined are included.

As described above with reference to FIG. 13D and the like, the V-winning notification production is a production image showing how two characters lift the (golden) star-shaped emblem containing the character “V” and are happy. The predetermined V winning notification sound is output from the speaker 38 while being displayed on the display screen 70. On the other hand, in the special V-prize notification production, a display image is displayed on the display screen 70, which shows how five characters lift up the (rainbow-colored) star-shaped emblem containing the letter "V" and are happy. The special V-winning notification sound different from the above V-winning notification sound is output from the speaker 38.

As described above, in the special V prize notification effect, the display color of the star emblem, the number of characters lifting the star emblem, and the V prize notification sound output from the speaker 38 are different from those of the normal V prize notification effect. ing. Therefore, based on these differences, the player easily recognizes that the game ball has won the V prize and that the right of the second special symbol determination to be determined as a jackpot is reserved. It is possible to

The special winning sound output effect and the special V winning notification effect are effects for notifying that the right to be held for the second special symbol determination includes one that is to be determined as a big hit. In this respect, since both are common, it is not necessary to execute both of these effects during one big hit game. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when executing the special winning sound output effect, the normal V winning notification effect is executed without executing the special V winning notification effect, and the special winning sound output effect is executed. If not, the special V winning notification production is to be executed.

(Regarding the gaming machine 1 capable of executing the confirmation notification effect)
Up to this point, various confirmation notification effects executed by the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment have been described with reference to FIG. 20, but some of these confirmation notification effects have the same execution timing, Some of them have different execution timings, and when two fixed notification effects having different execution timings are compared, at least one of the execution condition and the effect mode is different, which is extremely diverse and highly entertaining. It is possible to execute the effect. The gaming machine 1 capable of executing such a variety and highly entertaining confirmation notification effect can be regarded as the following gaming machine.

Determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game) (for example, the main CPU 81 that executes the jackpot determination process of step S308 of FIG. 42 described later),
When the determination means determines that the special game is executed, a special game execution means for executing the special game (for example, the main CPU 81 for executing the special winning opening/closing control processing in step S6 of FIG. 39),
An effect control unit (for example, a sub CPU 91, an image/sound control CPU 101, a lamp CPU 121) that controls execution of an effect is provided,
The effect control means,
When the special game is executed, a hit notification effect (for example, refer to FIG. 12(I)) for notifying that it is determined by the determination means and a notification that the special game is executed prior to the hit notification effect And a confirmation notification effect (for example, see FIG. 20) can be executed.
There are a first case in which the confirmation notification effect is executed at a first execution timing and a second case in which the confirmation notification effect is executed at a second execution timing (see, for example, FIG. 20 ),
A game machine characterized in that at least one of an execution condition and an effect mode of the finalized notification effect is different between the first case and the second case (see, for example, FIG. 20 ).

According to the gaming machine 1 having such a configuration, the confirmation notification effect executed at the second execution timing is at least one of the execution condition and the effect mode as compared with the confirmation notification effect executed at the first execution timing. One is different. In this way, when the confirmation notification effects having different execution timings are compared, at least one of the execution condition and the effect mode of the confirmation notification effect is changed, so that the execution condition and the effect are changed only by the execution timing of the confirmation notification effect. Since both of the aspects are fixed, the confirmation notification effect becomes monotonous, and it is possible to effectively prevent the problem that the effective confirmation notification effect cannot be executed.

[Reliability suggestion pair display production]
In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a holding icon (holding suggestion image) indicating that the right of the first special symbol determination in the normal game state is reserved is displayed in a display mode based on the preliminary determination result. In addition, as an expected effect that expects the jackpot game to be executed, an effect of displaying an expected image in a display mode based on the preliminary determination result may be performed. That is, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, there are a hold icon (see FIG. 21(A)) other than the default display color and an expected image (see FIG. 21(B)) that can be changed stepwise. Depending on the pair, there may be a case where a reliability suggestion pair display effect that suggests the jackpot reliability is executed. The reliability suggestive pair display effect will be described below with reference to FIGS. 21 to 23.

(Icon jackpot reliability)
FIG. 21A is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot reliability of the hold icon (and the icon). The hold icon and the type of icon that can change the icon depending on the icon change effect, and the display of each icon. The correspondence between the aspect and the jackpot reliability of each icon is illustrated. For example, when the icon change effect for the white hold icon (white icon: default hold icon) is executed, the white hold icon (white icon) changes to the blue hold icon (blue icon), the green hold icon. The icon changes to a display color indicating a jackpot reliability such as an icon (green icon), a red hold icon (red icon), and a rainbow-color hold icon (rainbow icon). In the present embodiment, both the display color and the shape of the icon change depending on the icon change effect. In addition, in the present embodiment, the white icon does not indicate the jackpot reliability, the blue icon jackpot reliability is set to about 3%, the green icon jackpot reliability is set to about 15%, and the red icon is set. The jackpot reliability of is set to about 45%, and the jackpot reliability of the rainbow icon is set to 100%.

As described above, there are a plurality of display modes of the hold icon, which have different expectation that the jackpot game is executed.

(The expected image jackpot reliability)
FIG. 21B is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot reliability of the expected image. When the icon change effect is executed and a blue icon, a green icon, a red icon, or a rainbow icon is displayed as a hold icon, an expected image that suggests the jackpot reliability in cooperation with the displayed hold icon is displayed. It may be displayed.

In this embodiment, three types of expected images are prepared as the expected images, that is, a first expected image, a second expected image, and a third expected image. Here, the first expected image is an effect image showing that one character who is accumulating power wears a blue aura, and the second expected image is when two characters who are accumulating power are It is an effect image showing a state of wearing a green aura, and the third expectation image is an effect image showing how three characters who are accumulating power are wearing a red aura. When these three types of expected images are arranged in order from the one with the highest jackpot reliability to the one with the highest jackpot reliability, the first expected image, the second expected image, and the third expected image are in this order.

As described above, there are a plurality of display modes of the expected image in which the expectation that the jackpot game is executed are different from each other.

Since these expected images cooperate with the hold icon as a special icon (hold icon having a display color other than white) to suggest the jackpot reliability, only the default hold icon is displayed in the present embodiment. The feature is that the expected image is not displayed in the state where it is not. In addition, since the expected image cooperates with the hold icon to suggest the jackpot reliability, if the hold icon (special icon) that cooperates with the expected image is not displayed in the hold icon display area 71, the expected image is displayed. Is not displayed and the expected image is deleted from the display screen 70 as the hold icon that cooperates with the expected image is shifted from the hold icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72.

During the display of the expected image, an expected image change effect that changes the displayed expected image may be performed. For example, the expected image change effect is performed during the display of the first expected image, and the first expected image being displayed changes to the second expected image, or the expected image change effect is performed while the first expected image is displayed. The first expected image currently being displayed is changed to the third expected image (without passing through the second expected image), or the second expected image being displayed due to the expected image change effect being performed while the second expected image is being displayed. The image changes to the third expected image. Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the change of the display mode of the hold icon and the change of the display mode of the expected image are changed based on the result of the preliminary determination for the reserved right of the first special symbol determination. Controlled by.

(The jackpot reliability of the reliability suggestion pair)
When the hold icon and the expected image collaborate to perform the reliability suggestion pair display effect that suggests the jackpot reliability, the icon change effect for the hold icon and the expected image change effect for the expected image are performed. Is executed individually, the combination of the hold icon and the expected image will change accordingly.

FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the jackpot reliability that the combination of the hold icon and the expected image has. Since the icon change effect and the expected image change effect are individually executed during the reliability suggestive pair display effect, the combination of the reserved image and the expected image changes, and the first pair to the second example illustrated in FIG. Any of the 9 pairs will be displayed.

Here, the first pair is a pair including the blue hold icon and the first expected image (see FIG. 22A). The second pair is a pair including a blue hold icon and a second expected image (see FIG. 22(B)). The third pair is a pair including a green hold icon and a first expected image (see FIG. 22(C)). The fourth pair is a pair including a blue hold icon and a third expected image (see FIG. 22D). The fifth pair is a pair including the green hold icon and the second expected image (see FIG. 22(E)).

The sixth pair is a pair including a red hold icon and a first expected image (see FIG. 22(F)). The seventh pair is a pair including a green hold icon and a third expected image (see FIG. 22(G)). The eighth pair is a pair including a red hold icon and a second expected image (see FIG. 22(H)). The ninth pair is a pair including a red hold icon and a third expected image (see FIG. 22(I)).

In addition, when the first to ninth pairs are arranged in descending order of jackpot reliability, the first pair, the second pair, the third pair, the fourth pair, the fifth pair, the sixth pair, and the seventh pair. , 8th pair, 9th pair. Further, for example, when the icon change effect of changing the blue hold icon to the green hold icon is performed while the first pair (see FIG. 22(A)) is displayed, the first pair is changed to the third pair (FIG. 22( C)). Further, for example, when the expected image change effect of changing the first expected image to the third expected image is performed during the display of the third pair (see FIG. 22C), the third pair is changed to the seventh pair ( 22(G)). Also, for example, during the display of the second pair (see FIG. 22B), an icon change effect of changing the blue hold icon to the red hold icon and an expected image change of changing the second expected image to the third expected image. When the effect is performed, the second pair changes to the ninth pair (see FIG. 22(I)).

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the hold icon (holding suggestion image) is displayed without executing the effect of displaying the expected image (an example of the expected effect), it is exemplified in FIG. As described above, the display mode of the hold icon indicates the degree of expectation that the jackpot game will be executed. On the other hand, when the expected image is displayed while the hold icon is displayed, that is, when the reliability suggestive pair display effect is being performed, by both the display mode of the hold icon and the display mode of the expected image, The degree of expectation that the jackpot game will be executed is suggested.

(Concrete example of the reliability suggestive pair display effect)
Next, a specific example of the reliability suggestive pair display effect will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 23 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of the reliability suggestive pair display effect. In FIG. 23(A), a game ball is won in the first starting opening 21 during the variable display of the first special symbol (and the effect symbol) corresponding to the icon displayed in the icon display area 72, It is illustrated that a fourth hold icon (white hold icon) corresponding to the fourth hold related to the first special symbol determination is newly displayed in the hold icon display area 71. Here, a case will be described as an example in which the reliability suggestive pair display effect is performed based on the result of the preliminary determination regarding the right of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the fourth hold icon.

When the reach effect is executed during the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the hold icon displayed before the hold icon for the prefetching is displayed, the reliability suggestive pair display effect interferes with the reach effect. On the contrary, there is a possibility that the reach effect may interfere with the reliability suggestive pair display effect. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern relating to the variation display of the first special symbol corresponding to the hold icon displayed before the hold icon to be prefetched is displayed is a variation pattern for reach-free loss. If it is, the reliability suggestive pair display effect is executed, and if the big hit variation pattern or the reach loss variation pattern is included, the reliability suggestive pair display effect is not executed.

In FIG. 23(B), in the final stage of the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the icon (see FIG. 23(A)) displayed in the icon display area 72, the determination result of the first special symbol determination In order to inform that "is a loss", the state in which the three effect symbols showing the discontinuity of "283" are pseudo stopped is illustrated. On the other hand, when the variable display of the first special symbol ends, the lost symbol as the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 41, and on the display screen 70, the three effect symbols are permanently stopped. ..

In this way, when the predetermined confirmation time (0.5 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the lost symbol was stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the earliest hold displayed in the hold icon display area 71 The first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon (holding icon at the left end) is executed. Then, as the variable display of the first special symbol is started in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination, the earliest hold icon is shifted from the hold icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72. At the same time, scroll display of the three symbol rows is started (see FIGS. 23B and 23C).

In addition, here, the variable display of the first special symbol (and the effect symbol) which has been executed at the timing when the fourth right relating to the first special symbol determination which is the prefetch target is suspended (see FIG. 23(A)). ) It is preset to start the reliability suggestive pair display effect with the start of the next variable display. Then, in the present embodiment, the expected image is displayed in the central area of the display screen 70 (the area above the hold icon display area 71) during execution of the reliability suggestive pair display effect. Therefore, the three symbol arrays are displayed as small symbols in the upper right area of the display screen 70 (see FIG. 23(C)). In FIG. 23(C), a blue hold icon is displayed as the third hold icon as the read-ahead target hold icon, and the first expected image (see FIG. 21(B)) is displayed as the expected image. The situation is illustrated. That is, FIG. 23C illustrates a state in which the first pair described above based on FIG. 22A is displayed.

In the reliability suggestive pair display effect this time, when the display effect of FIG. 23(C) is being performed, the first pair of the first pair to the ninth pair, that is, the blue hold icon and the power accumulation A first expected image showing that one character wearing a blue aura is displayed. For this reason, the player can easily recognize that the jackpot reliability is relatively low at the moment by looking at the first pair.

By the way, if multiple special icons are displayed while the expected image is displayed, for example, a blue hold icon and a green hold icon are displayed at the same time, which one of the hold icons will be displayed as the special icon corresponding to the expected image. The player may not be able to recognize whether it is an icon, and as a result, it may not be possible to obtain a sufficient effect of the reliability suggestive pair display effect.

Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a game ball is won in the first starting opening 21 during execution of the reliability suggestive pair display effect, a hold icon corresponding to the winning can be displayed as a special icon. Even if there is, a configuration is adopted in which it is displayed as the default hold icon, and the icon change effect for the hold icon is not performed at least until the reliability suggestive pair display effect ends.

By adopting such a configuration, since only one special icon is displayed while the expected image is being displayed, the pending icon corresponding to the expected image is more than that when a plurality of special icons are displayed. Is easy to recognize. However, with the expected image, the hold icon as the special icon, and the hold icon that is not the special icon displayed, the hold icon corresponding to the expected image may be the hold icon that is not the special icon. However, there is a possibility that sufficient effect due to the reliability suggestive pair display effect cannot be obtained.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in order that the player can clearly recognize the correspondence between the hold icon that is the prefetch target and the expected image, a linked image that links the hold icon that is the prefetch target and the expected image is displayed. (See FIG. 23C).

After the variable display of the first special symbol described above based on FIG. 23(C) is started, the final result of the variable display of the first special symbol is the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “miss”. In order to notify that, the three effect symbols showing the "615" discontinuity are pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 23D). Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol ends, the lost symbol as the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41, and on the display screen 70, the three effect symbols are permanently stopped.

In this way, when the predetermined confirmation time (0.5 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the lost symbol was stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the earliest hold displayed in the hold icon display area 71 The first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon (holding icon at the left end) is executed. Then, as the variable display of the first special symbol is started in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination, the earliest hold icon is shifted from the hold icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72. At the same time, scroll display of three symbol rows is started (see FIGS. 23D and 23E). Note that, along with the shift of the earliest hold icon, the remaining hold icons in the hold icon display area 71 are also shifted to the left, and the hold-ahead icon for prefetching is displayed as the second hold icon (FIG. 23(E )reference).

Note that, as is clear from the notations in FIGS. 23D and 23E, the expected image changes from the first expected image with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol that is two before the prefetch target. Absent. On the other hand, the prefetch target hold icon is a blue hold icon (see FIG. 23(D)) before the variable display of the first special symbol, which is two previous prefetch targets, is started. Along with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol two before the target, it has changed to a green hold icon (see FIG. 23(E)).

In FIG. 23D and FIG. 23E, the expected image remains the first expected image, and the hold icon to be read ahead is changed from the blue hold image to the green hold icon, which relates to the reliability suggestive pair display effect. The manner in which the pair changes from the first pair (see FIG. 22A) to the third pair (see FIG. 22C) is illustrated. Further, since the display position of the prefetch target hold icon has changed from the display position of the third hold icon to the display position of the second hold icon, the prefetch target hold icon and the expected image are The manner in which the shape of the connected image connecting the two changes is also illustrated.

After the variable display of the first special symbol described above based on FIG. 23(E) (variable display of the first special symbol of the two preceding read-ahead targets) is started, at the end of the variable display of this first special symbol Then, in order to inform that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “miss”, the three effect symbols showing the stagger of “243” are pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 23(F)). Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol ends, the lost symbol as the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41, and on the display screen 70, the three effect symbols are permanently stopped.

In this way, when the predetermined confirmation time (0.5 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the lost symbol was stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the earliest hold displayed in the hold icon display area 71 The first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon (holding icon at the left end) is executed. Then, as the variable display of the first special symbol is started in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination, the earliest hold icon is shifted from the hold icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72. At the same time, scroll display of three symbol rows is started (see FIGS. 23F and 23G). Note that, with the shift of the earliest hold icon, the remaining hold icons in the hold icon display area 71 are also shifted to the left, and the hold icon to be read ahead is displayed as the first hold icon (FIG. 23(G )reference).

As is clear from the notations of FIGS. 23F and 23G, the expected image is changed from the first expected image to the third expected image with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol that is one before the prefetch target. The image has changed. On the other hand, the prefetch target hold icon remains the green hold icon. Therefore, in FIGS. 23F and 23G, the pairs related to the reliability suggestive pair display effect are the third pair (see FIG. 22C) to the seventh pair (see FIG. 22G). It can be said that the state of changing to is illustrated. Further, since the display position of the prefetch target hold icon has changed from the display position of the second hold icon to the display position of the first (first) hold icon, the prefetch target hold icon It also exemplifies how the shape of the connected image connecting the target image and the expected image changes.

After the variable display of the first special symbol described above based on FIG. 23(G) (variable display of the first special symbol one before the prefetch target) is started, at the end of the variable display of the first special symbol Then, in order to inform that the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “miss”, the three effect symbols showing the stagger of “156” are pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 23(H)). Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol ends, the lost symbol as the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41, and on the display screen 70, the three effect symbols are permanently stopped.

In this way, when the predetermined confirmation time (0.5 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the lost symbol was stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the earliest hold displayed in the hold icon display area 71 The first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon (holding icon for prefetching) is executed. Then, as the variable display of the first special symbol is started in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination, the earliest hold icon (hold icon for prefetching) is displayed from the hold icon display area 71. While shifting to the icon display area 72, scroll display of three symbol rows is started (see FIGS. 23(H) and (I)). Here, as the prefetch target hold icon is shifted from the hold icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72, the green hold icon is changed to the red corresponding icon.

At the start of the variable display of the first special symbol to be read ahead, the expected image is not displayed on the display screen 70 (see FIGS. 23(H) and (I)), and FIGS. 23(H) and (I). Can be said to exemplify a state in which the display of the expected image ends (in other words, the reliability suggestive pair display effect ends) with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol to be read ahead.

Up to this point, from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol three prior to the prefetch target (see FIG. 23C), the start of the variable display of the first special symbol of the prefetch target (see FIG. 23(I)) ), the reliability suggestion pair display effect was explained, but the expected image is erased when the variable display of the first special symbol to be read ahead is started. When the pair display effect ends, there arises a problem that the player cannot recognize the display color of the expected image displayed immediately before the end of the reliability suggestive pair display effect.

Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in order to prevent such a problem from occurring, the expected image displayed immediately before the end of the reliability suggestive pair display effect is accompanied by the end of the reliability suggestion pair display effect. Effect images of the same color as are displayed on the left and right sides of the display screen 70 (see FIG. 23(I)). Note that, in the example shown in FIG. 23, the third expected image showing a state in which the three characters accumulating power wear red auras is displayed until just before the end of the reliability suggestive pair display effect. 23(I), a state in which a red effect image is displayed is illustrated.

It should be noted that this effect image may be displayed until the end of the variable display of the first special symbol to be read ahead, but since it may hinder the reach effect, in the present embodiment, the effect image The display is continued until the reach is established, and the effect image is not displayed after the reach is established.

(Regarding the gaming machine 1 capable of executing the reliability suggestive pair display effect)
Up to this point, the reliability suggestive pair display effect executed by the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has been described with reference to FIGS. 21 to 23, but a game machine capable of executing such a reliability suggestive pair display effect. 1 can be grasped as the following gaming machines.

A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game) (for example, a main CPU 81 that executes a jackpot determination process of step S308 of FIG. 42 described later),
Reserving means capable of reserving the right to judge to a predetermined number (the obtained information obtained when a game ball wins the first starting opening 21 is obtained from the special figure 1/first reserve storage area 831 to special figure 1/four reserve) Stored in one of the storage areas 834 (see FIG. 38(A)), the acquired information acquired when the game ball wins the second starting opening 22 is stored in the special drawing 2/first reserved storage area 835-special drawing 2 A main CPU 81 stored in any of the fourth reserved storage areas 838 (see FIG. 38A),
Before the determination is made for the right reserved by the suspension means, a preliminary determination means for performing a preliminary determination as to whether or not to execute the special game (executes the preliminary determination processing of steps S211 and S219 in FIG. 40). Main CPU 81)
An effect control unit (for example, a sub CPU 91, an image/sound control CPU 101, a lamp CPU 121) that controls execution of an effect is provided,
The effect control means,
A hold suggestion image (for example, a hold icon) that indicates that the right to make the judgment is held is displayed in a display mode based on the result of the preliminary judgment (see, for example, FIG. 21A),
It is possible to execute an expected effect that expects the special game to be executed (for example, an effect that displays an expected image: see FIG. 21B) in an effect mode based on the result of the preliminary determination,
There are a plurality of display modes in which the expectation that the special game is executed are different from each other in the display mode of the hold suggestive image (see FIG. 21(A)), and the expectation level is in the display mode of the expected effect. There are a plurality of effect modes different from each other (see FIG. 21(B)),
When the hold suggestive image is displayed without executing the expected effect, the expectation level is suggested by the display mode of the hold suggestive image (see, for example, FIG. 11A), and the hold suggestive image is displayed. When the expected effect is being executed during display, the expectation level is suggested by both the display mode of the hold suggestion image and the effect mode of the expected effect (for example, FIGS. 23C and 23E). ), (G)).

According to this configuration, when the expected effect (the effect of displaying the expected image) is being executed while the hold suggestive image (for example, the hold icon) is being displayed, the display mode of the hold suggestive image and the effect mode of the expected effect are Both suggest the degree of expectation that the special game will be executed (see, for example, FIGS. 23C, 23E, and 23G). Therefore, a high effect can be obtained by the synergistic effect of displaying the hold suggestion image and executing the expected effect. In addition, while the hold suggestion image in the display mode indicating that the expectation is low is displayed, the expected effect in the effect mode suggesting that the expectation is high can be executed (for example, see FIG. 22D). ), by displaying a hold suggestion image in a display mode that suggests that the degree of expectation is low, it is effective to cause a problem that the player's expectation for the execution of the special game is significantly reduced. It is possible to suppress. In addition, since it is possible to display a hold suggestive image that suggests that the expectation is high during execution of the expected production that suggests that the expectation is low (see, for example, FIG. 22(F)), the expectation By executing the expected production of the production mode that suggests that the degree is low, it is possible to effectively suppress the problem that the player's expectation for the execution of the special game is significantly reduced. It is possible.

(Other configurations related to the display of the reliability suggestive pair)
The following configuration may be adopted for the reliability suggestive pair display effect.
That is, in the present embodiment, the expected image is not displayed while the white hold icon (default hold icon) is displayed, and the expected image is displayed while the hold icon (special icon) other than white is displayed. Although described as an example, in another embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which the expected image can be displayed even while the white hold icon is being displayed. That is, for example, the third suggestion image is displayed above the white hold icon, and the reliability suggestive pair display effect of displaying the connected image connecting the white hold icon and the third expected image is executed. May be.

In addition, in the present embodiment, after the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the hold icon of the prefetch target is started, the hold icon of the prefetch target is continuously displayed as the icon while the expected image is not displayed. The case will be described as an example. On the other hand, in another embodiment, instead of displaying the aura image instead of the expected image, even after the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the hold icon to be read ahead is started, The display may be continued.

Further, in the present embodiment, the suggestion period from the start to the end of the reliability suggestive pair display effect (for example, the display in FIG. 23C is started after the display in FIG. 23C is started. The period in which the expected image is constantly displayed during the period) will be described as an example. On the other hand, in another embodiment, for example, during the above-mentioned suggestion period, the suggestion image is provided only until a predetermined time (shorter than the change time) elapses after the variation display of the first special symbol is started. It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which is not displayed. Specifically, this configuration does not display the expected image in the latter half of the variable display of the first special symbol in which the loss notification effect is performed as shown in FIGS. 23D, 23F, and 23H, for example. Then, the expected image is displayed intermittently.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the expected images are the three types of the first expected image to the third expected image will be described as an example, but the types of expected images are not limited to three types, and two types or There may be four or more types.

In the present embodiment, the expected image changes in the order of the first expected image, the second expected image, and the third expected image, so that the display content of the expected image (in the present embodiment, the number of characters indicated by the expected image, etc. ) And the display color (in the present embodiment, the color of the aura worn by the character) changes as an example. However, in other embodiments, the expected image changes and the display content of the expected image changes. A configuration in which one of the display colors changes may be adopted.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the expected image is an effect image showing a state in which one or more characters who are accumulating power wear an aura of a predetermined color will be described as an example, but the expected image is displayed. Other contents and display colors may be used as long as the player can recognize the degree of expectation that the jackpot game will be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case where the effect symbol is displayed as a small symbol (see FIGS. 23C to 23H) while the expected image is displayed will be described as an example, but in another embodiment, for example, the expectation The display area of the image is changed to the lower right area on the display screen 70 (the area on the right side of the hold icon display area 71), and even during the reliability suggestive pair display effect, the effect symbol is the effect symbol display area 73 (see FIG. 2). It may be displayed in a large size.

In addition, in the present embodiment, an example has been described in which the expected effect that expects the jackpot game to be executed is an effect that displays an expected image. However, the degree of expectation that the jackpot game is executed is suggested by the effect mode. As long as possible, the expected effect is not limited to the effect of displaying the expected image, for example, an effect of causing the frame lamp 37 to emit light in an emission color that indicates the degree of expectation that the jackpot game is executed, a jackpot game. It is also possible to execute, as an expected effect, an effect that outputs an effect sound suggesting the degree of expectation that is executed from the speaker 38. Also, these effects may be performed together with the effect of displaying the expected image.

[About multiple expected performances]
Next, a plurality of expected effects executed by the gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 27. 24 and 25 are screen diagrams showing specific examples of the first expected effect and the second expected effect. FIG. 26 is a time chart for explaining the first expected effect, the second expected effect, and the third expected effect. FIG. 27 is a time chart for explaining modified examples of the first expected effect and the second expected effect.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game is controlled in the normal gaming state, that the jackpot game is executed based on the result of the preliminary determination related to the first special symbol determination of the prefetch target The first expected effect, the second expected effect, and the third expected effect can be executed as the expected effects. Note that these three expected effects are effects different from the effects for displaying the expected image described above with reference to FIGS. 21 to 23.

In FIG. 24(A), a game ball is won in the first starting opening 21 during the variable display of the first special symbol (and effect symbol) corresponding to the icon displayed in the icon display area 72, It is illustrated that a fourth hold icon (white hold icon) corresponding to the fourth hold related to the first special symbol determination is newly displayed in the hold icon display area 71. Here, in the order of the third expected effect, the first expected effect, and the second expected effect, based on the preliminary determination result regarding the right of the first special symbol determination (prefetch target) corresponding to the fourth hold icon. The case where three expected effects are started will be described as an example.

In addition, the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the hold icon (here, the three hold icons displayed to the left of the hold icon of the prefetch target) that is displayed before the hold icon of the prefetch target is displayed. If the reach effect is executed in the middle, the expected effect may hinder the reach effect. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern relating to the variation display of the first special symbol corresponding to the hold icon displayed before the hold icon to be prefetched is displayed is a variation pattern for reach-free loss. The expected effect is executed in the case of, and the expected effect is not executed when the variation pattern for the big hit or the variation pattern for the reach loss is included.

As described above, the right of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the fourth hold icon is set as the prefetch target, and it is determined that the first expected effect, the second expected effect, and the third expected effect are executed with respect to the prefetch object. In such a case, first, the third expected effect (see FIG. 26) is started almost at the same time as the timing at which there is a new winning to be read ahead. The third expected effect is a board lamp light emitting effect that causes the board lamp 5 to emit a light emission pattern dedicated to the third expected effect, and a corresponding effect sound corresponding to the board surface lamp light emitting effect (for example, a predetermined expectation that a player expects a big hit). Effect sound output effect from the speaker 38.

The corresponding effect sound output by the corresponding effect sound output effect is output in the output period in which the timing when there is a new winning corresponding to the fourth hold icon is the start period and the timing when two seconds have elapsed from this timing is the end period. To be done. On the other hand, the board lamp emission effect has the same start timing as the corresponding effect sound output effect, but the end timing is different. That is, the corresponding effect sound output effect ends after 2 seconds have elapsed from the start, whereas the board surface lamp light emission effect starts in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination that is the prefetch target. It continues until the start of variable display of one special symbol (see FIG. 26).

By the way, in the example shown in FIG. 24(A), the hold icon (the fourth hold icon: the read-ahead target hold icon) corresponding to the right of the first special symbol determination that is the read-ahead target is the default hold icon. It is displayed as a white hold icon. Therefore, for example, when an effect that makes the player expect a jackpot is started with the start of the symbol change next to the symbol change that is performed when the fourth hold icon is displayed, this effect is The player may not be able to easily recognize which hold icon corresponds to the effect, and as a result, there is a possibility that the hold icon that can be expected to be a big hit cannot be specified.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, the board lamp 5 that normally emits light in the light emission pattern corresponding to the current effect mode (or the variable effect performed on the display screen 70), At the timing when there is a new winning as a prefetch target, the light emission in the light emission pattern dedicated to the third expected effect is started. That is, the light emission pattern of the panel lamp 5 changes at the timing when there is a new winning as a prefetch target. In addition, the corresponding effect sound is output from the speaker 38 at the timing when there is a new winning as a prefetch target.

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, at the timing when there is a new winning as a pre-reading target, the board lamp light emission mode changes and the corresponding effect sound is output from the speaker 38, and functions as the third expected effect. These effects occur almost at the same time that the fourth hold icon, which is the prefetch target, is displayed. Therefore, the player can easily specify that the hold icon that can be expected to win the jackpot is the fourth hold icon.

In FIG. 24(B), in the final stage of the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the icon (see FIG. 24(A)) displayed in the icon display area 72, the determination result of the first special symbol determination In order to notify that "is a loss", the state in which the three effect symbols showing the disparity of "854" are pseudo-stopped is illustrated. On the other hand, when the variable display of the first special symbol ends, the lost symbol as the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 41, and the display screen 70 shows a disparity of "854". The three effect symbols are stopped as they are.

In this way, when the predetermined confirmation time (0.5 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the lost symbol was stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the earliest hold displayed in the hold icon display area 71 The first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon (holding icon at the left end) is executed. Then, as the variable display of the first special symbol is started in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination, the earliest hold icon is shifted from the hold icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72. At the same time, scroll display of the three symbol rows is started (see FIGS. 24B and 24C). It should be noted that with the start of scroll display of these three symbol rows, a first expected effect described later is started, and an effect image related to this first expected effect is displayed in the central area of the display screen 70, so that three The symbol row is displayed small in the lower right area of the display screen 70 until the variable display of the first special symbol that is performed in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination of the prefetch target is started (Fig. 24(C) to (I) and FIGS. 25(A) to (C)).

In this way, with the start of the symbol change next to the symbol change that was performed when there was a new winning to be read ahead, the hold icon for read-ahead that was displayed as the fourth hold icon The third expected icon is displayed, and the first expected effect is started (see FIG. 24(C) and FIG. 26). In the present embodiment, the effect of the chance mode described above functions as the first expected effect, the effect image for the chance mode representing the state of a thunderstorm is displayed on the display screen 70, and the effect sound corresponding to the effect image is generated. It is output from the speaker 38. In addition, at the start of the first expected effect (here, the effect in the chance mode), the word “opportunity mode entry” is displayed in the center of the display screen 70 in order to make it easier to understand that the opportunity mode has been entered ( See FIG. 24(C). In the present embodiment, the first expected effect is continued until the start of variable display of the first special symbol that is performed in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination of the prefetch target (FIG. 25(B)). ~ (C), see Fig. 26).

In the example shown in FIG. 24C, although the first expected effect is started, the prefetch target hold icon is not changed to the special icon. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the prefetch target hold icon is irrespective of whether or not the prefetch target hold icon has changed from the default hold icon (white hold icon) to the special icon (non-white hold icon). The pedestal is extended upward, and the pre-reading target holding icon is moved upward so as to easily notify which holding icon the first expected effect has started.

As illustrated in FIG. 24C, when the first expected effect is executed with a plurality of held icons displayed, the held icon corresponding to the first expected effect is distinguished from other held icons. Possible identification display (here, an effect display in which the hold icon to be read ahead is moved upward and its pedestal is extended upward) is displayed. In addition, since this identification display is continuously performed even after the second expected effect described later is started (see FIG. 24D), the hold icons corresponding to the first expected effect and the second expected effect are not displayed. It is possible to easily distinguish it from the hold icon.

When it comes to the middle stage of the variable display of the first special symbol started as described above based on FIG. 24(C), the second expected effect is started (see FIG. 24(D) and FIG. 26). This second expected effect is an effect in which one or a plurality of characters appear, and is an effect in which the jackpot reliability is suggested depending on the number of appearances. FIG. 24D exemplifies an effect display showing a state in which one character accumulates power while being hit by a thunderstorm by the first expected effect. Since the number of characters displayed by the second expected effect is one at this time, the player determines the jackpot reliability at the present time based on the fact that only one character is displayed. It is easy to recognize that it is low.

In FIG. 24(E), in the final stage of the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the icon (see FIG. 24(D)) displayed in the icon display area 72, the determination result of the first special symbol determination In order to notify that "is a loss", the state where the three effect symbols showing the weak chance of "246" are pseudo stopped is illustrated. On the other hand, when the variable display of the first special symbol ends, the lost symbol as the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41, and the display screen 70 shows the weak chance of "246". The above three effect symbols are stopped as they are.

In addition, here, the case where the three effect symbols indicating the weak chance are stopped after being pseudo-stopped has been described as an example, but the case where the three effect symbols indicating the stray are stopped after being pseudo-stopped is also set. Yes, the former case is characterized by higher jackpot reliability than the latter case.

In this way, when the predetermined confirmation time (0.5 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the lost symbol was stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the earliest hold displayed in the hold icon display area 71 The first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon (holding icon at the left end) is executed. Then, as the variable display of the first special symbol is started in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination, the earliest hold icon is shifted from the hold icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72. At the same time, scroll display of the three symbol rows is started (see FIGS. 24E and 24F). In addition, the prefetch target hold icon that was displayed as the third hold icon is displayed as the second hold icon, and instead of the pedestal corresponding to the third hold icon, the second hold icon is displayed. The pedestal corresponding to the icon extends upward.

In addition, with the start of the scroll display of these three symbol rows, the presentation mode of the first expected presentation changes (see FIGS. 24(E) to (F) and FIG. 26). Specifically, the number of clouds that generate a thunderstorm is increased by one to two, and the effect display is switched to the effect display showing a more intense thunderstorm. The number of clouds displayed during the first expected performance corresponds to the jackpot reliability, and the larger the number of clouds, in other words, the more intense the thunderstorm, the greater the reliability of the jackpot of the first expected performance. Is getting higher.

When it comes to the middle stage of the variable display of the first special symbol started as described above based on FIG. 24(F), the production mode of the second expected production changes this time (FIGS. 24(F) to (G), See FIG. 26). Specifically, one character newly appears from the state in which the effect display showing how one character is building power is being displayed, and two characters are working together to build power. The state changes to a state in which an effect display is displayed.

It should be noted that, since the first expected effect is being performed even after the effect mode of the second expected effect has been changed in this way, as a result, the two characters cooperate while being hit by a thunderstorm pouring from the two clouds. The effect display that shows how the power is accumulated is displayed (see FIG. 24(G)). Here, since the number of characters related to the second expected effect is increased by one, the player can easily recognize that the jackpot reliability of the second expected effect has been improved.

In FIG. 24(H), in the final stage of the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the icon (see FIG. 24(G)) displayed in the icon display area 72, the determination result of the first special symbol determination In order to notify that "is a loss", the state where three effect symbols showing the strong chance of "531" are pseudo-stopped is illustrated. On the other hand, when the variable display of the first special symbol ends, the lost symbol as the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41, and the display screen 70 shows the strong chance of "531". The above three effect symbols are stopped as they are.

At the time of ending the variable display of the first special symbol of the previous time, the three effect symbols showing the weak chance are stopped after being pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 24(E)), but here, the strong chance is displayed. The three effect symbols shown are pseudo-stopped and then main-stopped, and when the two are compared, the case where the three effect symbols showing the strong chance eyes are pseudo-stopped and then the main-stop is weaker It can be said that the jackpot reliability is higher than in the case where the main effect is made after the three effect symbols shown are pseudo stopped.

In this way, when the predetermined confirmation time (0.5 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the lost symbol was stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the earliest hold displayed in the hold icon display area 71 The first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon (holding icon at the left end: see FIG. 24(H)) is executed. Then, as the variable display of the first special symbol is started in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination, the earliest hold icon is shifted from the hold icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72. At the same time, scroll display of three symbol rows is started (see FIGS. 24(H) and (I)). In addition, the read-ahead target hold icon that was displayed as the second hold icon is displayed as the first hold icon, and instead of the pedestal corresponding to the second hold icon, the first hold icon is displayed. The pedestal corresponding to the icon extends upward.

When it comes to the middle stage of the variable display of the first special symbol started as described above based on FIG. 24(I), the effect mode of the second expected effect changes (see FIG. 24(I) and FIG. 25(A)). ). Specifically, one character newly appears from the state where the effect display showing how two characters are accumulating is being performed, and three characters are accumulating in cooperation. The state changes to a state in which an effect display is displayed.

Since the first expected effect is being performed even after the effect mode of the second expected effect has been changed in this way, as a result, the three characters collaborate while being hit by a thunderstorm pouring from the two clouds. The effect display that shows how the power is accumulated is displayed (see FIG. 25A). Here, since the number of characters related to the second expected effect is increased by one to three, the player can easily recognize that the jackpot reliability of the second expected effect is further improved.

Further, as the presentation mode of the second expected presentation changes, the prefetch target hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 71 as the earliest hold icon changes from the white hold icon to green (FIG. 24(I) and FIG. 25(A)). In this way, the display mode of the prefetch target hold icon may change during execution of the expected effect (here, the three expected effects of the first expected effect to the third expected effect) (due to the icon change effect). By the synergistic effect of the expected effect and the icon change effect, it is possible to effectively improve the player's expectation for the jackpot.

In FIG. 25(B), in the final stage of the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the icon (see FIG. 25(A)) displayed in the icon display area 72, the determination result of the first special symbol determination In order to notify that "is a loss", the state where three effect symbols showing the strong chance of "337" are pseudo-stopped is illustrated. On the other hand, when the variable display of the first special symbol ends, the lost symbol as the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol indicator 41, and the display screen 70 shows the strong chance of "337". The above three effect symbols are stopped as they are.

At the time of ending the variable display of the first special symbol of the previous time, the three production symbols showing the strong chance eyes not including the 7 symbols of "531" are stopped after being pseudo-stopped (see FIG. 24(H)). ) Here, the three effect symbols including the seven symbols of "337" indicating the strong chance eye are stopped after the pseudo stop, and the jackpot reliability is further increased.

As described above, when the predetermined confirmation time (0.5 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the lost symbol was stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the earliest displayed in the hold icon display area 71. The first special symbol determination corresponding to the hold icon (hold icon for prefetching: see FIG. 25(B)) is executed. Then, as the variable display of the first special symbol is started in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination, the earliest hold icon is shifted from the hold icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72. At the same time, scroll display of the three symbol rows is started (see FIGS. 25B and 25C).

Here, with the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, the display area of the effect symbol is returned from the lower right area of the display screen 70 to the effect symbol display area 73, and the first expected effect and the second expected effect. , And the third expected effect are finished at the same time (see FIGS. 25B to 25C and FIG. 26 ). Further, as the read-ahead hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 71 as the earliest hold icon is shifted to the icon display area 72 and displayed as the icon, the green hold icon changes to red. The icon changes to.

In this way, when the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the hold icon to be read ahead is started, for example, the following effects are performed. That is, when the predetermined time elapses after the variable display of the first special symbol and the three symbol strings is started, the notice effect may be executed (see FIG. 25(D)). An example of this notice effect is the step-up notice described above with reference to FIG.

Next, following the notice effect, after the effect symbols which are different from each other as the left symbol and the right symbol are pseudo-stopped, there is a case where a pseudo continuous effect of pseudo-stopping the 7 symbols in the middle row is performed (FIG. 25(E)) reference). This pseudo continuous effect is as described above with reference to FIG.

When the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol are pseudo-stopped by the pseudo continuous production, the variation production of the pseudo second sequence following the variation production of the first pseudo sequence is started (see FIGS. 25E and 25F). ). Specifically, after the character “×2” that suggests the start of the pseudo second variation effect is displayed in a large size in the central area of the display screen 70, the character “×2” is displayed on the upper left of the display screen 70. It is displayed in a smaller size in one area, and along with this, scroll display of three symbol rows is restarted in the effect symbol display area 73.

Subsequently, while the pseudo second consecutive change effect is being performed, a notice effect indicating the jackpot reliability may be executed (see FIG. 25G). An example of the notice effect is the dialogue notice described above with reference to FIG. 11(F).

In this way, after the notice effect is executed during the pseudo second consecutive change effect, the second pseudo consecutive effect is executed (see FIG. 25(H)), and the scroll display of the three symbol rows is restarted. Then, the variation effect of the third pseudo sequence is started (see FIG. 25(I)). It should be noted that although the effect after the variation effect of the pseudo third consecutive game is started is omitted here, since the red icon is displayed in the icon display area 72, the reach effect of at least SP reach or more is reached. (SP reach or SPSP reach) will be developed and the winner will be notified. Specifically, it is developed into SP reach and a hit notification effect (or a lost notification effect) is executed at the end of SP reach, or SPSP is passed through SP reach (or not through SP reach). After reaching the reach, the hit notification effect (or lost notification effect) will be executed at the end of the SPSP reach.

The case where the third expected effect is started at the timing when there is a new winning of the prefetch target has been described as an example with reference to FIGS. 24 to 26, but the third expected effect may not be executed in some cases. Moreover, although the case where both the first expected effect and the second expected effect are executed has been described as an example, there is a case where only one of the first expected effect and the second expected effect is executed.

(About the gaming machine 1 capable of executing a plurality of expected effects)
Up to this point, a plurality of expected effects executed by the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment have been described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 26. However, the gaming machines 1 capable of executing such a plurality of expected effects are Can be regarded as a gaming machine like.

A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game) (for example, a main CPU 81 that executes a jackpot determination process of step S308 of FIG. 42 described later),
Reserving means capable of reserving the right to judge to a predetermined number (the obtained information obtained when a game ball wins the first starting opening 21 is obtained from the special figure 1/first reserve storage area 831 to special figure 1/four reserve) Stored in one of the storage areas 834 (see FIG. 38(A)), the acquired information acquired when the game ball wins the second starting opening 22 is stored in the special drawing 2/first reserved storage area 835-special drawing 2 A main CPU 81 stored in any of the fourth reserved storage areas 838 (see FIG. 38A),
Before the determination is made for the right reserved by the suspension means, a preliminary determination means for performing a preliminary determination as to whether or not to execute the special game (executes the preliminary determination processing of steps S211 and S219 in FIG. 40). Main CPU 81)
An effect control unit (for example, a sub CPU 91, an image/sound control CPU 101, a lamp CPU 121) that controls execution of an effect is provided,
The effect control means,
When the right to make a judgment is on hold, a hold suggestive image (for example, a hold icon) indicating that is displayed,
Based on the result of the preliminary determination, a first expected effect (for example, refer to FIG. 24C) and a second expected effect (for example, refer to FIG. 24D) as effects that expect the special game to be executed. ) Including multiple expected performances,
When the first expected effect and the second expected effect are executed in a state in which a plurality of the hold suggestive images are displayed, the hold suggestive images (for example, the prefetch target hold icons) corresponding to these expected produce are changed to other ones. An identification display that can be distinguished from the hold suggestive image (for example, a hold icon corresponding to the expected effect is displayed at a position higher than other hold icons, and a pedestal located below this hold icon is extended and displayed. Performance: Refer to FIG. 24(D)).

According to this configuration, when the first expected effect and the second expected effect are executed, the pending suggestion images corresponding to these expected effects can be distinguished from other pending suggestive images by an identification display (for example, FIG. (See D)) is executed, the expectation of the player for the execution of the special game can be effectively improved by the synergistic effect of the first and second expected effects and the identification display. It is possible, and the player can easily specify the pending suggestion image corresponding to the first expected effect and the second expected effect, based on the identification display.

(Other configurations related to first expected production and second expected production)
So far, the first expected effect, the second expected effect, and the third expected effect executed by the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment have been described with reference to FIGS. 24 to 26, but in other embodiments, The following configurations may be adopted for the first expected effect and the second expected effect.

That is, in the present embodiment, the first expected effect is started at the start of the next variable display of the variable display of the first special symbol that is performed when there is a new winning of the prefetch target, and the next variable display of the next variable display is started. The case where the second expected effect is started halfway (after a predetermined time from the first expected effect) has been described (see FIG. 26 ). On the other hand, in another embodiment, as illustrated in FIGS. 27A and 27B, the first expected effect and the second expected effect may be started at the same time. In addition, in FIG. 27(A), at the start of the next variable display of the variable display of the first special symbol that is performed when there is a new winning of the prefetch target, the first expected effect and the second expected effect are displayed. The case where they are started simultaneously is illustrated. In addition, in FIG. 27(B), the first expected effect and the second expected effect are displayed in the middle of the next variable display of the variable display of the first special symbol that is performed when there is a new winning of the prefetch target. The case where they are started simultaneously is illustrated.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the case has been described where the first expected effect and the second expected effect are effects that are continuously executed for a predetermined period (see FIG. 26 ). On the other hand, in another embodiment, at least one of the first expected effect and the second expected effect may be intermittently executed. 27A to 27C exemplify a case where both the first expected effect and the second expected effect are intermittently executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case will be described in which the midway point of the next variable display of the variable display of the first special symbol that is performed when there is a new winning of the prefetch target is the start timing of the second expected effect. (See FIG. 26). On the other hand, in another embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 27A, the variable display next to the variable display of the first special symbol, which is performed when there is a new winning of the prefetch target, is displayed. The start timing may be the start timing of the first expected effect and the second expected effect. In this case, as illustrated in FIG. 27A, each time the variable display of the first special symbol is started, the first expected effect and the second expected effect that continue for a time shorter than the change time are started. The configuration is one example.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case will be described in which the start time of the variable display next to the variable display of the first special symbol, which is performed when there is a new winning of the prefetch target, is the start timing of the first expected effect. (See FIG. 26). On the other hand, in another embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 27B, the change display next to the change display of the first special symbol that is performed when there is a new winning of the prefetch target is displayed. The midpoint may be the start timing of the first expected effect and the second expected effect. In this case, as illustrated in FIG. 27(B), the end timing at which the variable display of the first special symbol ends at each timing when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variable display of the first special symbol An example is a configuration in which the first expected effect and the second expected effect that continue until are started.

When both the first expected effect and the second expected effect are intermittently executed, as shown in FIG. 27(C), the variation time is changed every time the variation display of the first special symbol is started. End timing at which the variable display of the first special symbol ends every time when a predetermined time has elapsed since the first expected effect that lasts for a shorter predetermined time is started and the variable display of the first special symbol starts As an example, it is possible to start the second expected effect that continues until.

Also, the case where the expected effect is executed over three changes has been described above as an example, but the expected effect is executed over two changes or the first special corresponding to the hold icon of the prefetch target. In some cases, it is executed only in the variable display that is one before the variable display of the symbol.

In addition, the end timing of the first expected effect and the second expected effect is not limited to the start timing of the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the hold icon to be read ahead, and may be the following timing. For example, as illustrated in FIG. 27A, it may be an intermediate point of the variable display that is one before the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the hold icon to be read ahead. Further, it may be an intermediate point (for example, reach establishment timing) of the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the hold icon of the prefetch target.

26, FIG. 27(A), and FIG. 27(B) exemplify a case where the first expected effect and the second expected effect end at the same time, but the first expected effect and the second expected effect are You may make it complete|finish at different timing.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the case where the effect in the chance mode is executed as the first expected effect and the effect display showing how the character accumulates power is executed as the second expected effect has been described as an example. The effect content of the second expected effect may be any effect content as long as it is an effect that allows the player to expect the jackpot game to be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described in which the effect mode of the first expected effect changes in the middle of the first expected effect and the effect mode of the second expected effect changes in the middle of the second expected effect. On the other hand, in another embodiment, one or both of the first expected effect and the second expected effect may be effects in which the effect mode is unchanged.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a case will be described in which the display screen 70 and the speaker 38 are used to execute the first expected effect and the second expected effect, but in other embodiments, it is assumed that this is exemplified in the present embodiment. You may make it perform a 1st expected production and a 2nd expected production using different production|generation means. For example, the frame lamp 37 may be used to execute the first expected effect and the board lamp 5 may be used to execute the second expected effect. Alternatively, for example, the display screen 70, the board lamp 5, and the speaker 38 may be used to execute the first expected effect, and the frame lamp 37 and the speaker 38 may be used to execute the second expected effect.

(Other configurations related to identification display)
In the present embodiment, the prefetch target hold icon is displayed at a position higher than other hold icons, and the pedestal located below the preread target hold icon is extended upward to hold the preread target hold icon. Made the icon easily distinguishable from other hold icons. On the other hand, in another embodiment, during the expected effect, an effect display indicating that the pedestal located immediately below the prefetch target holding icon vibrates may be displayed as the identification display. Further, for example, during the expected performance, an identification mark is displayed immediately above the hold-ahead icon of the prefetch target, and when the hold icon of the prefetch target is shifted, the identification mark is displayed so as to be linked with the hold icon of the prefetch target. A display effect of shifting in the direction may be performed as the identification display. Further, for example, during the expected effect, an irradiation effect of irradiating a beam beam to the hold icon of the prefetch target is performed, and an irradiation destination of the beam beam is changed so as to follow the hold icon of the prefetch target to be shifted. It may be performed as an identification display.

Further, after the hold icon is shifted to the icon display area 72 and displayed as the icon, the following configuration may be adopted. When the prefetch target hold icon is shifted to the icon display area 72 and displayed as the icon, for example, the pedestal of the icon can be deformed to easily distinguish the preread target icon from other hold icons. You may do it.

[Regarding light emitting effects using each light emitting group]
Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29, the light emission effect executed by the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. Here, FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram for explaining the arrangement of the first starting port 21 and each light emitting group. FIG. 29 is a time chart for explaining the light emission effect.

(Arrangement of each light emitting group)
As illustrated in FIG. 28, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured to have a first substrate 510 and a second substrate 520 on which a plurality of color LEDs functioning as the board lamp 5 are mounted. The second substrate 520 is provided on the rear surface side of the game board 2 and on the left side of the display screen 70 when viewed from the front. The one first substrate 510 is provided on the back surface side of the game board 2 so as to extend leftward from immediately below the first starting port 21 and then extend toward the lower end of the second substrate 520. . In the present embodiment, the first board 510 and the second board 520 are connected to the lamp control board 120 via a relay board (not shown), and based on a control signal output from the lamp control board 120, The emission control of the color LEDs mounted on the first substrate 510 and the color LEDs mounted on the second substrate 520 is performed. At least the front surface side of the first substrate 510 and the front surface side of the second substrate 520 of the game board 2 are made of a translucent acrylic plate, and the player emits light from the color LEDs mounted on the first substrate 510. Then, it is possible to visually recognize the light emission of the color LED mounted on the second substrate 520 through the game board 2.

The color LEDs mounted on the first substrate 510 perform different light emission control between the color LEDs located directly below the first starting port 21 and the other color LEDs. Therefore, in the following description, , A plurality of color LEDs arranged in a position close to the first starting port 21 on the first substrate 510 are referred to as a second light emitting group 512 (see FIG. 28), and the remaining color LEDs (second A color LED arranged at a position farther from the first starting port 21 than the light emitting group 512 is referred to as a first light emitting group 511 (see FIG. 28) to distinguish the two. On the other hand, since a common light emission control is performed for a large number of color LEDs mounted on the second substrate 520, in the following description, the large number of color LEDs mounted on the second substrate 520 will be referred to as a third color LED. It is called a light emitting group 523 (see FIG. 28).

[Light emission effect of each light emission group]
Next, with reference to FIG. 29, the light emission effect of each light emission group when the hold icon or the display color of the icon is changed by the icon change effect will be described. The "fluctuation" and "stop" in the symbol of FIG. 29 mean the variable display and the stop display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state, respectively. Further, in the icons of FIG. 29, “white hold” means a white hold icon, “blue hold” means a blue hold icon, “blue applicable” means a blue applicable icon, and “green applicable”. Means a green relevant icon, and “red relevant” means a red relevant icon.

(First light emission effect of each light emission group)
FIG. 29A is a time chart for explaining the first light emission effect of each light emission group. In the first light emission effect, a white hold icon (white hold) is displayed according to the new prize at the timing when there is a new winning of the prefetch target, and the white hold icon is a blue holding icon (blue hold). , And when the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the first special symbol judgment of the prefetch target (variation of the prefetch target) is started, this hold icon is accompanied by the blue hold icon being shifted to the icon display area 72. Is displayed as the green relevant icon, and further, the green relevant icon is changed to the red relevant icon during the change of the prefetch target, which is a light emission effect.

In the example shown in FIG. 29(A), regarding the variation display of the first special symbol performed three times before the prefetch target variation, the variation pattern for reach-less loss (see FIG. 10(C)) Is selected, and the reach-less effect is executed along with the variable display of the first special symbol. Therefore, based on the determination result of the first special symbol determination executed at the start of variable display of each first special symbol, the first light emitting group 511 and the third light emitting group 523 are in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the current effect mode. It emits light. Specifically, for example, when the effect is controlled in the first normal mode, the first light emitting group 511 and the third light emitting group 523 emit light in the light emitting pattern dedicated to the first normal mode. Further, when the effect is controlled in the second normal mode, the first light emitting group 511 and the third light emitting group 523 emit light in the light emitting pattern dedicated to the second normal mode. Further, when the effect is controlled in the third normal mode, the first light emitting group 511 and the third light emitting group 523 emit light in the light emitting pattern dedicated to the third normal mode.

On the other hand, regarding the variable display of the first special symbol that is the prefetch target variation, as is apparent from the fact that the green relevant icon or the red relevant icon is displayed, the variation pattern for the jackpot (FIG. 10( A)) or a variation pattern for reach loss (see FIG. 10(B)) is selected, the reach effect is executed along with the variation display of the first special symbol, and various notice effects that expect a big hit. (Step-up notice and dialogue notice) will be executed. Therefore, when the prefetch target variation is started, the first light emitting group 511 and the third light emitting group 523 perform the reach effect based on the determination result of the first special symbol determination performed at the start of the prefetch target variation. The light emission is started in the light emission pattern corresponding to the fluctuating/notifying effect that is displayed.

Although not shown in FIG. 29, when the normal mode in any of the first to third normal modes is changed to the chance mode, the first emission group 511 and the first emission group 511 and the first emission group 511 are emitted in the emission pattern dedicated to the opportunity mode. The three light emitting groups 523 emit light. When the normal mode or the chance mode is changed to the intense heat mode, the first light emitting group 511 and the third light emitting group 523 emit light in the light emitting pattern dedicated to the intense heat mode. Before the change of the prefetching target is started, the effect mode may shift to the chance mode or the intense hot mode, and in such a case, based on the preliminary determination result related to the hold of the first special symbol determination of the prefetching target. Thus, the light emission of the first light emitting group 511 and the third light emitting group 523 is controlled. On the other hand, when the effect mode is changed to the chance mode or the intense hot mode after the prefetch target variation is started, based on the determination result of the first special symbol determination performed at the start of the prefetch target variation, the first light emitting group The light emission of 511 and the third light emission group 523 is controlled.

On the other hand, with respect to the second light emitting group 512, the following light emitting effect is performed. That is, when no special icon is displayed in either the hold icon display area 71 or the icon display area 72, that is, even if the hold icon or the icon is displayed, these are all white white icons. At some time, the second light emitting group 512 emits light in a white blinking pattern so that it blinks slowly (brightens or darkens) in white.

On the other hand, as illustrated in FIG. 29(A), when the next variable display of the variable display of the first special symbol, which was performed when the pre-reading target new winning was made, is started, As the white hold icon changes to the blue hold icon, the second light emitting group 512 starts light emission in the blue blinking pattern in which the second light emitting group 512 blinks in blue. That is, as the white hold icon changes to the blue hold icon, the light emission pattern of the second light emitting group 512 changes from the white blinking pattern to the blue blinking pattern.

Further, as illustrated in FIG. 29A, when the prefetch target variation is started, the second light emitting group 512 blinks in green as the blue hold icon changes to the green corresponding icon. Light emission with a green blinking pattern is started. That is, as the blue hold icon changes to the green corresponding icon, the light emission pattern of the second light emitting group 512 changes from the blue blinking pattern to the green blinking pattern. After that, at a predetermined timing (for example, a timing at which reach is established) during execution of the prefetch target variation, the second light emission group 512 blinks in red as the green icon changes to a red icon Light emission in the pattern is started. That is, as the green icon changes to the red icon, the light emission pattern of the second light emitting group 512 changes from the green blinking pattern to the red blinking pattern.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in order to blink the second light emitting group 512 in the same color as the hold icon (or the icon), based on the preliminary determination result regarding the hold of the first special symbol determination that is the prefetch target. Thus, the light emission of the second light emitting group 512 is controlled.

Further, when the loss notification effect is executed in the prefetch target variation, the light emission pattern of the second light emitting group 512 is returned from the red blinking pattern to the white blinking pattern with the end of the prefetch target variation.

(Second light emission effect of each light emission group)
FIG. 29B is a time chart for explaining the second light emission effect of each light emission group. This second light emission control displays a hold icon other than white (here, a blue hold icon) at the timing when there is a new winning of the prefetch target, and a blue hold icon is displayed when the change of the prefetch target is started. Is a light-emission effect performed when this hold icon is displayed as the green relevant icon as the icon is shifted to the icon display area 72.

In the example shown in FIG. 29(B), regarding the variation display of the first special symbol performed twice before the variation of the prefetch target, the variation pattern for the reachless loss (see FIG. 10C). Is selected and the reach-less effect is executed with the variable display of the first special symbol, so that the first light emitting group 511 and the third light emitting group 523 emit light in the light emitting pattern corresponding to the current effect mode. This is the same as that described above with reference to FIG. Further, in the prefetch target variation, as is clear from the fact that the green icon is displayed, the reach effect is executed, and since various notice effects that expect a big hit are executed, the prefetch target variable is changed. , The first light emitting group 511 and the third light emitting group 523 start light emission in the above-described light emission pattern corresponding to the fluctuation/notice.

On the other hand, with respect to the second light emitting group 512, the following light emitting effect is performed. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 29B, the special icon is not displayed before there is a new winning to be read ahead, so the second light emitting group 512 emits light in a white blinking pattern. There is. On the other hand, as the blue hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 71 according to the new winning to be read ahead, the second light emitting group 512 starts emitting light in the blue blinking pattern. For this reason, the blue hold icon is displayed at the timing when there is a new winning of the prefetch target, and almost simultaneously with this, the light emission pattern of the second light emitting group 512 changes from the white blinking pattern to the blue blinking pattern.

Further, as illustrated in FIG. 29B, when the prefetch target variation is started, the second light emitting group 512 blinks in green as the blue hold icon changes to the green corresponding icon. To start emitting light. That is, as described above with reference to FIG. 29A, the light emission pattern of the second light emitting group 512 changes from the blue blinking pattern to the green blinking as the blue hold icon changes to the green corresponding icon. Change into a pattern.

(3rd light emission effect of each light emission group)
FIG. 29C is a time chart for explaining the third light emission effect of each light emission group. In the third light emission control, a white hold icon is displayed according to the new winning when the pre-reading target new prize is received, and when the pre-reading target variation is started, the white hold icon is displayed. This is a light-emission effect that is performed when the hold icon is displayed as the red relevant icon as it shifts to the area 72.

In the example shown in FIG. 29(C), in the same manner as described above with reference to FIG. 29(B), in the variation display of the first special symbol performed twice before the variation of the prefetch target, the current effect The first light emitting group 511 and the third light emitting group 523 emit light in a light emitting pattern corresponding to the mode, and in the prefetch target variation, the first light emitting group 511 and the third light emitting group 523 emit light in the above-described variation/notification corresponding light emitting pattern. To do.

On the other hand, with respect to the second light emitting group 512, the following light emitting effect is performed. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 29C, the special icon is not displayed before there is a new winning to be read ahead, so the second light emitting group 512 emits light in a white blinking pattern. .. Further, although the hold icon is displayed according to the new winning of the prefetch target, this hold icon is a white hold icon, and its display color does not change until the change of the prefetch target is started. Therefore, even after a new winning of the pre-reading target is made, light emission in the white blinking pattern of the second light emitting group 512 is continuously performed until the change of the pre-reading target is started (see FIG. 29C). ..

After that, as illustrated in FIG. 29C, when the prefetch target variation is started, the second light emitting group 512 changes to a red blinking pattern as the white hold icon changes to the red icon. To start emitting light. That is, as the white hold icon changes to the red icon, the light emission pattern of the second light emitting group 512 changes from the white blinking pattern to the red blinking pattern.

Here, the light emitting effect of the first light emitting group 511 and the third light emitting group 523 and the light emitting effect of the second light emitting group 512 have been described, but as is clear from the above description based on FIG. 29, the hold icon (or When an icon change effect that changes the display mode of the icon) from the first display mode to the second display mode is executed, the light emission corresponding to the second display mode, which is the display mode after the change of the hold icon (or the icon) When the second light emitting group 512 emits light in the pattern (first light emitting pattern) and the second light emitting group 512 emits light in the first light emitting pattern, the first light emitting pattern emits the second light emitting pattern different from the first light emitting pattern. The light emitting group 511 and the third light emitting group 523 emit light.

In the present embodiment, since the second light emitting group 512 emits the same color as the display color after the change of the hold icon (or the icon), the player can see the hold icon (or the icon) without looking at the hold icon (or the icon). It is possible to easily recognize the display color after the change of the hold icon (or the icon) by looking at the two-light emitting group 512. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the prefetch target icon may be temporarily hidden during the change of the prefetch target, and the second light emitting group 512 emits light in the first light emitting pattern at this time as well. Therefore, even when the icon is temporarily hidden, the player can recognize the display color of the icon.

Further, when the second light emitting group 512 is emitting light in the first light emitting pattern, a second light emitting pattern different from the first light emitting pattern (e.g., a color of light emitted when the second light emitting group 512 emits light in the first light emitting pattern) Are emitted in different colors), and the first light emitting group 511 and the third light emitting group 523 emit light. Therefore, the light emission of the second light emitting group 512 in the first light emitting pattern can be emphasized, and the icon change effect of the hold icon (or the icon) and the light emission of causing the second light emitting group 512 to emit light in the first light emitting pattern. It is possible to further improve the effect produced by the synergistic effect with the effect.

The blinking pattern of the second light emitting group 512 has the following features. Since the white blinking pattern of the second light emitting group 512 is set to the longest period in which the second light emitting group 512 blinks white, the second light emitting group 512 emits the white blinking pattern to generate the second blinking pattern. The light emitting group 512 blinks at a slow speed. In addition, the blue blinking pattern of the second light emitting group 512 is set to a longer period in which the second light emitting group 512 blinks in blue, so that the second light emitting group 512 emits light in the blue blinking pattern, The second light emitting group 512 blinks at a low speed. In addition, since the green blinking pattern of the second light emitting group 512 is set to an intermediate period in which the second light emitting group 512 blinks in green, the second light emitting group 512 emits light in the green blinking pattern. , The second light emitting group 512 blinks at a medium speed. Further, the red blinking pattern of the second light emitting group 512 is set to the shortest period in which the second light emitting group 512 blinks in red, so that the second light emitting group 512 emits light in the red blinking pattern. The second light emitting group 512 blinks at high speed.

In this way, the second light emitting group 512 emits light in the same color as the hold icon (or the icon), and the higher the jackpot reliability, the faster the blinking speed of the second light emitting group 512. Expectation can be effectively improved.

(Regarding the gaming machine 1 capable of performing the light emission effect)
Up to this point, the light emission effect executed by the game machine 1 of the present embodiment has been described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 29. However, the game machine 1 capable of executing such a light emission effect is the following game. It can be seen as a machine.

A first light emitting means (for example, a first light emitting group 511),
A second light emitting means (for example, a second light emitting group 512),
A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game) (for example, a main CPU 81 that executes a jackpot determination process of step S308 of FIG. 42 described later),
Reserving means capable of reserving the right to judge to a predetermined number (the obtained information obtained when a game ball wins the first starting opening 21 is obtained from the special figure 1/first reserve storage area 831 to special figure 1/four reserve) Stored in one of the storage areas 834 (see FIG. 38(A)), the acquired information acquired when the game ball wins the second starting opening 22 is stored in the special drawing 2/first reserved storage area 835-special drawing 2 A main CPU 81 stored in any of the fourth reserved storage areas 838 (see FIG. 38A),
An effect control unit (for example, a sub CPU 91, an image/sound control CPU 101, a lamp CPU 121) that controls execution of an effect is provided,
The effect control means,
While displaying a hold suggestive image (for example, a hold icon) that indicates that the right to make the determination is held, the display mode of the hold suggestive image is changed from the first display mode to the above-mentioned first display mode. It is possible to execute a change effect (for example, icon change effect) that changes to the second display mode that suggests that the special game is likely to be executed,
When the change effect is executed, when the second light emitting means emits light in the first light emitting pattern corresponding to the second display mode and the second light emitting means emits light in the first light emitting pattern, A game machine characterized in that the first light emitting means is caused to emit light in a second light emitting pattern different from the first light emitting pattern (see, for example, FIG. 29).

According to this configuration, when the change effect (for example, the icon change effect) is executed, the second light emitting means (for example, the second light emitting means) with the first light emission pattern corresponding to the second display mode which is the display mode after the change of the hold suggestive image is executed. , The second light emitting group 512) emits light, and a high effect can be obtained by the synergistic effect of the light emission of the second light emitting means and the change effect in the first light emission pattern. Further, when the second light emitting means emits light in the first light emitting pattern, the first light emitting means emits light in the second light emitting pattern (different from the first light emitting pattern) (see, for example, FIG. 29). For this reason, when the second light emitting means emits light in the first light emitting pattern, the first light emitting means emits light in the same first light emitting pattern, so that the second light emitting means emits light in the first light emitting pattern. It is possible to effectively suppress the occurrence of the problem that the effect cannot be sufficiently obtained.

Although not shown in the figure, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the second light emitting group 512 blinks in the same color as the hold icon (or the icon) other than white, the first start opening 21 Even if there is a new prize and the hold icon can be displayed as a special icon according to this new prize, a configuration is adopted in which this hold icon is displayed as a white hold icon that is the default hold icon. There is. That is, when the second light emission group 512 blinks in the same color as the hold icon (or the icon) other than white, the execution of the icon change effect for the new hold icon is restricted. Therefore, for example, when the second light emitting group 512 is blinking in green so as to correspond to the green hold icon, the same green hold icon is newly displayed, and the second light emitting group 512 emits green light. It is possible to effectively suppress the problem that it becomes impossible to know which hold icon corresponds to the hold icon.

(Other configurations related to light emission production)
The following configuration may be adopted for the light emission effect.
That is, in the present embodiment, when the first light emitting group 511, the third light emitting group 523, and the second light emitting group 512 emit light of different emission colors, that is, the first light emitting group 511 and the third light emitting group 523. , The case where the second light emitting group 512 does not emit the same color, the first light emitting group 511 and the third light emitting group 523 and the second light emitting group 512 temporarily have the same color, for example, during a predetermined reach effect. There may be a case of emitting light at.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the second light emitting group 512 blinks in the white blinking pattern when the special icon is not displayed has been described as an example, but in other embodiments, when the special icon is not displayed. Alternatively, the second light emission group 512 may be set to non-light emission, and the light emission control for blinking the second light emission group 512 with the same color as the special icon may be started at the timing when the special icon is displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, when the hold icon of the prefetch target changes to the red hold icon, the second light emitting group 512 blinks in red, but the light emission pattern of the second light emitting group 512 is the read ahead target. The light emitting pattern is not limited to the light emitting pattern illustrated in the present embodiment as long as the player can recognize the light emitting pattern corresponding to the display color after the change of the hold icon. That is, for example, when the display color of the hold icon to be read ahead changes to red, the second light emitting group 512 is caused to emit light in a light emitting pattern in which red light emission and white light emission of the second light emitting group 512 are alternately repeated. May be. That is, the light emission pattern of the second light emission group 512 may be a light emission pattern in which there is a moment when the second light emission group 512 emits a light emission color different from the display color after the change of the hold icon to be read ahead. Further, for example, when the hold icon to be read ahead is changed to a red hold icon, the second light emission group 512 is not blinked in red but is blinked in red, or the red light emission of the second light emission group 512 is changed. You may continue.

In addition, a first effect button image imitating the first effect button 35 is displayed as a hold icon according to the new winning of the prefetch target, and the first effect button 35 is operated while the hold icon is displayed. Then, this hold icon may change from the first effect button image to a special icon (for example, a green hold icon). In this case, as the hold icon changes from the first effect button image to the special icon, the light emission control for blinking the second light emission group 512 with the same color as the special icon may be started.

In the present embodiment, as the display color of the hold icon (or the icon) changes, the second emission group 512 blinks in the same color as the display color of the hold icon (or the icon) after the change. Although the case where the effect is started has been described as an example, in another embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the above-described light-emitting effect may not be started even if the display color of the hold icon (or the icon) is changed. May be.

Moreover, as is apparent from the fact that the second light emitting group 512 is disposed in the vicinity of the first starting port 21, the second light emitting group 512 corresponds to the suspension of the first special symbol determination. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when an icon change effect is performed in which the display color of the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the first special symbol determination in the normal game state is changed to a display color other than white, the second light emitting group While performing a light emission effect that causes 512 to blink in the same color as the display color after the change of the hold icon, the display color of the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the second special symbol determination in the probability variation game state (or the time saving game state) is other than white. When the icon change effect of changing to the display color is performed, the light emission effect of blinking the second light emission group 512 in the same color as the changed display color of the hold icon is not performed. On the other hand, in another embodiment, an icon change effect in which the display color of the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the second special symbol determination in the probability variation game state (or the time saving game state) is changed to a display color other than white is performed. In the case of being turned off, a light emission effect may be performed in which the second light emitting group 512 blinks in the same color as the display color after the change of the hold icon.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the second light emitting group 512 is fixed to a predetermined position on the back surface side of the game board 2 that is close to the first starting port 21 will be described as an example, but in other embodiments. Alternatively, for example, a configuration may be adopted in which the second light emitting group 512 is provided in a performance accessory operable with respect to the game board 2 and the position of the second light emitting group 512 can be changed. Further, in the present embodiment, the case where the first light emitting group 511 is integrally fixed to the second light emitting group 512 has been described as an example, but in other embodiments, the first light emitting group 511 can operate individually. Alternatively, a configuration in which the first light emitting group 511 and the second light emitting group 512 can operate integrally may be employed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the icon is displayed until just before the variable display of the first special symbol is finished, and when this icon is a special icon, the second light emitting group is displayed until the icon is erased. The case where the emission control of 512 is continued has been described as an example (see FIG. 29). On the other hand, in another embodiment, for example, the special icon is erased in the middle of SPSP reach, and the emission control of the second light emission group 512 is terminated along with the deletion of the icon. May be adopted. Separately from this, the emission control of the second emission group 512 is continued even after the icon is erased, and the final display color of the icon can be recognized even after the icon is erased. May be adopted.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case will be described in which light emission in the first light emission pattern of the second light emission group 512 is continued even when the prefetch target icon is temporarily hidden during the change of the prefetch target. However, in another embodiment, when the icon of the prefetch target is temporarily hidden, the light emission in the first light emission pattern of the second light emitting group 512 is interrupted, and the icon of the prefetch target is changed. A configuration may be adopted in which when the display is performed again, the light emission in the first light emission pattern of the second light emission group 512 is restarted.

[About pre-indication]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 30 to 33, the preliminary suggestion effect executed by the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. Here, FIG. 30 is an explanatory diagram for describing each effect suggestion image displayed in the preliminary suggestion effect. FIG. 31 is a screen diagram showing a specific example of the preliminary suggestion effect, and FIG. 32 is a screen diagram illustrating an effect after the preliminary suggestion effect is performed. FIG. 33 is a time chart for explaining the preliminary suggestion effect.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, when the game is controlled in the normal gaming state, as a fluctuating effect that is performed during the variable display of the first special symbol, a fluctuating effect that variably displays a decorative symbol, or Various notice productions that suggest the jackpot reliability are executed. The preliminary suggestion effect executed by the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is an effect that suggests in advance that the changing effect is performed. The pre-indication effect is, for example, when the pseudo-relation effect, the SP reach, and the SPSP reach are executed during the variable display of the first special symbol in the normal game state, the pseudo-relation suggestion image, the SP reach suggestion image, and the SPSP. It is an effect that displays a reach suggestion image and suggests in advance that the pseudo continuous effect, SP reach, and SPSP reach illustrated in FIG. 30 will be executed.

In the pre-indication effect, an effect suggestion image that suggests each in-flight effect is displayed with respect to a plurality of in-fluctuating effects that can be executed by the gaming machine 1 while the first special symbol in the normal game state is being displayed in variation. As the effect suggesting image, in the present embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 30, a pseudo-relation suggesting image, a group notice suggesting image, an SP reach suggesting image, an SPSP reach suggesting image, and a character effect suggesting image. , A chance suggestion image and a super hot suggestion image are prepared.

The pseudo-associative suggestion image is an effect image that suggests in advance that the pseudo-associative effect described with reference to FIGS. 11D and 11G will be executed. In the present embodiment, the pseudo-associative effect is associated with the pseudo-associative effect. It is a round-shaped effect image including the characters of "ream" (see FIG. 30). The jackpot reliability when this pseudo-relational suggestion image is displayed in the preliminary suggestion effect is set to about 8% in the present embodiment. In the pre-indication effect, one pseudo-relationship suggestive image may be displayed and two such pseudo-relational suggestion images may be displayed. If it is determined that the pseudo-relationship image develops beyond the eyes and two pseudo-relationship suggestive images are displayed, it is determined that the variation effect develops in the pseudo third ream.

The group notice suggesting image is a production image that suggests in advance that the group notice described above based on FIG. 12D or the like will be executed. In the present embodiment, three characters appearing in the group notice are displayed. It is a horizontally long rectangular effect image including (see FIG. 30). The jackpot reliability when this group announcement suggestion image is displayed in the advance suggestion effect is set to about 45% in the present embodiment.

The SP reach suggestion image is an effect image that suggests in advance that the SP reach described above is executed based on FIG. 9(H) and the like, and in the present embodiment, a horizontally long ellipse including the characters “SP”. It is a shape effect image (see FIG. 30). The jackpot reliability when this SP reach suggestion image is displayed in the preliminary suggestion effect is set to about 10% in the present embodiment. When this SP reach suggestion image is displayed, the SP reach is executed and the winning notification effect is executed at the end of the SP reach, and when the SP reach reaches SPSP reach and the winning notification effect is executed by the SPSP reach. In some cases, the latter has a higher jackpot reliability than the former. Therefore, when the SP reach is developed after the SP reach suggestion image is displayed, the player can enjoy the game while expecting the reach production to be further developed into the SP SP reach.

The SPSP reach suggestion image is an effect image that suggests in advance that the SPSP reach described above based on FIG. 9(I) or the like is executed, and in the present embodiment, a horizontally long hexagon including the characters “SPSP”. Is an effect image of (see FIG. 30). The jackpot reliability when this SPSP reach suggestion image is displayed in the preliminary suggestion effect is set to about 30% in the present embodiment. When this SPSP reach suggestion image is displayed, it will eventually develop into SPSP reach and the winning notification effect will be executed at the end of SPSP reach, but it will evolve from normal reach to SPSP reach without going through SP reach. In some cases, the normal reach and the SPSP reach are developed via the SP reach. In the latter case, the jackpot reliability is higher than in the former case. Therefore, when the SPSP reach suggestion image is displayed, the player can enjoy the game while expecting to develop from normal reach to SP reach first.

The accessory effect suggestion image is an effect image that suggests in advance that an accessory effect in which the movable decorative member 14 operates is executed, and in the present embodiment, a horizontally long heptagonal effect including the characters “gimmick”. This is an image (see FIG. 30). In the present embodiment, the jackpot reliability when this character effect suggestive image is displayed in the preliminary suggestive effect is set to about 40%. The movable decorative member 14 is usually arranged at an initial position (see FIG. 2) in which most of the movable decorative member 14 is hidden behind the decorative member 13 and only the lower end portion of the movable decorative member 14 is visible. On the other hand, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the movable decorative member 14 emits light in a predetermined light emission pattern and is displayed during execution of the development effect (see FIG. 12B) performed prior to SPSP reach. There may be a case where a character effect that moves so as to drop to an operation position that covers most of the screen 70 is executed. In this way, since the jackpot reliability is higher in the case where the character effect is executed along with the development effect than in the case where the character effect is not executed in accordance with the development effect, the character effect suggestion image is displayed. By executing the prior suggestion effect to be displayed, the player's expectation for the jackpot can be effectively improved.

In addition, if the first SPSP reach and the second SPSP reach having a jackpot reliability higher than that of the first SPSP reach are prepared, and if the accessory production is not executed during the development production, the first SPSP reach is developed. If the winning notification effect is executed in the final stage of the first SPSP reach and the accessory effect is executed during the development effect, the winning notification effect is executed in the final stage of the second SPSP reach by developing into the second SPSP reach. You may employ together.

The chance suggestion image is an effect image that suggests that there is a higher possibility that the hit notification effect will be executed in the variable display of the first special symbol this time, and in the present embodiment, the character "Chance!" It is the effect image shown (see FIG. 30). This chance suggestion image does not suggest that some kind of changing production will be executed thereafter, but the jackpot reliability when this chance suggestion image is displayed in the preliminary suggestion production is set to about 15%. Therefore, by displaying the chance suggestion image, it is possible to effectively improve the player's expectation for the jackpot.

The super-hot suggestive image is an effect image that suggests in advance that the changing production (super-hot character display production) for displaying the super-hot character is executed, and in the present embodiment, "super-hot!!" It is an effect image showing the characters (see FIG. 30). Since the jackpot reliability when this intense hot suggestive image is displayed in the preliminary suggestive effect is set to about 65% in the present embodiment, by displaying the intense hot suggestive image, the player can win the jackpot. It is possible to dramatically improve expectations.

When this intense hot suggestive image is displayed by the preliminary suggestive effect, when the reach is established, the reach line including the characters “exciting AT!!!” is displayed and the sound of “exciting AT!!!” is output from the speaker 38. When the intense heat character display effect is performed (see FIG. 32D), and when the intense hot character display effect is performed in which the character "Geki Atsu!!" is displayed large in the center of the display screen 70 at a predetermined timing. There is.

(Specific example of pre-indication production)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32, a pre-indication effect and an effect after the pre-indication effect is performed will be described. In FIG. 31(A), in the final stage of the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the icon displayed in the icon display area 72, the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “miss”. In order to inform, the state in which the three effect symbols showing the "625" variegation are pseudo-stopped is illustrated. On the other hand, when the variable display of the first special symbol ends, the lost symbol as the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41, and the display screen 70 shows a variation of "625". The three effect symbols are stopped as they are.

In this way, when the predetermined confirmation time (0.5 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the lost symbol was stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the earliest hold displayed in the hold icon display area 71 The first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon is executed. Then, as the variable display of the first special symbol is started in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination, the earliest hold icon is shifted from the hold icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72. At the same time, scroll display of the three symbol rows is started (see FIGS. 31A and 31B).

In this way, when a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) elapses after the scroll display of the three symbol rows is started along with the variable display of the first special symbol, the acquisition of the effect suggestion image described above based on FIG. 30. The title display of the acquisition challenge effect aiming at is displayed (see FIG. 31(C)). Specifically, in the state where the three symbol strings are displayed as small symbols in the upper right area of the display screen 70, the character "acquisition challenge" is displayed large in the center of the display screen 70 (Fig. 31(C)). reference). Subsequently, an explanatory effect of the acquisition challenge effect in which the characters "Press the button to get the effect!" is displayed on the display screen 70 (see FIG. 31D).

When the acquisition challenge effect is performed, a list of effect suggestion images is displayed on the display screen 70 (see FIG. 31(E)). Specifically, the pseudo-relationship suggestive image, the group notice suggestive image, the SP reach suggestive image, the SPSP reach suggestive image, the character effect suggestive image, the chance suggestive image, and the intense hot suggestive image described above based on FIG. 30 are displayed on the display screen. Listed in 70. The display shown in FIG. 31(E) is an example, and for example, a pseudo-relation suggestion image, a group notice suggestion image, an SP reach suggestion image, an SPSP reach suggestion image, a character effect suggestion image, a chance suggestion image, and The intense hot suggestion images may be displayed side by side in the order of execution of the corresponding productions. Further, FIG. 31(E) exemplifies a state in which all the effect suggestion images are displayed in a list, but a part of the effect suggestion images is displayed or an effect image showing the character “miss” is displayed. You may display the list including.

When a predetermined time elapses after the effect suggestion images are displayed in a list as shown in FIG. 31(E), an operation promotion effect that prompts the player to operate the first effect button 35 is performed (see FIG. 31(F)). Note that this operation promotion effect is the same effect as the first effect button operation promotion effect described above with reference to FIG. The description is omitted. Further, during the operation promotion effect, the effect suggestion images displayed in a list are displayed on the display screen 70, but for convenience of description, the illustration thereof is omitted in FIG. 31(F).

Next, if the player operates the first effect button 35 during the effective period related to the operation promotion effect, or if the effective period ends without the first effect button 35 being operated, the operation corresponding effect is performed. (See FIG. 31(G)). This operation-corresponding effect is an effect display showing that an explosion has occurred on the display screen 70 and a part of the effect suggestion image displayed on the display screen 70 is erased.

When such an operation-corresponding effect is performed, an effect suggestion image indicating the effect executed during the variable display of the first special symbol of this time remains, and the acquired effect informing effect indicating that the two characters are pleased. (See FIGS. 31H and 31I). This acquisition effect notification effect is an effect corresponding to the above-described suggestion effect. In FIGS. 31H and 31I, a pseudo-relational suggestive image that suggests in advance that a pseudo-representative production is executed, an SP reach suggestive image that suggests in advance that the SP reach will be developed, and an SPSP reach develop. The SPSP reach suggestion image that suggests in advance and the super hot suggestion image that suggests in advance that the production during transition (display display of super hot characters) that displays the characters of super hot are displayed. It is illustrated.

The number of effect suggestion images displayed in the preliminary suggestion effect illustrated in FIGS. 31H and 31I is not particularly limited, but, for example, when the jackpot reliability is relatively low (that is, , If the determination result of the first special symbol determination this time is “miss” and the variation pattern of the first special symbol with a relatively short variation time is selected), the number of effect suggestion images displayed If the jackpot reliability is relatively high (that is, if the determination result of the first special symbol determination this time is “bonus”, or if it is “miss”, the variation time is relatively long) In the case where the variation pattern of one special symbol is selected), the number of displayed effect suggestion images may be increased.

If such a configuration is adopted, the player can more easily recognize the jackpot reliability based on not only the content of the changing effect suggested by each effect suggesting image but also the number of effect suggesting images being displayed. It will be possible.

When the acquisition effect notification effect (preliminary suggestion effect) described above based on FIGS. 31(H) and (I) ends, scroll display of three symbol rows in the effect symbol display area 73 is restarted (FIG. 31(I). And FIG. 32A). In this way, when a predetermined time elapses after the scroll display of the three symbol rows in the effect symbol display area 73 is restarted, as a notice effect suggesting the jackpot reliability, for example, the jackpot reliability increases to a higher stage. A step-up notice of increasing frequency is executed (see FIG. 32(A)). Here, the case where a step-up notice is executed as the notice effect will be described as an example. However, another notice effect (for example, the content of the dialogue issued by the character, the color of the character or the frame indicating the dialogue, and the like) may be used as the notice presentation. There is also a case where a serif notice that suggests the jackpot reliability is executed.

In this way, when the notice effect that suggests the jackpot reliability is executed, the pseudo continuous effect previously suggested by the advance suggestion effect (see FIG. 31(I)) is executed (see FIG. 32(B)). , The pseudo second variation effect is started (see FIG. 32(C)). After that, as the left 7 design and the right 7 design stop pseudo, and reach is established, during the change in which the super hot character previously suggested by the preliminary suggestion effect (see FIG. 31(I)) is displayed. As an effect, an extremely hot character display effect is performed in which a reach line on which the characters "Gekiatsu!!" is written is superimposed and displayed on the reach pattern (see FIG. 32D).

After the reach is established in this way, the normal reach is executed (see FIG. 32(E)), the SP reach effect suggested by the pre-indication production is executed (see FIG. 32(F)), and the pre-indication production is executed. The suggested SPSP reach is executed (see FIG. 32(G)). When the end of this SPSP reach is reached, the first effect button operation promotion effect described based on FIG. 12(F) is executed (see FIG. 32(H)), and the first effect button operation promotion effect is effective. When the player operates the first effect button 35 during the period, cut-in occurs (see FIG. 32(I)). Note that FIG. 32(I) exemplifies a state in which a cut-in image including one character and expressed in green is superposed on the SPSP reach effect image being displayed on the display screen 70.

Note that, in FIG. 32, the flow of the effect after the cut-in has been omitted, but at the end of the SPSP reach, the second effect button operation promotion effect is executed (see FIG. 12(H)). When the second effect button 36 is operated during the effective period of the second effect button operation promotion effect, the hit notification effect (or the loss notification effect) is executed. It should be noted that FIG. 12(I) exemplifies how the hit notification effect is performed in response to the operation of the second effect button 36.

(Flow of production when pre-indication production is executed)
FIG. 33 illustrates the flow of the series of effects described above with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 33, immediately after the variation display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state is started, the intense hot suggestion image, the pseudo-relational suggestion image, the SP reach suggestion image , The SPSP reach suggestion image may be displayed in advance (see FIGS. 31(H) and 31(I)).

When such a preliminary suggestion effect is executed, a step-up notice may be given after that, as illustrated in FIG. 33, before the pseudo continuous effect suggested by the preliminary suggestion effect is performed. (See FIG. 31(I) and FIG. 32(A)-(B)). Then, the pseudo continuous production is executed after the step-up notice, and the intense heat character display production is executed at the timing when the reach is established during the variation production of the second pseudo series (see FIGS. 33 and 32D). ..

When the reach is established in this way, the normal reach that is not suggested by the pre-indication production is executed (see FIG. 33 and FIG. 32E), and the SP reach that is suggested by the pre-indication production is executed (FIG. 33, 32F), the SPSP reach that is also suggested by the pre-indication production is executed (see FIGS. 33 and 32G). After that, when the end of SPSP reach is reached, the first effect button operation promotion effect is performed (see FIG. 32(H)), and the first effect button 35 is activated during the effective period of the first effect button operation promotion effect. When operated, cut-in occurs (see FIG. 33 and FIG. 32(I)). The flow of the effect after the occurrence of this cut-in is as described above.

(Regarding the gaming machine 1 capable of executing the pre-indication production)
Up to this point, the preliminary suggestion effect executed by the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has been described with reference to FIGS. 30 to 33. The gaming machine 1 capable of executing such preliminary suggestion effect is as follows. Can be regarded as a game machine.

A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game) (for example, a main CPU 81 that executes a jackpot determination process of step S308 of FIG. 42 described later),
When the determination is made, the symbol (for example, the first special symbol) is variably displayed on a predetermined symbol display means (for example, the first special symbol display 41), and then the symbol showing the result of the determination is stopped and displayed. Symbol display control means (main CPU 81 that executes the processing of steps S311 and S315 in FIG. 42),
An effect control unit (for example, a sub CPU 91, an image/sound control CPU 101, a lamp CPU 121) that controls execution of an effect is provided,
The effect control means,
The changing effect (for example, pseudo continuous effect, group notice, SP reach, SPSP reach, character effect, intense hot character display effect, etc.) that is performed during the variable display of the symbols, and that the changing effect is performed. It is possible to execute a pre-suggestion effect that is suggested in advance (see, for example, FIGS. 31H and 31I),
After performing the pre-indication effect with respect to a part of the plurality of in-fluctuating effects that are performed during the variable display of the symbol, executing the in-fluctuating effect that is not suggested by the prior suggesting effect, and then the A gaming machine characterized by being capable of executing the part of the changing production suggested by the pre-indication production (see FIG. 33).

According to such a gaming machine, before the effect during change suggested by the pre-indication effect (in the example shown in FIGS. 31 to 33, the pseudo continuous effect, intense AT character display effect, SP reach, SPSP reach). Since a changing production (for example, step-up notice: see FIG. 32A) that is not suggested by the prior suggestion production is performed (see FIG. 33), it is possible to make the player feel unexpected. By the way, if the preliminary suggestion effect is executed for all of the plural changing effects, it becomes impossible for the player to enjoy the game while guessing the changing effect to be performed thereafter, and as a result, the preliminary suggesting effect is executed. By doing so, there may be a problem that the attractiveness of the changing production is deteriorated. On the other hand, according to the above-described configuration, since there is a case where the changing effect that is not suggested by the pre-indication effect is executed, it is possible to effectively prevent such a problem from occurring.

(Other configurations related to pre-indication production)
The following configuration may be adopted for the pre-indication production.
That is, in the present embodiment, as illustrated in FIG. 30, the SU notice suggesting image indicating in advance that the step-up notice is executed is not prepared. The case has been described as an example where the step-up notice is executed after the above-described preliminary suggestion effect is performed. On the other hand, in another embodiment, a SU announcement suggestion image that can be displayed by the advance suggestion effect is prepared, and in the list display described above with reference to FIG. 32A, and thereafter, in the preliminary suggestion effect described above based on FIGS. 32H and 32I, the preliminary suggestion effect that does not display the SU notice suggestive image is executed, and then the step up of FIG. It is also possible to execute a flow effect such as executing a notice.

In the present embodiment, when the preliminary suggestion effect is executed immediately after the variation display of the first special symbol in the normal game state is started, and the variation effect suggested by the preliminary suggestion effect is executed within the same variation. Was described as an example. On the other hand, in another embodiment, the variation display of the first special symbol is subjected to pre-determination processing as the pre-reading variation, and based on the result of this pre-determination processing, the effect during the variation executed in the pre-reading variation. May be specified, and based on this specification result, the pre-indication effect may be executed before the change of the prefetch target is started.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described as an example in which the preliminary suggestion effect is executed in response to the operation of the first effect button 35, but in another embodiment, the operation promotion effect illustrated in FIG. Alternatively, the preliminary suggestion effect may be executed regardless of the operation of the first effect button 35.

[Regarding the first omen effect and the second omen effect]
Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the first predictive effect and the second predictive effect that can be executed by the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. Here, FIG. 34 is an explanatory diagram for describing two types of precursor effects (an example of a first expected effect and a second expected effect) and four types of suggestive effects.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has the reach-less effect described above based on FIG. 9B (an example of a fourth suggestion effect) and the normal reach described above based on FIG. 9F and the like (of the first suggestion effect). Example), the variation effect of the pseudo third series described above based on FIG. 11(H) (an example of a second suggestion effect), and the SPSP reach described above based on FIG. 9(I) (a third suggestion effect). And an example) can be executed.

34(A) to (D) show these reach-less effect, normal reach, pseudo third consecutive change effect, and SPSP reach. Of the four types of effects, assuming that the possibility that the hit notification effect is executed by normal reach (see FIG. 34(B)) is the first degree, in the present embodiment, the first degree is about 2%. It is set. Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the pseudo continuous production is executed twice and the variation production of the pseudo third continuous is developed, the reach production of SP reach or higher (SP reach or SPSP reach) is executed. Since it is confirmed that the winning notification effect is executed when the pseudo third consecutive game is developed, the possibility that the winning notification effect is executed is higher than the possibility that the winning notification effect is executed in the normal reach. Then, in this embodiment, the second degree is set to about 15%.

Further, assuming that the possibility that the hit notification effect is executed in SPSP reach (see FIG. 34D) is the third degree, in the present embodiment, the third degree is set to about 30%. Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, since the hit notification effect is not executed unless the reach effect is executed, the case without the reach effect (see FIG. 34(A)) is adopted. In the present embodiment, the fourth degree is set to 0% when the possibility that the hit notification effect is executed is set to the fourth degree.

By the way, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the right of the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state is suspended, the jackpot game is executed before the first special symbol determination is performed for the right. Along with pre-determining whether or not to do, a pre-determining process for pre-determining which variation pattern is selected as the variation pattern of the first special symbol when the first special symbol determination is performed is performed. On the other hand, in the sub-ROM 92 of the sub-control board 90, since the information showing the correspondence relationship between the variation pattern of the first special symbol and the effect pattern of the variable effect using the effect symbol is stored, the sub CPU 91, Based on the pre-judgment result (pre-judgment information) obtained from the main control board 80, whether or not the reach-less effect is executed by the pre-reading target change, whether or not the normal reach is executed by the pre-reading target change, the pre-reading target change It is possible to specify whether or not to develop into the variation effect of the pseudo third series, and whether or not SPSP reach is executed with the prefetch target variation before the prefetch target variation is started.

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is possible to specify the effect to be performed by the prefetch target variation, and therefore, based on the identification result, the player is hit with a jackpot before the prefetch target variation is started. It is preferable to perform the expected effective production.

(1st omen production)
Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, based on the preliminary determination result, the first expected effect that makes the player expect the hit notification effect to be executed with the prefetch target variation before the prefetch target variation is started. As a result, the first omen effect is executed. The first predictive effect may be any effect as long as it can make the player expect a big hit, but in the present embodiment, it is displayed on the display screen 70 as the first predictive effect. The background image representing the daytime state being displayed is changed to the background image representing the evening state, the background image representing the evening state is displayed on the display screen 70, and the corresponding effect corresponding to this background image is output from the speaker 38. The effect of outputting sound is executed.

In the present embodiment, the normal reach suggesting that the hit notification effect is likely to be executed is the first degree, and the hit notification effect is likely to be executed (higher than the first degree). A configuration in which the first sign effect is executed before the start of the prefetch target change, provided that at least one of the pseudo third consecutive change effects that suggests that the degree is 2 is executed in the prefetch target change. Has been adopted. In other words, when the first predictive effect is executed, at least one of the normal reach and the pseudo third consecutive change effect is executed in the prefetch target change.

According to this configuration, when the first precursor effect is executed, the normal reach is executed with the prefetch target variation, the pseudo third variation effect is executed with the prefetch target variation, and the pseudo with the prefetch target variation. It can be said that this is an effective production for expecting the player to execute the hit notification production because it is determined whether the normal reach is executed by developing the variation production of the third consecutive game.

(Second aura production)
In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, based on the preliminary determination result, the second expectation that makes the player expect the hit notification effect to be executed with the prefetch target variation before the prefetch target variation is started. As the effect, the second predictive effect is executed. The second predictive effect may be any effect as long as it can make the player expect a big hit, but in the present embodiment, it is displayed on the display screen 70 as the second predictive effect. The background image showing the state of the daytime is changed to the background image showing the state of night, the background image showing the state of night is displayed on the display screen 70, and the corresponding effect corresponding to this background image is given from the speaker 38. The effect of outputting sound is executed.

In addition, in this embodiment, there is a possibility that the hit notification effect may be executed, and SPSP reach that suggests that the possibility of the hit notification effect being executed is the third degree (higher than the first degree). On condition that either one of the reach-less effects suggesting that it is the fourth degree (which is lower than the first degree) is executed in the look-ahead target variation, the above-mentioned second It adopts a configuration that executes a precursor effect. In other words, when the second predictive presentation effect is executed, either the SPSP reach or the no-reach effect is executed in the prefetch target variation.

According to this configuration, when the second predictive presentation effect is executed, it is determined whether the pre-reading target variation executes the reach-less production or the pre-reading target variation executes the SPSP reach. That is, when the reach-less effect is executed in the lookahead target variation after the second precursor effect is executed, the second precursor effect functions as a so-called gase effect, while the lookahead target variation is performed after the second precursor effect is executed. When the SPSP reach is executed in, the second predictive presentation effect functions as a large chance presentation. In addition, when the second predictive effect functions as a large chance effect, SPSP reach is executed in which a jackpot can be expected rather than the normal reach determined by the execution of the first predictive effect or the fluctuating effect of the pseudo third consecutive game. Therefore, the player can enjoy the game while expecting that the second precursor effect is a large chance effect.

In addition, when the pseudo third variation effect is executed by the prefetch target variation, it is determined that the reach effect of SP reach or higher is executed at that time, so the first before the prefetch target variation is started. When the precursor effect is executed, it is decided that some kind of reach effect is executed by the change of the prefetch target. On the other hand, when the second predictive effect is executed, it may be decided that the reach-less effect is executed due to the change in the prefetch target as described above. Therefore, the first predictive effect and the second predictive effect are executed at the same time. It is not preferable to do.

Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, it is prohibited to simultaneously execute the first predictive effect and the second predictive effect, and the execution condition of the first predictive effect and the execution condition of the second predictive effect are prohibited. When both are satisfied, either one of the sign effects is executed.

(Regarding the gaming machine 1 capable of executing the first omen effect and the second omen effect)
Up to this point, the first predictive presentation effect and the second predictive presentation effect executed by the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment have been described with reference to FIG. 34, but such first predictive presentation effect and second predictive presentation effect can be executed. The gaming machine 1 can be regarded as the following gaming machines.

A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game) (for example, a main CPU 81 that executes a jackpot determination process of step S308 of FIG. 42 described later),
When the determination is made, the symbol (for example, the first special symbol) is variably displayed on a predetermined symbol display means (for example, the first special symbol display 41), and then the symbol showing the result of the determination is stopped and displayed. Symbol display control means (main CPU 81 that executes the processing of steps S311 and S315 in FIG. 42),
An effect control unit (for example, a sub CPU 91, an image/sound control CPU 101, a lamp CPU 121) that controls execution of an effect is provided,
The effect control means,
Based on the result of the determination, a hit notification effect for notifying that the special game will be executed or a loss notification effect for notifying that the special game will not be executed is executed (see FIG. 9(G)),
As the expected effect for expecting that the hit notification effect is executed, a first expected effect (for example, first predictive effect: see FIG. 34) or a second expected effect (for example, second predictive effect: see FIG. 34). Is feasible,
When the first expected effect is executed, a first suggestive effect (for example, normal reach: see FIG. 34(B)) that suggests that the possibility that the hit notification effect is executed is the first degree, At least one of a second suggestive effect that suggests that the possibility is a second degree that is higher than the first degree (for example, a pseudo third consecutive variable effect: see FIG. 34C). Run
When the second expected effect is executed, a third suggestive effect that suggests that the possibility is a third degree higher than the first degree (for example, SPSP reach: see FIG. 34(D)). And a fourth suggestion effect (for example, reach-less effect: see FIG. 34A) that suggests that the possibility is a fourth degree lower than the first degree. A gaming machine characterized by that.

According to this gaming machine, when the first expected effect is executed, the first suggestive effect (for example, normal reach) suggesting that the possibility that the special game is executed is the first degree, and the above-mentioned possibility. At least one of the second suggestive effects (for example, the fluctuating effect of the pseudo third consecutive game) that suggests that the sex is the second degree that is higher than the first degree is executed. Therefore, when the first expected effect is executed, the player executes the second suggested effect rather than the first suggested effect, or executes both the first suggested effect and the second suggested effect. You can enjoy the game while expecting that. In addition, when the second expected effect is executed, a third suggestion effect (for example, SPSP) that suggests that the possibility is a third degree higher than the first degree (corresponding to the first suggestion effect). Reach), or a fourth suggestion effect (for example, reach-free effect) that suggests that the possibility is a fourth degree lower than the first degree. Therefore, when the second expected effect is executed, the player can enjoy the game while expecting the third suggested effect to be executed rather than the fourth suggested effect.

(Other configurations related to the first omen effect and the second omen effect)
In this embodiment, the case where the third possibility is higher than the second possibility has been described as an example, but in another embodiment, the third possibility is higher than the first possibility, and , A configuration that is lower than the second possibility may be adopted. That is, when the second aura effect is executed, it is determined that the reach-less effect is executed (similar to the present embodiment), or the jackpot reliability is higher than in the normal reach and the pseudo third consecutive game is performed. A configuration may be adopted in which it is determined that an effect having a jackpot reliability lower than that of the variable effect is executed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the first suggestive effect is normal reach, the second suggestive effect is a pseudo third consecutive variable effect, the third suggestive effect is SPSP reach, and the fourth suggestive effect is a reachless effect. Although a case has been described as an example, the first suggestive effect to the fourth suggestive effect may be effects different from those illustrated in the present embodiment.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case has been described as an example where the first predictive effect is an effect in which the background image representing the state of the evening is displayed on the display screen 70 and the corresponding effect sound is output from the speaker 38. In the embodiment, for example, an effect using at least one of the frame lamp 37, the board lamp 5, and the speaker 38 may be executed as the first predictive effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, the case has been described as an example in which the second precursor effect is an effect in which the background image representing the state of the night is displayed on the display screen 70 and the corresponding effect sound is output from the speaker 38. In the embodiment, for example, an effect using at least one of the frame lamp 37, the board lamp 5, and the speaker 38 may be executed as the second predictive effect.

In addition, in the present embodiment, a case has been described as an example in which one of the first predictive presentation effect and the second predictive presentation effect is executed before the change of the prefetching target is started based on the preliminary determination result related to the prefetching target variation. However, in other embodiments, based on the determination result of the first special symbol determination, immediately after the variable display of the first special symbol is performed in response to the execution of this first special symbol determination, Either one of the first omen effect and the second omen effect may be executed.

[About icon proliferation]
Next, with reference to FIG. 35 to FIG. 37, the icon proliferation effect executed in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described. Here, FIG. 35 is an explanatory diagram for describing each icon displayed in the third normal mode. FIG. 36 is a screen diagram exemplifying icon multiplication effects in which effect images related to the hold suggestion display are multiplied. FIG. 37 is a screen diagram exemplifying an icon proliferation effect in which an effect image related to the change suggestion display is propagated.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the effect is controlled in the third normal mode, based on the preliminary determination result corresponding to the hold suggestion display suggesting that the right of the first special symbol determination is reserved. Then, from the first display state in which the first number of effect images related to the hold suggestion display are displayed (for example, the state in which one helicopter icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 71: see FIG. 36(D)). , A second display state in which a second number of effect images larger than the first number related to the hold suggestion display is displayed (for example, a state in which two helicopter icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 71: FIG. 36 ( There may be a case where a hold icon multiplication effect of changing the display state to (see E)) is performed.

Further, when the effect is controlled in the third normal mode, the first display state in which the first number of effect images relating to the variation suggestion display indicating that the variation display of the first special symbol is being displayed ( For example, from the state in which two helicopter icons are displayed in the icon display area 72: see FIG. 37(F), a second number of effect images larger than the first number relating to the variation suggestion display are displayed. There is a case where the icon multiplication effect of changing the display state to the second display state (for example, a state in which three helicopter icons are displayed in the icon display area 72: see FIG. 37(G)) is performed.

<Icons displayed during the third normal mode>
FIG. 35 shows the type of each icon displayed as a hold icon or the icon when the effect is controlled in the third normal mode in the normal game state, the display mode of each icon, and the jackpot reliability of each icon. And the propriety of proliferation of each icon (whether or not icon proliferation effect is possible) are associated and described.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the effect is controlled in the third normal mode, as the hold icon (or the icon), the white hold icon (white icon) illustrated in FIG. 35, the helicopter icon, An airplane icon, a gold icon, and a rainbow icon can be displayed.

(White icon)
The white hold icon is a default hold icon that is displayed even when the effect is controlled in the first normal mode or the second normal mode.

(Helicopter icon)
The helicopter icon is an icon simulating a helicopter, and the jackpot reliability when the helicopter icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 71 (or the icon display area 72) is set to about 5% in the present embodiment. ing. Further, this helicopter icon is an icon capable of executing the icon multiplication effect, and is displayed in the icon display area 72 or the held icon multiplication effect for multiplying the helicopter icon displayed in the hold icon display area 71. There may be a case where the icon multiplication effect of multiplying the helicopter icon is executed.

As the hold icon multiplication effect for this helicopter icon, the hold icon multiplication effect of multiplying one helicopter icon displayed in the hold icon display area 71 into two helicopter icons (for example, FIG. 36(D)-( (See E)), or the hold icon multiplication effect of multiplying the two helicopter icons displayed in the hold icon display area 71 into three helicopter icons. Further, as the icon proliferation effect targeting the helicopter icon, the icon proliferation effect that propagates one helicopter icon displayed in the icon display area 72 to two helicopter icons (for example, FIG. 37(D)- (See (E)) or the icon multiplication effect of multiplying the two helicopter icons displayed in the icon display area 72 into three helicopter icons (see, for example, FIGS. 36(F) to (G)). Can be mentioned.

(Airplane icon)
The airplane icon is an icon simulating an airplane, and the jackpot reliability when the airplane icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 71 (or the icon display area 72) is set to about 25% in the present embodiment. ing. Further, this airplane icon is an icon capable of executing an icon multiplication effect, and is displayed in the icon display area 72 or a hold icon multiplication effect that propagates the airplane icon displayed in the hold icon display area 71. There may be a case where the icon multiplication effect of multiplying the airplane icon is executed.

As the hold icon multiplication effect for this airplane icon, the hold icon multiplication effect of multiplying one airplane icon displayed in the hold icon display area 71 into two airplane icons or the hold icon display area 71 is displayed. An example is a hold icon proliferation effect that propagates two flying plane icons to three plane icons. Further, as the icon proliferation effect for the airplane icon, the icon proliferation effect for propagating one aircraft icon displayed in the icon display area 72 into two aircraft icons or the icon proliferation effect displayed in the icon display area 72 As an example, the icon multiplication effect of multiplying the two displayed airplane icons into three airplane icons is given.

Although the helicopter icon and the airplane icon have different display modes and jackpot reliability from each other, both are icons that can be targets of icon multiplication effect, and it is possible to determine the pseudo number of consecutive changes in the fluctuation effect in the prefetch target change. The two have in common that they have the function to suggest. Therefore, for example, an icon change effect may be executed in which one or more helicopter icons displayed in the hold icon display area 71 are changed to the same number of airplane icons as the helicopter icons. In addition, an icon change effect may be executed in which one or more helicopter icons displayed in the icon display area 72 are changed to the same number of airplane icons as the helicopter icons. 37(H) and (I), which will be described later, exemplify how the three helicopter icons displayed in the icon display area 72 are changed to three airplane icons.

As described above, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, an icon change effect in which one or more helicopter icons are changed to the same number of helicopter icons as airplane icons may be executed, but when the helicopter icon is displayed The jackpot reliability is about 5%, and the jackpot reliability when the airplane icon is displayed is about 25%, so there is an icon change effect that one or more airplane icons change to the same number of airplane icons as heli icons. It will never be executed.

(Gold icon)
The gold icon is a gold icon simulating a spaceship, and its jackpot reliability is set to about 68% in this embodiment. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the number of helicopter icons (or airplane icons) displayed in the icon display area 72 allows the variation effect that is performed during the variation display of the first special symbol to develop up to a pseudo number of stations. Since it has been suggested that it will not develop to the pseudo fourth station after the third pseudo station, the helicopter icon and the airplane icon are displayed in the icon display area 72 after the third pseudo station. The need to keep is low. Therefore, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the three helicopter icons (or the three airplane icons) displayed in the icon display area 72 is “big hit” or “miss” Also, as the variation pattern of the first special symbol, when the variation pattern for reach loss with a relatively long variation time is selected, the three helicopter icons (or the three airplane icons) displayed in the icon display area 72 are selected. ) May change to a gold icon.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the gold icon has a function of suggesting up to a pseudo number of consecutive developments of the variation effect performed during the variation display of the first special symbol, like the white icon. Absent. Therefore, the icon proliferation effect for the gold icon displayed in the icon display area 72 is not executed.

As is clear from the notation in FIG. 35, the jackpot reliability when the gold icon is displayed is the jackpot reliability when the helicopter icon is displayed or the jackpot reliability when the airplane icon is displayed. In comparison, since the value is set to a high value, the three helicopter icons (or the three airplane icons) displayed in the icon display area 72 may change to gold icons, but the icon display area 72 A configuration is adopted in which the gold icon displayed on the screen does not change to a helicopter icon (or an airplane icon).

By the way, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the gold icon does not change to a helicopter icon (or an airplane icon), so if the gold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 71, it changes. A problem arises in that it is impossible to suggest how many pseudo-staging the production will develop. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in order to avoid such a problem, the gold icon is not displayed in the hold icon display area 71, and three helicopter icons (or After the three airplane icons are displayed, a gold icon is displayed instead of these icons.

If only two helicopter icons (or airplane icons) are displayed in the icon display area 72, the variation effect develops up to the pseudo second row, so the jackpot reliability is extremely low. Further, when the two helicopter icons (or the two airplane icons) displayed in the icon display area 72 are changed to gold icons, thereafter, it is suggested whether or not the fluctuating effect develops up to the pseudo third series. I will not be able to. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, while performing the icon change effect of changing the three helicopter icons (or the three airplane icons) displayed in the icon display area 72 into gold icons, the icon display is performed. A configuration is adopted in which the icon change effect of changing the two helicopter icons (or the two airplane icons) displayed in the area 72 into a gold icon is not executed.

(Rainbow icon)
FIG. 21 described above exemplifies the icons displayed when the effect is controlled in the effect mode other than the third normal mode such as the first normal mode, the second normal mode, the chance mode, and the intense heat mode. However, as is clear from the notations of FIGS. 21 and 35, the rainbow icon is an icon that can be displayed regardless of the effect mode, and its jackpot reliability is set to 100% in the present embodiment. Therefore, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination in the normal game state is not "big hit", the rainbow icon is not displayed in the icon display area 72.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, only when the determination result of the first special symbol determination corresponding to the three helicopter icons (or the three airplane icons) displayed in the icon display area 72 is “big hit” , An icon change effect of changing the three helicopter icons (or the three airplane icons) displayed in the icon display area 72 into a rainbow icon, and the three helicopter icons (or 3) displayed in the icon display area 72. There is a case where an icon change effect of changing one airplane icon) to a gold icon and then changing to a rainbow icon is executed.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the rainbow icon, like the white icon and the gold icon, has a function of suggesting how many pseudo-staffs the variation effect that is performed during the variation display of the first special symbol will develop. It does not have, and the icon multiplication effect for the rainbow icon displayed in the icon display area 72 is not executed.

As is clear from the notation in FIG. 35, the jackpot reliability when the rainbow icon is displayed is the jackpot reliability when the helicopter icon is displayed, the jackpot reliability when the airplane icon is displayed, The value is set higher than the jackpot reliability when the gold icon is displayed. Therefore, the three helicopter icons (or three airplane icons) displayed in the icon display area 72 are changed to rainbow icons, or the three helicopter icons (or three airplane icons) displayed in the icon display area 72 are displayed. Although the airplane icon) may change to a rainbow icon after changing to a gold icon, the rainbow icon displayed in the icon display area 72 may change to a helicopter icon (or an airplane icon), or A configuration is adopted in which the rainbow icon displayed in the icon display area 72 does not change to a gold icon.

By the way, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment adopts a configuration in which the rainbow icon does not change to a helicopter icon (or an airplane icon). Therefore, if the rainbow icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 71, a change occurs. A problem arises in that it is impossible to suggest how many pseudo-staging the production will develop. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, in order to avoid such a problem, the rainbow icon is not displayed in the hold icon display area 71, and three helicopter icons (or When three airplane icons are displayed or when a gold icon is displayed instead of these three helicopter icons (or three airplane icons), a rainbow icon is displayed instead of these icons. I am trying.

If only two helicopter icons (or airplane icons) are displayed in the icon display area 72, the variation effect develops up to the pseudo second row, so the jackpot reliability is extremely low. Further, when the two helicopter icons (or the two airplane icons) displayed in the icon display area 72 are changed to rainbow icons, thereafter, it is suggested whether or not the fluctuating effect develops up to the pseudo third series. I will not be able to. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, an icon change effect of changing the three helicopter icons (or the three airplane icons) displayed in the icon display area 72 into a rainbow icon, and displaying in the icon display area 72 The two helicopter icons displayed in the icon display area 72 are executed while changing the three displayed helicopter icons (or the three airplane icons) to the gold icon and then the rainbow icon. Icon change effect of changing (or two airplane icons) to a gold icon, or changing two helicopter icons (or two airplane icons) displayed in the icon display area 72 to a gold icon and then a rainbow icon. A configuration is adopted in which a changing icon change effect is not executed.

(Specific example of suspension icon proliferation effect)
Next, with reference to FIG. 36, a specific example of the hold icon multiplication effect for growing the helicopter icon displayed in the hold icon display area 71 will be described. In FIG. 36(A), the first starting opening is displayed during the variable display of the first special symbol (and the effect symbol) corresponding to the icon (here, the white icon) displayed in the icon display area 72. A game ball wins 21 and a helicopter icon is newly added to the hold icon display area 71 as a third hold icon (a read-ahead hold icon) corresponding to the third hold related to the first special symbol determination. The displayed state is illustrated.

Here, a case where the third hold icon is displayed as a helicopter icon from the beginning will be described, but for example, the timing when the third hold relating to the first special symbol determination occurs (FIG. 36(A)) (A timing at which the display is performed), a white hold icon is displayed, and at the start of the symbol variation following the symbol variation illustrated in FIG. 36A (see FIG. 36C), the white that is the prefetch target There is a case where the hold icon of is changed to a helicopter icon.

In FIG. 36(B), in the final stage of the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the icon (see FIG. 36(A)) displayed in the icon display area 72, the determination result of the first special symbol determination In order to notify that "is a loss", the state in which the three effect symbols showing "486" are shown is illustrated as being pseudo-stopped. On the other hand, when the variable display of the first special symbol is finished, the lost symbol as the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol indicator 41, and the display screen 70 shows a variation of "486". The three effect symbols are stopped as they are.

In this way, when the predetermined confirmation time (0.5 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the lost symbol was stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the earliest hold displayed in the hold icon display area 71 The first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon (the leftmost hold icon in the hold icon display area 71 of FIG. 36(B)) is executed. Then, as the variable display of the first special symbol is started in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination, the earliest hold icon is shifted from the hold icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72. At the same time, scroll display of the three symbol rows is started (see FIGS. 36B and 36C). At that time, the remaining hold icons displayed in the hold icon display area 71 shift toward the icon display area 72, and the heli icon, which is the hold icon to be read ahead, is displayed as the second hold icon. (See FIG. 36C).

In FIG. 36(D), in the final stage of the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the icon (see FIG. 36(C)) displayed in the icon display area 72, the determination result of the first special symbol determination In order to notify that "is a loss", the state in which the three effect symbols showing "245" are shown is pseudo-stopped. On the other hand, when the variable display of the first special symbol ends, the lost symbol as the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41, and the display screen 70 shows the variation of "245". The three effect symbols are stopped as they are.

In this way, when the predetermined confirmation time (0.5 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the lost symbol was stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the earliest hold displayed in the hold icon display area 71 The first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon (holding icon at the left end in the holding icon display area 71 of FIG. 36(D)) is executed. Then, as the variable display of the first special symbol is started in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination, the earliest hold icon is shifted from the hold icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72. At the same time, scroll display of three symbol rows is started (see FIGS. 36D and 36E). At that time, a hold icon multiplication effect for the helicopter icon (see FIG. 36(D)) displayed at the position (second position) where the second hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 71 is performed. Then, the helicopter icon is displayed at both the position (first position) where the earliest hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 71 and the above-mentioned second position (see FIG. 36(E)). The hold icon multiplication effect here is realized, for example, by moving the helicopter icon displayed at the second position to the first position and newly displaying the helicopter icon at the second position.

Note that when the display of FIG. 36(E) is being performed, the prefetch target holding icon is composed of two helicopter icons, a helicopter icon arranged at the first position and a helicopter icon arranged at the second position. Therefore, in FIG. 36(E), a line arrow extending from the character “prefetch target” is directed to these two helicopter icons.

By the way, when the game ball does not easily win the first starting opening 21 despite the player continuing left-handing, the number of hold icons displayed in the hold icon display area 71 decreases, and as a result, the player May be uncomfortable with.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the hold icon proliferation effect for the helicopter icon displayed in the second position as described above is executed, the first variation with the start of the symbol variation Although the number of 1 special symbol hold has decreased, a new helicopter icon is displayed at the second position, and as a result, the state where the helicopter icon is displayed at the second position is maintained (Figure 36(D) and (E)), it is possible to make the player feel as if the number of holdings has not decreased. Therefore, it is possible to effectively prevent the problem of causing the player to feel uncomfortable as described above.

Further, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, one (or twice) pseudo continuous effects are executed and the variable effects are expanded to the pseudo second consecutive (or pseudo third consecutive). A configuration is adopted in which the possibility of a big hit is higher than that in the case where the fluctuating effect does not develop after the second pseudo effect because the pseudo consecutive effect is not executed. On the other hand, according to the above-mentioned hold icon proliferation effect, it is determined at the timing when the helicopter icon is multiplied in two that the variation effect develops in the prefetch target variation at least up to the pseudo second series. It is also possible to improve the player's expectation. In addition, the player is expected to further increase the hold icon effect and increase the number of helicopter icons from two to three (that is, the variation effect develops into the pseudo third consecutive change due to the change in the prefetch target). Can be made

In addition, here, the description has been given by taking the hold icon multiplication effect of multiplying the helicopter icon displayed in the second position of the hold icon display area 71 into two helicopter icons, but the third icon in the hold icon display area 71 is described. There may be a case where a hold icon breeding effect of breeding the helicopter icon displayed at the third position where the hold icon is displayed into two helicopter icons is executed. This hold icon multiplication effect is realized, for example, by moving the helicopter icon displayed at the third position to the second position and newly displaying the helicopter icon at the third position.

In addition, as described above, when the next symbol variation is started in the state where the helicopter icon is displayed at both the second position and the third position in the hold icon display area 71, it is displayed at the second position. The two helicopter icons are moved to the first position, the helicopter icon displayed in the third position is moved to the second position, and the helicopter icon is newly displayed in the third position. A hold icon breeding effect of breeding a helicopter icon may be executed.

Here, unlike the example shown in FIG. 36, the case where the hold icon multiplication effect is performed in the state where the helicopter icon is displayed at the third position in the hold icon display area 71 has been described, but the game of the present embodiment In the machine 1, for the following reason, the icon proliferation effect for the helicopter icon displayed at the fourth position where the fourth hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 71 is not performed.

That is, when the hold icon multiplication effect is executed in the state where the helicopter icon is displayed at the fourth position in the hold icon display area 71, the fourth position is not opened because the helicopter icon is newly displayed at the fourth position, When a game ball newly wins the first starting opening 21, there may arise a problem that the hold icon corresponding to the winning cannot be displayed at the fourth position. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the helicopter icon may be displayed at the fourth position in order to prevent such a problem from occurring, but the helicopter icon is displayed at the fourth position. The icon multiplication production will not be performed.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 36, in FIG. 36(F), at the end of the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the icon (see FIG. 36(E)) displayed in the icon display area 72, In order to inform that the determination result of the 1 special symbol determination is “miss”, the state where three effect symbols showing the stagger of “311” are pseudo stopped is illustrated. On the other hand, when the variable display of the first special symbol ends, the lost symbol as the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41, and the display screen 70 shows the variation of “311”. The three effect symbols are stopped as they are.

After a predetermined fixed time (0.5 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the lost symbol was stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the earliest hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 71 (FIG. 36). The first special symbol determination corresponding to the leftmost hold icon: helicopter icon in the hold icon display area 71 of (F) is executed. Then, as the variable display of the first special symbol is started in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination, the heli icon which is the earliest hold icon is displayed from the hold icon display area 71. While shifting to the area 72, scroll display of three symbol columns is started (see FIGS. 36(F) and (G)). At that time, the helicopter icon displayed at the second position in the hold icon display area 71 is shifted to the first position and displayed like the first hold icon.

In this way, when the prefetch target variation is started, the pseudo continuous effect is executed in the same manner as described above with reference to FIG. 11D (see FIG. 36H). Specifically, the scroll speed of the symbol row in the left column is reduced and the left symbol (for example, 6 symbols) is pseudo-stopped, and subsequently, the scroll speed of the symbol column in the right column is reduced (pseudo-stop is performed first). Right symbol (different from the left symbol) right symbol (for example, 8 symbols) is pseudo-stopped, then the scroll speed of the symbol column in the middle column is reduced, and the 7 symbols are pseudo-stopped as the middle symbol for informing the execution of the pseudo continuous production. ..

In this way, after the effect symbols that are different from each other as the left symbol and the right symbol are pseudo-stopped, when the seven symbols are pseudo-stopped in the middle row, the variation effect of the pseudo-second series following the variation effect of the pseudo-first station is started. (See FIGS. 36(H) and (I)). Specifically, after the character “×2” that suggests the start of the pseudo second variation effect is displayed in a large size in the central area of the display screen 70, the character “×2” is displayed on the upper left of the display screen 70. It is displayed in a smaller size in one area, and along with this, scroll display of three symbol rows is restarted in the effect symbol display area 73.

36(H) and (I), the helicopter icon (second one) displayed at the first position in the hold icon display area 71 is displayed in association with the start of the fluctuating effect of the second pseudo sequence. The helicopter icon) moves to the icon display area 72, and two helicopter icons are displayed in the icon display area 72. However, the pseudo continuous effect is executed after the prefetch target variation is started. 36 (that is, from the display of FIG. 36G to the display of FIG. 36H), or the execution of the pseudo continuous effect (display of FIG. 36H). The second helicopter icon may move from the hold icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72 during the period of time).

Here, based on FIGS. 36(G) to (I), one helicopter icon is displayed from the hold icon display area 71 at the start of the prefetch target variation and at the start of the second pseudo series. The case of moving to 72 has been described. On the other hand, when the hold icon multiplication effect for the helicopter icon displayed in the hold icon display area 71 is performed twice, at the start of the prefetch target change, at the start of the pseudo second series, and at the pseudo At the start of the third station, one helicopter icon moves from the hold icon display area 71 to the icon display area 72.

However, the movement of the helicopter icon after the change of the prefetch target is not limited to these, and for example, the change of the prefetch target is started in a state where two helicopter icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 71. In this case, these two helicopter icons may be moved together to the icon display area 72 with the start of the prefetch target variation. Further, for example, when the prefetch target variation is started in a state where three helicopter icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 71, these three helicopter icons are displayed together with the start of the prefetch target variation. You may make it move to the area|region 72.

Although not shown in the drawing, when the pseudo second consecutive change effect is developed as illustrated in FIG. 36(I), the icon display area 72 is displayed during the pseudo second consecutive change effect. The icon multiplication effect in which the helicopter icon displayed in 3 is increased from two to three is performed, and then the (second time) pseudo continuous effect is performed to develop into a pseudo third consecutive variable effect. There are cases. Further, in the case where the variation effect of the pseudo second consecutive is developed as illustrated in FIG. 36(I), the (second time) pseudo consecutive effect is performed during the variation effect of the second pseudo consecutive, and the pseudo 3 When the continuous variation effect is started, the icon multiplication effect in which the helicopter icon displayed in the icon display area 72 is increased from two to three may be performed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 36(I), when the variation effect of the pseudo second series is developed, the two helicopter icons displayed in the icon display area 72 are displayed during the variation effect of the second pseudo series. Similarly, an icon change effect of changing to two airplane icons and an icon increase effect of increasing the number of airplane icons from two to three are performed, and then a (second time) pseudo continuous effect is performed to simulate. In some cases, it will develop into the third variation production. Further, as shown in FIG. 36(I), when the variation effect of the pseudo second consecutive production is developed, the (second) pseudo consecutive production is performed during the variation production of the second pseudo experiment and the pseudo three consecutive presentations are performed. When the eye variation effect is started, the icon multiplication effect in which the helicopter icon displayed in the icon display area 72 is increased from two to three may be performed.

Note that when the pseudo third consecutive change effect is developed, an icon change effect in which the three helicopter icons displayed in the icon display area 72 are changed to three airplane icons is also performed, or the icon display area 72 is changed. When an icon change effect is performed in which the three helicopter icons displayed in are changed to gold icons (or rainbow icons), the three helicopter icons displayed in the icon display area 72 are changed to three airplane icons. After that, it may change to a gold icon (or a rainbow icon).

(Specific example of the icon proliferation effect)
Next, with reference to FIG. 37, a specific example of the icon multiplication effect for multiplying the helicopter icon displayed in the icon display area 72 will be described. In FIG. 37(A), the first starting opening is displayed during the variable display of the first special symbol (and the effect symbol) corresponding to the icon (here, the white icon) displayed in the icon display area 72. A game ball wins 21 and as a first holding icon (holding icon for prefetching) corresponding to the first holding related to the first special symbol determination, a helicopter at the first position of the holding icon display area 71. The state where the icon is newly displayed is illustrated.

In addition, here, the case where the first hold icon, which is the hold icon for prefetching, is displayed as a helicopter icon from the beginning, for example, the first hold relating to the first special symbol determination has occurred. At the timing (the timing at which the display of FIG. 37(A) is performed), a white hold icon is displayed, and the symbol variation next to the symbol variation illustrated in FIG. 37(A), that is, at the start of the prefetch target variation, is white. When the hold icon is moved to the icon display area 72, it may be changed to a helicopter icon.

In FIG. 37(B), in the final stage of the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the icon (see FIG. 37(A)) displayed in the icon display area 72, the determination result of the first special symbol determination In order to notify that "is a loss", the state in which the three effect symbols showing "265" are shown in a pseudo stop is illustrated. On the other hand, when the variable display of the first special symbol ends, the lost symbol as the first special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41, and the display screen 70 shows a variation of "265". The three effect symbols are stopped as they are.

In this way, when the predetermined confirmation time (0.5 seconds in the present embodiment) has elapsed since the lost symbol was stopped and displayed as the first special symbol, the earliest hold displayed in the hold icon display area 71 The first special symbol determination corresponding to the icon (hold icon at the left end in the hold icon display area 71 of FIG. 37(B): helicopter icon) is executed. Then, as the variable display of the first special symbol is started in response to the execution of the first special symbol determination, a helicopter icon is displayed in the icon display region 72 from the first position of the hold icon display region 71. Along with the shift, scroll display of the three symbol rows, which is the variation of the prefetch target, is started (see FIGS. 37(B) and (C)).

In this way, when the prefetch target variation is started, the pseudo continuous effect is executed in the same manner as described above with reference to FIG. 11D (see FIG. 37D). Specifically, the scroll speed of the symbol row in the left column is reduced and the left symbol (for example, 3 symbols) is pseudo stopped, and subsequently, the scroll speed of the symbol column in the right column is reduced (previously stopped by pseudo). Right symbol (different from left symbol) right symbol (for example, 4 symbols) is pseudo-stopped, then the scroll speed of the symbol row in the middle row is reduced, and 7 symbols are pseudo-stopped as a middle symbol for informing the execution of the pseudo continuous production. ..

In this way, after the effect symbols that are different from each other as the left symbol and the right symbol are pseudo-stopped, when the seven symbols are pseudo-stopped in the middle row, the variation effect of the pseudo-second series following the variation effect of the pseudo-first station is started. (See FIGS. 37D and 37E). Specifically, after the character “×2” that suggests the start of the pseudo second variation effect is displayed in a large size in the central area of the display screen 70, the character “×2” is displayed on the upper left of the display screen 70. It is displayed in a smaller size in one area, and along with this, scroll display of three symbol rows is restarted in the effect symbol display area 73.

37D and 37E, the helicopter icon displayed in the icon display area 72 is increased from one to two as the variation effect of the pseudo second series is started. Although the icon proliferation effect is performed, the case where the icon proliferation effect is executed while the pseudo first consecutive variation effect is performed or during the execution of the pseudo consecutive effect is also illustrated. is there.

As illustrated in FIG. 37(E), when the pseudo second consecutive variation effect is developed, the second pseudo consecutive effect may be performed while the pseudo second consecutive variation effect is being performed. Yes (see FIG. 37(F)). In FIG. 37(F), 6 symbols are pseudo-stopped as the left symbol, 8 symbols are pseudo-stopped as the right symbol, and 7 symbols are pseudo-stopped as the middle symbol.

In this way, after the effect symbols which are different from each other as the left symbol and the right symbol are pseudo-stopped, when the seven symbols are pseudo-stopped in the middle row, the variation effect of the pseudo-third station following the variation effect of the second pseudo station is started. (See FIGS. 37F and 37G). Specifically, after the character “×3” indicating the start of the fluctuating effect of the third pseudo sequence is displayed large in the central area of the display screen 70, the character “x3” is displayed on the upper left of the display screen 70. It is displayed in a smaller size in one area, and along with this, scroll display of three symbol rows is restarted in the effect symbol display area 73.

37(F) and (G), the helicopter icon displayed in the icon display area 72 is increased from two to three as the variation effect of the third pseudo sequence is started. Although the icon proliferation effect is performed, the icon proliferation effect is executed while the pseudo second consecutive variation effect is performed or during the second pseudo consecutive effect. There are also cases.

In this way, when a predetermined time elapses after the development of the pseudo-third variation production, for example, reach is established with three symbols (see FIG. 37(H)). At that time, an effect display showing a shooting star colliding with the three helicopter icons displayed in the icon display area 72 is displayed (see FIG. 37(H)), and the three helicopter icons become three aircraft icons. A changing icon change effect may be performed (see FIGS. 37H and 37I).

When three helicopter icons are displayed in the icon display area 72, when these three helicopter icons continue to be displayed, or when these three helicopter icons change to gold icons, these three helicopter icons are displayed. May change to a gold icon and then a rainbow icon.

In addition, when the pseudo-third change production is developed, the normal reach is changed to the SP reach and the winning notification is performed at the end of the SP reach, or the normal reach is not passed through the SP reach (or the SP reach is reached). (Via via) and the winning notification effect is given at the end of SPSP reach.

By the way, since the helicopter icon and the airplane icon indicate how many stairs the fictitious production will develop in response to the change in the look-ahead target, these are displayed during SP reach or SPSP reach in which pseudo consecutive production is not performed. It is not necessary to display the icon. Therefore, for example, the helicopter icon (or the airplane icon) displayed in the icon display area 72 is erased at a predetermined timing such as during SP reach development, during SP reach, during SPSP reach development, or during SPSP reach. You may do it.

(Regarding the gaming machine 1 capable of executing icon multiplication production)
Up to this point, the icon proliferation effect executed by the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has been described with reference to FIGS. 35 to 37, but the gaming machine 1 capable of executing such an icon proliferation effect is as follows. Can be regarded as a game machine.

A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game) (for example, a main CPU 81 that executes a jackpot determination process of step S308 of FIG. 42 described later),
Reserving means capable of reserving the right to judge to a predetermined number (the obtained information obtained when a game ball wins the first starting opening 21 is obtained from the special figure 1/first reserve storage area 831 to special figure 1/four reserve) Stored in one of the storage areas 834 (see FIG. 38(A)), the acquired information acquired when the game ball wins the second starting opening 22 is stored in the special drawing 2/first reserved storage area 835-special drawing 2 A main CPU 81 stored in any of the fourth reserved storage areas 838 (see FIG. 38A),
Before the determination is made for the right reserved by the suspension means, a preliminary determination means for performing a preliminary determination as to whether or not to execute the special game (executes the preliminary determination processing of steps S211 and S219 in FIG. 40). Main CPU 81)
An effect control unit (for example, a sub CPU 91, an image/sound control CPU 101, a lamp CPU 121) that controls execution of an effect is provided,
The effect control means,
It is possible to execute a hold suggestion display (for example, display of an icon in the hold icon display area 71) that indicates that the right to make a determination is held,
Based on the result of the preliminary determination corresponding to the hold suggestion display, from the first display state (for example, see FIG. 36D) in which the first number of effect images related to the hold suggestion display are displayed, It is possible to change the display state to a second display state (for example, see FIG. 36E) in which a second number of effect images larger than the first number related to the hold suggestion display is displayed. Characteristic gaming machine.

According to such a gaming machine, from the first display state in which the first number of effect images related to the hold suggestion display are displayed, the second number of effect images related to the hold suggestion display (more than the first number) May be changed to the second display state in which is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player an impression as if the number of holding of the determination right is increased, and as a result, it is possible to effectively improve the interest of the holding suggestion display.

A determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game) (for example, a main CPU 81 that executes a jackpot determination process of step S308 of FIG. 42 described later),
When the determination is made, the symbol display control means (for example, the first symbol display control unit 41, for example, the first special symbol display device 41) is variably displayed and then the symbol showing the result of the determination is stopped and displayed. 1 special symbol display unit 41 for controlling the main CPU 81),
An effect control unit (for example, a sub CPU 91, an image/sound control CPU 101, a lamp CPU 121) that controls execution of an effect is provided,
The effect control means,
It is possible to execute a variation suggestion display (for example, display of an icon in the icon display area 72) that suggests that the variation of the symbol is being displayed
From the first display state (for example, refer to FIG. 37(F)) in which the first number of effect images related to the variation suggestion display are displayed, a second number of effects that are larger than the first number related to the variation suggestion display. A game machine characterized in that the display state can be changed to a second display state in which an image is displayed (see, for example, FIG. 37G).

According to such a gaming machine, from the first display state in which the first number of effect images relating to the change suggestion display are displayed, the second number of effect images (more than the first number) relating to the change suggestion display May be changed to the second display state in which is displayed. For this reason, it is possible to give the change suggesting image a change that does not exist in the change effect that changes the display color of the effect image related to the change suggesting display (the change suggesting image), and the effect of the effect using the change suggesting image is effectively provided. It is possible to improve.

(Other configurations related to icon proliferation production)
It should be noted that the following configuration may be adopted for the icon proliferation effect.
That is, in the present embodiment, the case has been described as an example where the icon proliferation effect (the held icon proliferation effect or the icon proliferation effect) is executed only in the third normal mode. On the other hand, in another embodiment, a configuration may be adopted in which the icon proliferation effect can be executed even in the first normal mode, the second normal mode, the chance mode, and the intense hot mode. Further, the icon multiplication effect may be executed not only when the game is controlled in the normal game state, but also when the game is controlled in the probability variation game state or the time saving game state.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above with reference to FIGS. 36D and 36E, in order to propagate the helicopter icon displayed at the second position in the hold icon display area 71, the start of symbol variation Along with moving the helicopter icon displayed at the second position to the first position, the helicopter icon is newly displayed at the second position, and the helicopter icon is displayed at both the first position and the second position. The case where the display state is changed has been described as an example. On the other hand, in another embodiment, when the helicopter icon displayed at the second position is moved to the first position with the start of the symbol variation, the helicopter icon is expanded to two, and Both helicopter icons may be displayed at the first position.

Hereinafter, the RAM configuration of each control board for implementing the game control and the effect control described based on the drawings up to FIG. 37, and the processing performed by each control board will be described.

[Configuration Example of Main RAM 83]
FIG. 38 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the storage area of the main RAM 83 and the information stored in each storage area. As illustrated in FIG. 38(A), the main RAM 83 has a storage area for determination 830, a special storage area, as a storage area for storing the acquired information and the like acquired when the game ball wins the first starting opening 21. The first/first reserved storage area 831, the special figure 1/second reserved storage area 832, the special figure 1/third reserved storage area 833, and the special figure 1/fourth reserved storage area 834 are provided. Further, in the main RAM 83, the storage area for determination 830, the special figure 2/first reserved storage area 835 are storage areas for storing the acquired information and the like acquired when the game ball wins the second starting opening 22. A special figure 2, second reserved storage area 836, a special figure 2, third reserved storage area 837, and a special figure 2, fourth reserved storage area 838 are provided.

The determination storage area 830 is a storage area in which various information used for the special symbol determination is stored when the special symbol determination is actually executed. The special figure 1/first reserved storage area 831 to the special figure 1/fourth reserved storage area 834 are storage areas in which various information relating to the first special symbol determination is stored, and the special figure 2/first reserved storage area 835-Special figure 2/fourth reserved storage area 838 is a storage area in which various information relating to the second special symbol determination is stored. Then, when both the first special symbol determination and the second special symbol determination are suspended, the second special symbol determination is preferentially digested over the first special symbol determination. Therefore, in the determination storage area 830, when the second special symbol determination is suspended, the special symbol 2 is stored in the first special storage area 835 when the special symbol determination is suspended. Various information is shifted, and when only the first special symbol determination is suspended, various information stored in the special figure 1/first reserved storage area 831 is shifted.

As illustrated in FIG. 38(B), the reserved storage areas 831 to 838 are areas for storing information for suspending the right of the special symbol determination, and each is a jackpot random number acquired by the main CPU 81. , An area for storing pattern random numbers, an area for storing reach random numbers, an area for storing variation pattern random numbers, an area for storing prior determination information that is information indicating a preliminary determination result, and the like.

Here, the jackpot random number, the pattern random number, the reach random number, and the variation pattern random number are as described above. The pre-determination information is information obtained by a pre-determination process (see FIG. 41) described later based on the jackpot random number, the pattern random number, the reach random number, and the variation pattern random number. Pre-determination information, specifically, winning start opening information, information indicating whether the determination result of the special symbol determination is a jackpot, if it is a jackpot, information indicating what kind of jackpot, It includes information indicating the variation pattern of the special symbol, information indicating the gaming state of the gaming machine 1, and the like. Here, the winning start opening information is obtained when the jackpot random number, the pattern random number, the reach random number, and the variation pattern random number stored in the same reserved storage area are triggered by the game ball winning the first starting opening 21. It is information indicating whether or not the game ball was acquired when the game ball entered the second starting opening 22. Pre-determination information including these pieces of information is stored in the same pending storage area as the jackpot random number, the pattern random number, the reach random number, and the variation pattern random number used in the pre-determination process.

In the gaming machine 1, every time a game ball is won in the first starting opening 21, the five pieces of information described with reference to FIG. 38(B) are displayed in order from the special figure 1/first reserved storage area 831 to the special figure 1 It is stored in any of the first reserved storage area 831 to the special figure 1/fourth reserved storage area 834. Also, each time a game ball is won in the second starting opening 22, the above five pieces of information are in order from the special figure 2/first reserved storage area 835 in order of special figure 2, first reserved storage area 835 to special figure 2, It is stored in any of the fourth reserved storage areas 838.

For example, when the information is stored in the determination storage area 830 and the information is not stored in any of the special figure 1/first reserved storage area 831 to the special figure 1/fourth reserved storage area 834, When a game ball wins the starting opening 21, five pieces of information relating to the first special symbol determination newly acquired according to the win are stored in the special figure 1/first reserved storage area 831. Further, for example, in the first starting opening 21 in a state where five pieces of information are stored in each of the determination storage area 830, the special figure 1/first reserved storage area 831, and the special figure 1/second reserved storage area 832. When the game ball wins, five pieces of information relating to the first special symbol determination newly acquired according to the win are stored in the special figure 1/third reserved storage area 833.

Also, when the information stored in the special figure 1/first reserved storage area 831 is shifted to the determination storage area 830 when the first special symbol determination is performed, the special figure 1/second reserved storage area 832 The information stored in the reserved storage area related to the first special symbol determination is shifted to the special figure 1/first reserved storage area 831 side. For example, when the information is stored in each of the special figure 1/first reserved storage area 831 to the special figure 1/third reserved storage area 833, the information stored in the special figure 1/first reserved storage area 831 is When shifted to the determination storage area 830, the information stored in the special figure 1/second reserved storage area 832 is shifted to the special figure 1/first reserved storage area 831, and the special figure 1/third reserved memory The information stored in the area 833 is shifted to the special figure 1/second reserved storage area 832.

Such shift processing of information is similarly performed in the special figure 2/first reserved storage area 835 to the special figure 2/fourth reserved storage area 838 in which the information related to the second special symbol determination is stored. In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when both the first special symbol determination and the second special symbol determination are suspended, that is, the special figure 1/first reserved storage area 831 and the special figure 2/first reserved. When the information is stored in both the storage areas 835, the special figure 2, the special reserve figure 8 and the first reserve storage area 831 to the special reserve figure 1 The shift processing for the 1st reserved storage area 835 to the special figure 2/fourth reserved storage area 838 is preferentially performed.

By the way, even if the game ball is won in the first starting opening 21 or the second starting opening 22 during the variation display of the special symbol or the big hit game and various random numbers are acquired, the special symbol determination and the variable display of the special symbol are displayed. It cannot be done immediately. Therefore, when various random numbers are acquired under such circumstances, the main CPU 81 uses the acquired various random numbers and the like as the information for suspending the right of the special symbol determination, as described above. It is supposed to be stored in any one of the areas ˜838. On the other hand, when the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner, the special symbol determination is not held, and when the jackpot game is not in progress, the main CPU 81 uses various random numbers and the like acquired at the start mouth prize. It is directly stored in the determination storage area 830.

[Interrupt processing by the main control board 80]
Next, the interrupt processing executed in the main control board 80 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 39 is a flowchart illustrating an interrupt process executed in the main control board 80. The main control board 80 repeatedly executes a series of processing illustrated in FIG. 39 at regular time intervals (for example, 4 milliseconds) during normal operation except for special cases such as power-on and power-off. .. Note that the processing of the main control board 80, which will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIG. 39 and subsequent figures, is performed in accordance with an instruction issued by the main CPU 81 based on a program stored in the main ROM 82.

First, the main CPU 81 executes a random number update process for updating various random numbers such as a jackpot random number, a pattern random number, a reach random number, a variation pattern random number, and a normal pattern random number (step S1). The jackpot random number, the design random number, the reach random number, the variation pattern random number, and the normal pattern random number are incremented by "1" every time the process of step S1 is performed. A loop counter is used as a counter for performing the process of step S1, and each random number is returned to “0” and updated after reaching a preset maximum value.

Following the processing of step S1, the main CPU 81 acquires various random numbers in response to the input of detection signals from the first starting opening sensor 211, the second starting opening sensor 221, and the gate sensor 251. Sensor detection processing including processing is executed (step S2). This sensor detection processing will be described later in detail based on FIG.

Subsequent to the process of step S2, the main CPU 81 executes a special symbol determination, and the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42 variably displays the special symbol, and then the determination result of the special symbol determination. The special symbol process including the process of stopping and displaying the special symbol indicating is executed (step S3). This special symbol processing will be described later in detail based on FIG. 42.

Subsequent to the process of step S3, the main CPU 81 includes a process of executing a normal symbol determination, displaying the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 43 in a variable manner, and then stopping and displaying a normal symbol indicating the result of the normal symbol determination. Normal symbol processing is executed (step S4).

Subsequent to the processing of step S4, the main CPU 81 controls the second starting opening solenoid 222 that operates the opening/closing member 23 when it is determined that the second starting opening 22 is to be opened as a result of the normal symbol determination. A second start opening/closing control process for opening/closing the 2 start opening 22 is executed (step S5).

Subsequent to the process of step S5, when the main CPU 81 determines that it is a “big hit” in the jackpot determination process executed in the special symbol process of step S3, the first special winning opening solenoid 262 (or the second big winning prize) A special winning opening opening/closing control process for controlling the mouth solenoid 282) to open/close the first special winning opening 26 (or the second special winning opening 28) is executed (step S6). The special winning opening opening/closing control process will be described later in detail with reference to FIGS. 46 to 48.

Subsequent to the processing of step S6, the main CPU 81 executes prize ball processing for controlling payout of prize balls according to winning of the game balls (step S7).

Subsequent to the processing of step S7, the main CPU 81 transmits to the sub-control board 90 information necessary for determining various commands and effect contents set (stored) in the main RAM 83 in the processing steps before step S7. The process is executed (step S8).

[Sensor detection processing by the main control board 80]
FIG. 40 is a detailed flowchart of the sensor detection process in step S2 of FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 40, the main CPU 81 causes the gate sensor 251 to pass the game ball to the gate 25 based on the presence or absence of the detection signal input from the gate sensor 251 following the random number updating process of step S1. It is determined whether or not it is detected (step S201). Here, when it is determined that the gate sensor 251 detects the passage of the game ball to the gate 25 (step S201: YES), the normal symbol determination holding number F stored in the main RAM 83 is set in advance. It is determined whether or not it is less than the maximum number Fmax (“4” in the present embodiment) of the symbol determination (step S202).

When determining that the number F of reservations is less than "4" (step S202: YES), the main CPU 81 updates the number F of reservations by "1" (step S203), and the random number updating process of step S1 is performed. Regarding the normal symbol random number that is updated every time it is performed, the value of the timing at which the passage of the game ball to the gate 25 is detected is acquired and stored in a predetermined area of the main RAM 83 (step S204).

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S204 and determines that the gate sensor 251 does not detect passage of the game ball to the gate 25 (step S201: NO), the number F of reservations is less than “4”. When it is determined that it is not (step S202: NO), the second starting opening sensor 221 detects the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 22 based on the presence or absence of the detection signal input from the second starting opening sensor 221. It is determined whether or not (step S206). Here, when it is determined that the second starting opening sensor 221 has detected the winning of the game ball with respect to the second starting opening 22 (step S206: YES), the number T2 of holding of the second special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 83 is held. However, it is determined whether or not it is less than the preset maximum reserved number T2max (“4” in the present embodiment) of the second special symbol determination set in advance (step S207).

When determining that the number T2 of reservations is less than "4" (step S207: YES), the main CPU 81 updates the value by adding "1" to the number T2 of reservations (step S208), and the random number updating process of step S1 is performed. With respect to the jackpot random number, the pattern random number, the reach random number, and the variation pattern random number that are updated each time, the value of the timing at which the winning of the game ball with respect to the second starting opening 22 is detected is obtained (step S209).

In this way, according to the establishment of the acquisition condition that the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 22 is detected in the state where the number T2 of holdings is less than the maximum number T2max of holdings, various random numbers related to the second special symbol determination are To be acquired. When various random numbers are acquired in a situation where the second special symbol determination and the variable display of the second special symbol can be immediately executed, these random numbers are directly stored in the determination storage area 830 and cannot be immediately executed. When various random numbers are acquired in a situation, these random numbers are stored in any one of the special figure 2/first reserved storage area 835 to the special figure 2/fourth reserved storage area 838.

After executing the processing of step S209, the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the current state is the high base state (step S210). The main RAM 83 stores a time saving game flag. At this time, the short game flag is set to "OFF" when the operation of the opening/closing member 23 is controlled so that the game ball is in the low base state where it is difficult to win the game ball in the second starting port 22, and the game ball is in the second starting port 22. Is a flag that is set to “ON” when the operation of the opening/closing member 23 is controlled so as to be in a high base state where winning is easy. In step S210, the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the current state is the high base state, based on whether or not the time saving game flag is set to "ON".

When the main CPU 81 determines that the current state is the high base state (step S210: YES), that is, when the time saving game flag is set to "ON", the preliminary determination regarding the suspension of the second special symbol determination The process is executed (step S211). Specifically, a jackpot determination process (see FIG. 43) and a variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 44), which will be described later, are executed based on various random numbers obtained in response to a game ball winning the second starting opening 22. Prior to being performed, based on various random numbers acquired in the process of step S209, it is pre-determined whether or not it is a big hit, and the variation of the second special symbol when the second special symbol determination is executed. A pre-determination process for pre-determining which variation pattern is selected as a pattern is executed. The pre-determination information that is the result of the pre-determination process is stored in the same reserved storage area where the jackpot random numbers and the like used in the pre-determination process are stored.

In addition, when the game ball is won in the second starting opening 22 in the state that the number T2 of holding of the second special symbol determination is "0", not during the jackpot game and the variation display of the special symbol, depending on the winning. The obtained various random numbers are directly stored in the determination storage area 830, and the second special symbol determination based on these random numbers is immediately executed. In this case, since the second special symbol determination is not held, the preliminary determination process related to the second special symbol determination is not performed. Such pre-determination processing will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

When the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S211, or determines that it is not in the high base state (step S210: NO), it sets a hold command related to the second special symbol determination in the main RAM 83 (step S212). This suspension command is a command for notifying that the second special symbol determination is suspended, and is transmitted to the sub control board 90 by the transmission processing in step S8. In addition, when the process of step S212 is performed without performing the preliminary determination process of step S211, a hold command that does not include the preliminary determination information is transmitted to the sub control board 90. On the other hand, when the process of step S212 is performed after the pre-determination process of step S211, the hold command including the pre-determination information is transmitted to the sub control board 90.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 executes the processing of step S212 and determines that the second starting opening sensor 221 does not detect the winning of the game ball to the second starting opening 22 (step S206: NO), the second When it is determined that the reserved number T2 of the special symbol determination is not less than “4” (step S207: NO), the first starting port sensor 211 determines whether or not the detection signal is input from the first starting port sensor 211. It is determined whether or not the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 21 is detected (step S214). Here, when it is determined that the first starting opening sensor 211 has detected the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 21 (step S214: YES), the number T1 of holding of the first special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 83 is held. However, it is determined whether or not it is less than the preset maximum number T1max (“4” in the present embodiment) of the first special symbol determination set in advance (step S215).

When the main CPU 81 determines that the number T1 of reservations is less than "4" (step S215: YES), it updates the number T1 of reservations to a value obtained by adding "1" (step S216), and the random number updating process of step S1 is performed. With respect to the jackpot random number, the pattern random number, the reach random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number that are updated each time, the value of the timing at which the winning of the game ball with respect to the first starting opening 21 is detected is acquired (step S217).

In this way, in accordance with the establishment of the acquisition condition that the winning of the game ball to the first starting opening 21 is detected in the state where the number T1 of reservations is less than the maximum number T1max of reservations, various random numbers related to the first special symbol determination To be acquired. If various random numbers are acquired in a situation where the first special symbol determination and the variable display of the first special symbol can be immediately executed, these random numbers are directly stored in the determination storage area 830 and cannot be immediately executed. When various random numbers are acquired in a situation, these random numbers are stored in any one of the special figure 1/first reserved storage area 831 to the special figure 1/four reserved storage area 834.

When executing the process of step S217, the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the current state is the high base state, similarly to the process of step S210 (step S218). Here, when it is determined that the current state is not the high base state (step S218: NO), that is, when the time saving game flag is set to "OFF", the preliminary determination process for suspending the first special symbol determination Is executed (step S219). Specifically, a jackpot determination process (see FIG. 43) and a variation pattern selection process (see FIG. 44), which will be described later, are executed based on various random numbers acquired in response to a game ball winning the first starting opening 21. Prior to being done, based on various random numbers acquired in the process of step S217, it is pre-determined whether or not it is a big hit, and the variation of the first special symbol when the first special symbol determination is executed. A pre-determination process for pre-determining which variation pattern is selected as a pattern is executed. The pre-determination information that is the result of the pre-determination process is stored in the same reserved storage area where the jackpot random numbers and the like used in the pre-determination process are stored.

In addition, when the game ball wins the first starting opening 21 in the state where the number T1 of holding of the first special symbol determination is "0", not during the jackpot game and during the variable display of the special symbol, depending on the winning. The obtained various random numbers are directly stored in the determination storage area 830, and the first special symbol determination based on these random numbers is immediately executed. In this case, since the first special symbol determination is not suspended, the pre-determination process related to the first special symbol determination is not performed. Such pre-determination processing will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

When the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S219 or determines that it is in the high base state (step S218: YES), it sets a hold command related to the first special symbol determination in the main RAM 83 (step S220). This suspension command is a command for notifying that the first special symbol determination is suspended, and is transmitted to the sub control board 90 by the transmission processing in step S8. When the process of step S220 is performed without performing the preliminary determination process of step S219, a hold command that does not include the preliminary determination information is transmitted to the sub control board 90. On the other hand, when the process of step S220 is performed after the pre-determination process of step S219 is performed, a hold command including the pre-determination information is transmitted to the sub control board 90.

[Preliminary determination processing by the main control board 80]
The pre-determination process executed by the main control board 80 will be described below with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 41 is a detailed flowchart of the preliminary determination process in steps S 211 and 219 of FIG. 40. Here, the pre-determination process performed when the right of the first special symbol determination is suspended is described as an example, but the right of the second special symbol determination is different except that the random numbers and the table used are different. The same pre-determination processing is also performed when is suspended.

If the main CPU 81 determines in the process of step S210 of FIG. 40 that the base state is high (step S210: YES), or if the process of step S218 of FIG. 40 determines that the base state is not high (step S218: No), the jackpot determination process is executed (step S2191). Specifically, in the case of a low probability (in the embodiment, the “normal game state” corresponds to this), the low probability big hit random number table (see FIG. 6A) is read from the main ROM 82. It is set in the main RAM 83. On the other hand, when the high probability state (the “probability variation game state” corresponds to this in the present embodiment), the high probability big hit random number table (see FIG. 6A) is read from the main ROM 82 and stored in the main RAM 83. set. Whether or not the jackpot random number acquired in the process of step S209 of FIG. 40 (or the process of step S217 of FIG. 40) matches any of the winning values stored in the jackpot random number table set in the main RAM 83. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the jackpot will be determined at the start of the fluctuation.

Next, the main CPU 81 determines whether or not it is determined to be a big hit at the start of the fluctuation based on the determination result of step S2191 (step S2192). Here, when it is determined that it is a big hit at the start of the change (step S2192: YES), the big hit change pattern selection table (see FIG. 10A) is read from the main ROM 82 and set in the main RAM 83. (Step S2193).

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 determines that it is not a big hit at the start of the change (step S2192: NO), it determines whether the reach effect is performed during the change (step S2194). Specifically, based on whether or not the reach random number acquired together with the jackpot random number used in the jackpot determination process of step S2191 matches the winning value of the reach random number stored in the main ROM 82, It is determined whether the reach effect is performed during the change.

When determining that the reach effect is to be produced (step S2194: YES), the main CPU 81 reads out the reach/displacement variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 10B) from the main ROM 82 and sets it in the main RAM 83 (step S2195).

By the way, the determination result of the first special symbol determination is "miss", and if the reach effect is not performed during the variation, the first special symbol based on the number of holdings of the first special symbol determination at the start of the variation. Fluctuation pattern is determined. This is as described above with reference to FIG. Then, before and after the first special symbol determination being held is exhausted, the number of holdings of the first special symbol determination may be different. Therefore, the variation pattern of the special symbol acquired before the first special symbol determination is digested may be different from the variation pattern of the special symbol selected when the first special symbol determination is actually digested. is there. That is, for the right of the first special symbol determination that the reach effect is not performed during the variation, it may not be possible to acquire an accurate variation pattern of the first special symbol prior to the first special symbol determination.

Therefore, when the main CPU 81 determines that the reach effect is not performed (step S2194: NO), the variation pattern random number determination process of step S2196 described later and the process of storing the preliminary determination information of step S2197 are performed. 40, the process proceeds to step S212 (or step S220) in FIG. Therefore, in the case where the determination result of the special symbol determination is “miss” and the reach-less effect is to be performed, the hold command that does not include the advance determination information is set.

After setting the jackpot variation pattern selection table or the reach-miss variation pattern selection table, the main CPU 81 executes variation pattern random number determination processing (step S2196). Specifically, the fluctuation pattern random number acquired at the time of winning the starting mouth together with the jackpot random number used in the process of step S2191 is one of the random number values defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table set in the main RAM 83. Based on which random number value of, the special symbol variation pattern to be selected in the special symbol determination performed at the start of the variation is specified.

When the process of step S2196 is executed, the main CPU 81 generates advance determination information and stores it in the main RAM 83 (step S2197). The area in which the preliminary determination information is stored is as described above with reference to FIG.

In this way, the main CPU 81, based on the acquired information such as the jackpot random number, which is acquired when the game ball wins the first starting opening 21 (or the second starting opening 22), the jackpot based on this acquired information. Prior to the determination process and the variation pattern selection process being performed, the variation pattern (that is, the variation time) of the first special symbol (or the second special symbol) is acquired.

[Special symbol processing by main control board 80]
Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the details of the special symbol processing executed by the main control board 80 will be described. Here, FIG. 42 is a detailed flowchart of the special symbol processing in step S3 of FIG.

As illustrated in FIG. 42, the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the jackpot game is in progress based on whether or not the jackpot game flag stored in the main RAM 83 is set to “ON” ( Step S301). The jackpot game flag is a flag indicating whether or not the jackpot game is being executed, and is set to "ON" at the start of the jackpot game and set to "OFF" at the end of the jackpot game. Here, when it is determined that the jackpot game is in progress (step S301: YES), the process proceeds to the normal symbol process of step S4.

When determining that the jackpot game is not in progress (step S301: NO), the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the special symbols are being displayed in a variable manner (step S302). Here, when it is determined that the variable display of the special symbol is not being displayed (step S302: NO), it is determined whether the number T2 of reservations for the second special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 83 is “1” or more. Yes (step S303). If it is determined that the number T2 of reservations is "1" or more (step S303: YES), the number T2 of reservations is updated to a value obtained by subtracting "1" (step S304).

When the main CPU 81 determines that the number T2 of reservations is not equal to or larger than "1" (step S303: NO), whether or not the number T1 of reservations of the first special symbol determination stored in the main RAM 83 is equal to or larger than "1". It is determined (step S305). If it is determined that the number T1 of reservations is "1" or more (step S305: YES), the number T1 of reservations is updated to a value obtained by subtracting "1" (step S306).

When the process of step S304 or the process of step S306 is executed, the main CPU 81 executes the shift process for the reserved storage area of the main RAM 83 (step S307). Specifically, when the process of step S307 is executed after the process of step S304, the shift process of shifting the information stored in the special figure 2/first reserved storage area 835 to the determination storage area 830 is executed. To do. At that time, if information is also stored in the reserved storage areas after the special figure 2/second reserved storage area 836, a shift process for shifting the information to the special figure 2/first reserved storage area 835 side Will also be executed. On the other hand, when the shift process is executed subsequent to the process of step S306, the shift process for shifting the information stored in the special figure 1/first reserved storage area 831 to the determination storage area 830 is executed. At that time, if information is also stored in the reserved storage areas after the special figure 1/second reserved storage area 832, a shift process for shifting the information to the special figure 1/first reserved storage area 831 side Will also be executed.

When the main CPU 81 stores the information necessary for the second special symbol determination (or the first special symbol determination) such as the jackpot random number and the symbol random number in the determination storage area 830 by the shift process of step S307, based on these information The jackpot determination process of step S308 and the variation pattern selection process of step S309 are executed.

In addition, during the jackpot game, not even during the variation display of the special symbol, the first special symbol determination holding number T1 and the second special symbol determination holding number T2 are both "0", the game ball first start When winning in the mouth 21 (or the second starting opening 22), information such as a jackpot random number and a symbol random number acquired according to the winning is directly stored in the determination storage area 830. In such a case, the jackpot determination process and the variation pattern selection process are executed without executing the shift process of step S307.

The main CPU 81 executes the big hit determination process based on the random number stored in the determination storage area 830 (step S308). By executing this jackpot determination process, it is determined whether or not it is a jackpot, and when it is determined that it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot (jackpot pattern) is determined. Then, the special symbol setting information indicating the result of these processes is set in the main RAM 83. This jackpot determination process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

Following the jackpot determination process of step S308, the main CPU 81 executes a variation pattern selection process of selecting a variation pattern of a special symbol (step S309). This fluctuation pattern selection processing will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

Subsequent to the processing of step S309, the main CPU 81 sets the special symbol setting information set in the processing of step S308, the setting information of this special symbol is related to the first special symbol determination, or the second special symbol determination. A fluctuation start command including information indicating whether it is related, setting information of the fluctuation pattern selected in the process of step S309, information regarding the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 and the like is set in the main RAM 83 (step S310). This fluctuation start command is a command for instructing the start of effects associated with the variable display of special symbols, and is transmitted to the sub control board 90 by the transmission processing in step S8. As a result, the variation effect including the variation display of the effect symbol on the display screen 70 is started.

Following the process of step S310, the main CPU 81 starts the variable display of the special symbol based on the setting information of the variation pattern included in the variation start command set in the process of step S310 (step S311). At that time, when the processing of step S308 to step S310 is performed in a state in which the information related to the first special symbol determination is stored in the determination storage area 830, the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 41. The variable display of is started. On the other hand, when the processing of steps S308 to S310 is performed in a state in which the information related to the second special symbol determination is stored in the determination storage area 830, the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 42 is displayed. Start variable display.

Next, the main CPU 81 starts measuring the elapsed time after starting the variable display of the special symbol in step S311 (step S312). When the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S312 or determines that the special symbols are being displayed in a variable display (step S302: YES), the elapsed time when the measurement is started in the process of step S312 is the change of step S309. It is determined whether or not the variation time of the variation pattern selected by the pattern selection processing has been reached (step S313). Here, when it is determined that the elapsed time has not reached the fluctuation time (step S313: NO), the process proceeds to the normal symbol process of step S4.

When determining that the elapsed time has reached the variation time (step S313: YES), the main CPU 81 sets a variation end command notifying that the variation display of the special symbol is finished in the main RAM 83 (step S314). This variation end command is transmitted to the sub control board 90 by the transmission processing in step S8. As a result, a process of stopping and displaying the effect symbols that have been variably displayed on the display screen 70 in a manner that shows the determination result of the special symbol determination is performed.

Following the processing of step S314, the main CPU 81 terminates the variable display of the special symbol started in the processing of step S311 (step S315). Specifically, the special symbol (big hit symbol or lost symbol) set in the process of step S308 is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display that has been displaying the special symbol in a variable manner. The stop display of the special symbol is continued until at least a predetermined symbol fixing time (for example, 0.5 seconds) has elapsed.

In this way, the main CPU 81 causes the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42 to variably display the special symbol, and then displays a special symbol indicating the determination result of the jackpot determination process (big hit symbol or lost symbol). The first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42 is stopped and displayed.

Subsequent to the processing of step S315, the main CPU 81 resets the elapsed time when the measurement is started in the processing of step S312 (step S316), and includes the processing of starting the jackpot game in the case of a jackpot, etc. The process is executed (step S317). The special figure stop processing will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

[Big hit determination processing by the main control board 80]
43 is a detailed flowchart of the big hit determination process in step S308 of FIG. The main CPU 81 first executes a jackpot determination based on the jackpot random numbers stored in the determination storage area 830 (step S3081). Specifically, whether the jackpot is a jackpot is determined based on whether the jackpot random number stored in the determination storage area 830 matches a preset winning value (see FIG. 6A). judge. The winning value here is the winning value of the jackpot defined in the jackpot random number table for high probability or the jackpot random number table for low probability. When the jackpot determination is executed in the high-probability state (in the present embodiment, the “probability variation game state” corresponds to this), the winning value stored in the high-probability-time jackpot random number table is used. On the other hand, when the jackpot determination is executed in the low-probability state (the “normal game state” and the “time saving game state” in this embodiment), it is stored in the low-probability jackpot random number table. The winning value is used.

In this way, the main CPU 81 starts such that acquired information such as a jackpot random number acquired when the game ball wins the first starting opening 21 or the second starting opening 22 is stored in the determination storage area 830. When the condition is satisfied, it is determined whether or not to execute the jackpot game advantageous to the player, based on the jackpot random number.

Subsequent to the processing of step S3081, the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the determination result of the jackpot determination is “big hit” (step S3082). Here, when it is determined that the determination result of the big hit determination is not "big hit" (step S3082: NO), that is, when the determination result of the big hit determination is "miss", the setting information of the lose symbol is set in the main RAM 83. (Step S3083). Thereby, in the process of step S315, the lost symbol set here is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 or the second special symbol display 42. In this case, the jackpot game is not played.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 determines that the determination result of the jackpot determination is the “jackpot” (step S3082: YES), the jackpot symbol stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 41 or the second special symbol display device 42. The jackpot symbol selection process of selecting is executed (step S3084). Specifically, when the symbol random number stored in the determination storage area 830 together with the jackpot random number used for the jackpot determination in step S3081 relates to the first special symbol determination, the symbol random number is , One of the jackpot symbols is selected based on which jackpot symbol random number value defined in the symbol determination table for the first starting opening winning prize (see FIG. 6B) matches. Further, when the symbol random number is related to the second special symbol determination, the symbol random number is any jackpot symbol defined in the symbol determination table for the second starting mouth winning (see FIG. 6(C)). Select one of the jackpot symbols based on whether it matches the random number value of.

Then, the main CPU 81 sets the setting information of the selected jackpot symbol in the main RAM 83 (step S3085). Thereby, in the process of step S315, the jackpot symbol set here is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol indicator 41 or the second special symbol indicator 42, and then the jackpot game corresponding to the jackpot symbol. Will be done.

[Variation pattern selection processing by the main control board 80]
FIG. 44 is a detailed flowchart of the variation pattern selection process in step S309 of FIG. After executing the jackpot determination process in step S308 of FIG. 42, the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the determination result of step S3081 is a jackpot (step S3091). If it is determined that the jackpot is a big hit (step S3091: YES), the big hit variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 10A) is read from the main ROM 82 and set in the main RAM 83 (step S3092).

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 determines that it is not a big hit (step S3091: NO), the reach random number stored in the determination storage area 830 is the winning value of the reach random number stored in the main ROM 82. Based on whether or not it matches the corresponding random number value), it is determined whether or not to perform a reach effect that makes the player expect a jackpot (step S3093). Here, when it is determined that the reach effect is performed (step S3093: YES), the reach/displacement variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 10B) is read from the main ROM 82 and set in the main RAM 83 (step S3094). On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach effect is not performed (step S3093: NO), the reachless loss variation pattern selection table (see FIG. 10C) is read from the main ROM 82 and set in the main RAM 83 (step S3095). ..

The main CPU 81 executes the variation pattern random number determination processing with reference to the variation pattern selection table set in the main RAM 83 by the processing of step S3092, the processing of step S3094, or the processing of step S3095 (step S3096). Specifically, when the jackpot variation pattern selection table or the reach-miss variation pattern selection table is set in the main RAM 83, the variation pattern corresponding to the variation pattern random number stored in the determination storage area 830 is set. One variation pattern is selected by reading it from the variation pattern selection table that exists. In addition, when the reach no loss variation pattern selection table is set in the main RAM 83, based on the first special symbol determination holding number T1 (or the second special symbol determination holding number T2) stored in the main RAM 83. One fluctuation pattern is selected by specifying the number of reservations and reading the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the specified number of reservations from the fluctuation pattern selection table for reachless loss. By selecting the variation pattern of the special symbol in this way, the variation time of the special symbol is inevitably determined.

When selecting the variation pattern, the main CPU 81 sets the setting information of the selected variation pattern in the main RAM 83 (step S3097). The setting information of the fluctuation pattern is included in the fluctuation start command together with the setting information of the symbol set in the main RAM 83 by the jackpot determination process of step S308 described above, and is transmitted to the sub control board 90.

[Special control stop process by main control board 80]
45 is a detailed flowchart of the special figure stop processing in step S317 of FIG. 42. After resetting the elapsed time by the process of step S316, the main CPU 81 determines whether or not it is a jackpot as in the process of step S3082 (see FIG. 43), as illustrated in FIG. 45 (step). S3171). Here, when it is determined that it is a big hit (step S3171: YES), the big hit game flag stored in the main RAM 83 is set to "ON" (step S3172).

Next, the main CPU 81 sets the probability variation game flag stored in the main RAM 83 to “OFF” (step S3173), and sets the time saving game flag also stored in the main RAM 83 to “OFF” (step S3174). ). Here, the probability variation game flag is a flag indicating whether or not the probability of being a big hit in the special symbol determination is a relatively high probability state.

In the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, the gaming state is controlled by setting the probability variation gaming flag and the time saving gaming flag. That is, when controlling the gaming state to the "probability variation gaming state", both the probability variation gaming flag and the time saving game flag are set to "ON". Further, when controlling the gaming state to the "normal gaming state", both the probability variation gaming flag and the time saving gaming flag are set to "OFF". Further, when controlling the game state to the "time saving game state", the probability variation game flag is set to "OFF" and the time saving game flag is set to "ON".

Following the processing of step S3174, the main CPU 81 sets an opening command for notifying that the jackpot game is started in the main RAM 83 (step S3175). This opening command includes information such as the type of jackpot, the opening pattern of the first big winning opening 26 (or the second big winning opening 28 or the V winning opening 287) during the big hit game, and the transmission process of step S8. Is transmitted to the sub control board 90.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 determines that it is not a big hit (step S3171: NO), it determines whether or not the probability variation game flag is set to “ON” (step S3176). Here, if it is determined that the probability variation game flag is set to "ON" (step S3176: YES), that is, if the special symbol determination is performed in a high probability state, the high probability stored in the main RAM 83. The remaining game count K is updated to a value obtained by subtracting "1" (step S3177). This high-probability game remaining number K indicates the remaining number of times the special symbol determination is executed in the high-probability state.

Following the processing of step S3177, the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the high-probability game remaining count K is "0" (step S3178). Here, if it is determined that the high-probability game remaining count K is "0" (step S3178: YES), the probability variation game flag is set to "OFF" (step S3179). Thereby, the special symbol determination will be performed in a low probability state.

The main CPU 81 executes the process of step S3179, determines that the probability variation game flag is not set to “ON” (step S3176: NO), or the high-probability game remaining count K is not “0”. If determined (step S3178: NO), it is determined whether or not the time saving game flag is set to "ON" (step S3180). Here, when it is determined that the time saving game flag is set to "ON" (step S3180: YES), the time saving game remaining number J stored in the main RAM 83 is updated to a value obtained by subtracting "1" (step S3180). S3181). The time saving game remaining number J indicates the remaining number of times the special symbol determination is executed in the time saving state (high base state).

Following the processing of step S3181, the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the time saving remaining game count J is "0" (step S3182). Here, when it is determined that the time saving game remaining number J is "0" (step S3182: YES), the time saving game flag is set to "OFF" (step S3183). As a result, the support function for facilitating the winning of the game ball into the second starting opening 22 is not added.

[Winning prize opening/closing control processing by the main control board 80]
46 to 48 are detailed flowcharts of the special winning opening opening/closing control process in step S6 of FIG. 39. The main CPU 81 determines whether or not the jackpot gaming flag is set to "ON", as illustrated in FIG. 46, following the second starting opening opening/closing control process of step S5 in FIG. 39 (step S601). ). Here, if it is determined that the jackpot game flag is not set to "ON" (step S601: NO), the process proceeds to the prize ball process of step S7.

When the main CPU 81 determines that the jackpot game flag is set to “ON” (step S601: YES), for example, after setting the opening command related to the jackpot game by the process of step S3175 (see FIG. 45) Based on whether or not the elapsed time has reached the predetermined opening time, it is determined whether or not it is during the opening period in the jackpot game (step S602).

When determining that the opening period of the jackpot game is in progress (step S602: YES), the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the opening time has elapsed (step S603). If it is determined that the opening time has not elapsed (step S603: NO), the process proceeds to the prize ball process of step S7. On the other hand, when determining that the opening time has passed (step S603: YES), the main CPU 81 sets the number of rounds Rmax of the big hit game, the operation pattern, the valid period, etc., and stores the setting information in the main RAM 103 ( Step S604). For example, when the setting information of any of the jackpot symbols X1 to X4 (see FIG. 6B) is set in the main RAM 83 in the process of step S3085 in FIG. 43, the number of rounds Rmax is set to “5” and the jackpot is set. When the setting information of the symbol Y3 (see FIG. 6C) is set, the number of rounds Rmax is set to "9". Further, for example, when executing a jackpot game of any one of "5R probability variation A", "5R probability variation B", "5R normal A", and "5R normal B" related to the first special symbol determination, the second major The operation patterns of the opening/closing member 29 and the slide member 285 are set so that the winning opening 28 and the V winning opening 287 are opened/closed in the opening/closing pattern described above with reference to FIG. 7. Further, for example, when executing the jackpot game of "7R probability change" (see FIG. 6C) relating to the second special symbol determination, the operation pattern of the opening/closing member 29, the slide member 285, and the opening/closing member 27 is set. .. Also, "5R probability variation A" related to the first special symbol determination, "5R probability variation B" related to the first special symbol determination, "5R probability variation" related to the second special symbol determination, "7R probability variation" related to the second special symbol determination. ], when executing the jackpot game of either "9R probability change" related to the second special symbol determination, the effective period for which the V winning is valid is set. In addition, when executing the jackpot game of "5R normal A" or "5R normal B" related to the first special symbol determination, the effective period is not set.

By executing the process of step S604, various time relating to the jackpot game such as an interval time which is a time until the next round game is started after the round game is finished and an ending time after the final round game is finished. It is also set.

When executing the process of step S604, the main CPU 81 updates the round number R stored in the main RAM 83 to a value obtained by adding “1” (step S605). The number R of rounds is set to "0" before the jackpot game is started, and is updated to a value obtained by adding "1" every time the process of step S605 is performed.

Following the processing of step S605, the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the number of rounds R updated in the processing of step S605 is "5" or less (step S606). In this embodiment, for all jackpots, the second special winning opening 28 is used for the first to fifth round games, and the first special winning opening 26 is used for the sixth and subsequent round games (FIG. 6 (B) and (C)). Therefore, when the main CPU 81 determines that the number R of rounds is equal to or less than “5” (step S606: YES), the second special winning opening solenoid 282 (and the V winning opening solenoid 286) causes the second special winning opening. The second big winning opening opening/closing control for controlling opening/closing of the mouth 28 (and the V winning opening 287) is started (step S607). Since the second special winning opening opening/closing control is as described above with reference to FIG. 7, detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

Following the processing of step S607, the main CPU 81 starts the current round game based on the valid period set in the processing of step S604 and the number of rounds R updated in the processing of step S605 It is determined whether or not it is a game (step S608). Here, when it is determined that the current round game is an effective round game (step S608: YES), an effective round game start command for notifying that the effective round game is started is set in the main RAM 83 (step S609). .. On the contrary, when it is determined that the current round game is not the effective round game (step S608: NO), the second big winning opening/closing round game start command for notifying that the round game which is not the effective round game is started is issued. It is set in the main RAM 83 (step S610).

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 determines that the number R of rounds updated in the process of step S605 is not equal to or less than "5" (step S606: NO), the first big winning opening solenoid 262 is passed through the first big winning opening solenoid 262. The first big winning opening opening/closing control for controlling the opening/closing of is started (step S611). Specifically, a long open round game for opening the first special winning opening 26 for a long time is started. As described above, the first big winning opening opening/closing control is performed after ten game balls are won in the first big winning opening 26 or after the first big winning opening 26 is opened (first It continues until 25 seconds elapse (without winning 10 game balls into the special winning opening 26).

Following the processing of step S611, the main CPU 81 sets, in the main RAM 83, a first special winning opening/closing round game start command notifying that a round game for opening/closing the first special winning opening 26 is started (step S612). ).

The effective round game start command set in the process of step S609, the second special winning opening opening/closing round game start command set in the process of step S610, the first large winning opening opening/closing round set in the process of step S612 The game start command is transmitted to the sub control board 90 by the transmission processing in step S8 in FIG.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 determines in the process of step S602 that it is not during the opening period in the jackpot game (step S602: NO), it determines whether it is during the ending period in the jackpot game (step S613). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the ending period is in progress, based on whether or not the elapsed time from the end of the round game of the final round in the jackpot game has reached a predetermined ending time. If it is determined that the ending period is in progress (step S613: YES), the process proceeds to step S626 (see FIG. 48) described later.

When the main CPU 81 determines that it is not during the ending period in the jackpot game (step S613: NO), for example, during the interval period based on whether or not a predetermined interval time has elapsed since the end of the previous round game. It is determined whether or not (step S614). If it is determined that it is not during the interval period (step S614: NO), the process proceeds to step S617 (see FIG. 47) described later.

When the main CPU 81 determines that it is during the interval period (step S614: YES), it determines whether or not the interval time set in the process of step S604 has elapsed since the end of the previous round game. (Step S615). If it is determined that the interval time has not elapsed (step S605: NO), the process proceeds to the prize ball process of step S7. On the other hand, when it is determined that the interval time has elapsed (step S615: YES), the processing of step S605 and subsequent steps described above is executed.

If the main CPU 81 determines that it is not in the interval period (step S614: NO), that is, if it is in the round game, as shown in FIG. 47, the valid period setting information set in the process of step S604. On the basis of the above, it is determined whether or not it is in the valid period (step S617). If it is determined that the period is not valid (step S617: NO), the process proceeds to step S621, which will be described later. On the contrary, when it is determined that it is in the valid period (step S617: YES), it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the V winning opening 287 based on the presence or absence of the detection signal from the V winning opening sensor 283. (Step S618). Here, if it is determined that the game ball has not passed through the V winning opening 287 (step S618: NO), the process proceeds to step S621 described later.

When determining that the game ball has passed through the V winning opening 287 (step S618: YES), the main CPU 81 sets the V winning flag stored in the main RAM 83 to “ON” (step S619). This V winning flag is a flag that indicates whether or not the game ball has passed through the V winning opening 287 during the valid round game, and is normally set to "OFF", but the V winning opening during the valid round game. When the passage of the game ball is detected by the sensor 283, it is set to "ON".

Following the processing of step S619, the main CPU 81 sets a V winning command for notifying that the game ball has won V during the valid round game in the main RAM 83 (step S620).

The main CPU 81 executes the processing of step S620, determines that it is not within the valid period (step S617: NO), or determines that the game ball has not passed through the V winning opening 287 (step S618: No), it is determined whether or not the second special winning opening opening/closing control started in the processing of step S607 (or the first special winning opening opening/closing control started in the processing of step S611) is completed (step S621). Here, if it is determined that the special winning opening/closing control has not been completed (step S621: NO), the process proceeds to the prize ball process of step S7.

When the main CPU 81 determines that the special winning opening/closing control is completed (step S621: YES), whether the number of rounds R stored in the main RAM 83 matches the number of rounds Rmax set in the process of step S604. It is determined whether or not (step S622). If it is determined that the number of rounds R does not match the number of rounds Rmax (step S622: NO), the process proceeds to the prize ball process of step S7.

When determining that the number of rounds R matches the number of rounds Rmax (step S622: YES), the main CPU 81 starts measuring the ending time that is the elapsed time from the beginning of the ending period (step S623), and the ending period is An ending command for notifying the start is set in the main RAM 83 (step S624). This ending command is transmitted to the sub control board 90 by the transmission processing in step S8.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 81 determines in the process of step S613 in FIG. 46 that the ending period is in progress (step S613: YES), the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the ending time has elapsed, as illustrated in FIG. (Step S626). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the ending time has elapsed based on whether or not the ending time at which the measurement is started in the process of step S623 reaches the ending time set in the process of step S604. If it is determined that the ending time has not elapsed (step S626: NO), the process proceeds to the prize ball process of step S7.

When determining that the ending time has elapsed (step S626: YES), the main CPU 81 determines whether or not the V winning flag stored in the main RAM 83 is set to “ON” (step S627). Here, when it is determined that the V winning flag is set to "ON" (step S627: YES), the probability variation game flag stored in the main RAM 83 is set to "ON" (step S628), and the main The high-probability game remaining count K stored in the RAM 83 is set to "80" (step S629). As a result, after the jackpot game is over, the second special symbol determination (or the first special symbol determination) will be performed in a high probability state with the upper limit of 80 times.

When the main CPU 81 executes the process of step S629 or determines that the V winning flag is not set to "ON" (step S627: NO), the time saving game flag stored in the main RAM 83 is set to " It is set to "ON" (step S630), and the remaining time saving game number J, which is also stored in the main RAM 83, is updated to "80" (step S631). As a result, the support function described above becomes effective (that is, the game is controlled in the high base state) until the second special symbol determination (or the first special symbol determination) is performed up to 80 times.

[Main processing by sub control board 90]
Next, the main processing executed in the sub control board 90 will be described with reference to FIG. 49. Here, FIG. 49 is a flowchart illustrating the main processing executed in the sub control board 90. Note that the processing performed by the sub control board 90, which will be described with reference to the flowcharts in FIG. 49 and subsequent figures, is performed according to an instruction issued by the sub CPU 91 based on a program stored in the sub ROM 92.

That is, the sub CPU 91 first executes an initial setting process (step S41). Specifically, the stack setting, constant setting, setting of SIO, PIO, CTC (interrupt time controller), etc., and reset processing of flags, status, counter, etc. stored in the sub RAM 93 are executed. Next, the sub CPU 91 determines whether the power-off signal is "ON" (step S42). If it is determined that the power-off signal is "ON" (step S42: YES), the process proceeds to step S45 described below.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the power-off signal is not "ON" (step S42: NO), it is determined whether the stored contents of the sub RAM 93 are normal (step S43). If it is determined that the stored contents of the sub RAM 93 are normal (step S43: YES), the process proceeds to step S45. On the contrary, when it is determined that the stored contents of the sub RAM 93 are not normal (step S43: NO), the RAM initialization process for initializing the sub RAM 93 is executed (step S44).

The sub CPU 91 executes the process of step S44, determines that the power-off signal is “ON” (step S42: YES), and determines that the stored content of the sub RAM 93 is normal (step S43: YES), interrupt processing is prohibited (step S45), random number update processing for updating various random numbers for determining whether or not to execute various effects and, when executing, for determining the effect pattern. Is executed (step S46).

Sub CPU91, following the processing of step S46, the command stored in the predetermined area of the sub RAM93 by the first interrupt processing in step S51 and the second interrupt processing in step S53, which will be described later, the audiovisual control board 100 and the lamp control board. A command transmission process for transmitting to 120 is executed (step S47). On the other hand, the image/sound control CPU 101 performs processing based on this command to control execution of the effect using the image display device 7 and the speaker 38, and the lamp CPU 121 performs processing based on this command, thereby creating a frame. Execution of the effect using the lamp 37, the panel lamp 5, the movable decorative member 14, the vibration motor 128, and the like is controlled.

Sub CPU91, following the processing of step S47, determines whether or not the holding effect flag stored in the sub RAM 93 is set to "ON" (step S48), and sets the holding effect flag to "ON". When it is determined that it has been performed (step S48: YES), the hold effect flag is set to "OFF" (step S48). The hold effect flag will be described in detail later.

When the sub CPU 91 executes the process of step S49 or determines that the hold effect flag is not set to “ON” (step S48: NO), the sub CPU 91 executes the interrupt permission process for permitting the execution of the interrupt process. By executing this interrupt permission process (step S50), the first interrupt process in step S51 and the second interrupt process in step S53 can be executed.

Note that after the second interrupt process in step S53 is executed, the process is returned to step S45, and the processes in step S45 and thereafter are repeatedly executed.

[First interrupt processing by the sub control board 90]
Hereinafter, the first interrupt processing executed in the sub control board 90 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 50 is a detailed flowchart of the first interrupt process in step S51 of FIG. 49. In the first interrupt process, the sub CPU 91 first determines whether or not the hold command transmitted from the main control board 80 according to the process of step S212 or the process of step S220 in FIG. 40 is received (step S511). ). If it is determined that the hold command has not been received (step S511: NO), the first interrupt process ends and the process proceeds to the second interrupt process of step S53 (see FIG. 49).

When the sub CPU 91 determines that the hold command is received (step S511: YES), it updates the hold number for special symbol determination stored in the sub RAM 93 to a value obtained by adding “1” (step S512). Specifically, when the hold command related to the first special symbol determination is received, the hold number related to the first special symbol determination is updated to a value obtained by adding “1”, and the hold command related to the second special symbol determination. When it is received, the holding number of the second special symbol determination is updated to a value obtained by adding "1".

Subsequent to the process of step S512, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not the hold command received from the main control board 80 includes the preliminary determination information (step S513). If it is determined that the received hold command does not include the preliminary determination information (step S513: NO), the hold icon display command is set in the sub RAM 93 (step S514). The hold icon display command set by the process of step S514 is a command for instructing the display of the hold icon, and does not include the icon change effect setting information.

When this hold icon display command is transmitted to the image acoustic control board 100 and the lamp control board 120 by the command transmission process of step S47 in FIG. 49, a white hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 71. The icon change effect for the hold icon is not performed.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the received hold command includes the preliminary determination information (step S513: YES), the sub CPU 91 sets the hold effect flag stored in the sub RAM 93 to “ON” (step S515). ). Here, the hold effect flag is a flag that indicates whether or not the processing related to various prefetch effects based on the preliminary determination information included in the hold icon command received from the main control board 80 has been executed, and will be described later in step S517. The flag is set to "ON" when the process of step S523 is executed.

Sub CPU91 stores the pre-determination information included in the hold command in a predetermined area of sub RAM 93 following the processing of step S515 (step S516), and based on the pre-determination information, the icon change effect pattern setting processing. Is executed (step S517), the expected image change effect pattern setting process is executed (step S518), the expected effect pattern setting process is executed (step S519), and the predictive effect pattern setting process is executed (step S521). The icon display command is set in the sub RAM 93 (step S523). This hold icon display command is transmitted to the image acoustic control board 100 and the lamp control board 120 by the command transmission process of step S47 in FIG.

When the setting information of the icon change effect is set in the process of step S517, the hold icon display command including the setting information of the icon change effect is set in the sub RAM 93 in the process of step S523. Then, by transmitting the hold icon display command including the setting information of the icon change effect to the image sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120, the icon change effect described above based on FIG. 21 and FIG. 35 is realized. Will be. The icon change effect pattern setting process in step S517 will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

When the setting information of the expected image change effect is set in the process of step S518, the hold icon display command including the setting information of the expected image change effect is set in the sub RAM 93 in the process of step S523. Then, by transmitting the hold icon display command including the setting information of the expected image change effect to the image sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120, the expected image change effect described above based on FIGS. 21 to 23 is realized. Will be done. The expected image change effect pattern setting process in step S518 will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

When the setting information of the expected effect is set in the process of step S519, the hold icon display command including the setting information of the expected effect is set in the sub RAM 93 in the process of step S523. Then, by transmitting the hold icon display command including the setting information of the expected effect to the image sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120, the expected effect described above based on FIGS. 24 to 26 is realized. Become. The expected effect pattern setting processing in step S519 will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

When the setting information of the indication effect is set in the process of step S521, the hold icon display command including the setting information of the indication effect is set in the sub RAM 93 in the process of step S523. Then, by transmitting the hold icon display command including the setting information of the sign effect to the image sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120, the sign effect described above based on FIG. 34 is realized. The predictive effect pattern setting process in step S521 will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

[Icon change effect pattern setting process by sub control board 90]
Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the icon change effect pattern setting processing executed in the sub control board 90 will be described. Here, FIG. 51 is a detailed flowchart of the icon change effect pattern setting process in step S517 of FIG.

After executing the process of step S516 in FIG. 50, the sub CPU 91 executes the icon change effect lottery (step S5171). Specifically, the icon change effect random number is acquired and stored in the sub RAM 93. This icon change effect random number is incremented by "1" every time the random number updating process of step S46 described above based on FIG. 49 is performed, and the sub CPU 91 uses the count value at the time of receiving the hold command as the icon change effect random number. get. Then, it is determined whether or not to execute the icon change effect based on whether or not the icon change effect random number matches any of the random number values related to the icon change effect random numbers stored in the sub ROM 92 in advance.

Although not shown in the figure, the sub ROM 92 has a preliminary determination result (whether or not it is a “big hit”) regarding the first special symbol determination, a variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the icon change effect described above. A table in which random number values related to random numbers are associated is stored. The sub CPU 91 refers to this table, and the acquired icon change effect random number is the determination result of the first special symbol determination specified from the preliminary determination information stored in the sub RAM 93 in the process of step S516 (see FIG. 50). , And whether or not to execute the icon change effect, based on whether or not any of the random number values associated with the variation pattern of the first special symbol matches. It should be noted that in this table, with regard to the preliminary determination result related to the first special symbol determination, more random number values are associated with “big hits” than with “miss”. In addition, the variation pattern of the first special symbol has a longer variation time, the more random number values are associated. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the higher the jackpot reliability, the easier the icon change effect is executed, and conversely, the lower the jackpot reliability, the harder the icon change effect is executed.

Subsequently, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not to execute the icon change effect based on the lottery result of step S5171 (step S5172), and if it is determined to execute the icon change effect (step S5172: YES), the icon Icon change effect pattern information is set in the sub RAM 93 as change effect setting information (step S5173).

Although not shown in the drawing, the sub ROM 92 stores an icon change effect pattern selection table for selecting an icon change effect pattern for each effect mode. In these icon change effect pattern selection tables, the determination result of the first special symbol determination, the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the hold number of the first special symbol determination when starting the icon change effect, and the display of the icon The variation pattern of the aspect and the random number value are associated with each other. When the sub CPU 91 determines to execute the icon change effect (step S5172: YES), it reads the icon change effect pattern selection table corresponding to the current effect mode from the sub ROM 92 and sets it in the sub RAM 93. Then, the determination result of the first special symbol determination and the variation pattern of the first special symbol, which are specified by the preliminary determination information stored in the sub RAM 93, and the hold number of the first special symbol determination updated in the process of step S512, , The change pattern corresponding to the icon change effect random number acquired when the hold command is received is read from the icon change effect pattern selection table set in the sub RAM 93, and thus one change pattern related to the icon change effect is obtained. select. Then, the icon change effect pattern information indicating the change pattern thus selected is set in the sub RAM 93.

In addition, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the effect is controlled in the third normal mode, in addition to the same icon change effect that is performed in the other effect modes, based on FIGS. 35 to 37. The above-described hold icon proliferation effect and the icon proliferation effect are executed. Therefore, in the icon change effect pattern selection table for the third normal mode, as the change pattern of the icon display mode, the effect pattern of the icon change effect, the effect pattern of the suspended icon increase effect, and the effect pattern of the icon increase effect are associated. The effect pattern of the suspended icon proliferation effect and the effect pattern of the icon proliferation effect are determined by executing the process of step S5173 with reference to the icon change effect pattern selection table for the third normal mode. Will be done.

Further, here, when selecting the change pattern of the icon change effect, the case where the same icon change effect random number as that used in the icon change effect lottery in step S5171 is used has been described as an example. May use another random number to select the change pattern of the icon change effect.

Here, the case where the lottery for determining whether to execute the icon change effect and the lottery for selecting the effect pattern of the icon change effect are different lottery has been described as an example, but the icon change effect is executed. Whether or not, and in what kind of effect pattern the icon change effect is to be executed may be determined by one lottery.

[Expected image change effect pattern setting process by sub-control board 90]
Next, the expected image change effect pattern setting process executed in the sub control board 90 will be described with reference to FIG. 52. This expected image change effect pattern setting process is performed based on FIGS. 21 to 23, and the expected image change effect effect pattern for changing the first expected image to the second expected image and the first expected image to the third expected image. With a process for setting an effect pattern of an expected image change effect that directly changes to an image, an effect pattern of an expected image change effect that changes the first expected image to the second expected image and then changes to the third expected image, and the like. is there. Here, FIG. 52 is a detailed flowchart of the expected image change effect pattern setting process in step S518 of FIG.

Following the icon change effect pattern setting process of step S517, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not the reach effect is performed with the prefetch target change, as illustrated in FIG. 52 (step S5181). Specifically, the variation pattern of the first special symbol selected for the look-ahead target variation identified by the advance determination information stored in the sub RAM 93 in the process of step S513 is the variation pattern for jackpots and the variation pattern for reach loss. Based on whether or not there is any, it is determined whether or not the reachable effect is performed by the prefetch target variation. Here, when it is determined that the effect with reach is not performed due to the change in the prefetch target (step S5181: NO), the expected image change effect pattern setting process ends, and the process proceeds to the expected effect pattern setting process of step S519. Be done.

By the way, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, for example, the expected image illustrated in FIG. 23 indicates the jackpot reliability in cooperation with the holding icon as a special icon (holding icon having a display color other than white). Therefore, when only the default hold icon (white hold icon) is displayed, the expected image is not displayed. For this reason, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the reachable effect is performed due to the change in the prefetch target (step S5181: YES), the sub CPU 91 does not display the expected image when the special icon is not displayed as the hold icon. The following processing is executed.

That is, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the reachable effect is performed due to the change of the prefetch target (step S5181: YES), the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not the special icon is displayed as the hold icon of the prefetch target (step S5182). Specifically, based on whether or not the process of step S5173 is executed and the setting information of the icon change effect for displaying the hold icon as the special icon is set in the sub RAM 93 by the process of step S5173. Then, it is determined whether or not a special icon will be displayed in the hold icon display area 71 as a hold icon to be read ahead.

Here, when it is determined that the special icon is not displayed as the hold icon to be read ahead (step S5182: NO), the expected image change effect pattern setting process ends, and the process proceeds to the expected effect pattern setting process of step S519. Be done. In this case, the expected image change effect is not performed because the process of step S5189 described later is not executed.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the special icon is displayed as the prefetch target holding icon (step S5182: YES), the sub CPU 91 executes the expected image change effect lottery (step S5183). Specifically, the expected image change effect random number is acquired and stored in the sub RAM 93. This expected image change effect random number is incremented by "1" every time the random number updating process of step S46 described above with reference to FIG. Get as a random number. Then, based on whether or not the expected image change effect random number matches any of the random number values related to the expected image change effect random number stored in the sub ROM 92 in advance, it is determined whether or not the expected image change effect is executed. ..

Although not shown in the drawing, the sub-ROM 92 has a preliminary determination result (whether or not it is a “big hit”) regarding the first special symbol determination, a variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the expected image change described above. A table is stored in which random number values related to effect random numbers are associated. The sub CPU 91 refers to this table, the obtained expected image change effect random number, the determination of the first special symbol determination specified from the preliminary determination information stored in the sub RAM 93 in the process of step S516 (see FIG. 50) Based on the result and whether or not the random number value associated with the variation pattern of the first special symbol matches, it is determined whether or not to execute the expected image change effect. It should be noted that in this table, with regard to the preliminary determination result related to the first special symbol determination, more random number values are associated with “big hits” than with “miss”. In addition, the variation pattern of the first special symbol has a longer variation time, the more random number values are associated. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the higher the jackpot reliability, the easier it is to execute the expected image change effect, and conversely, the lower the jackpot reliability, the harder it is to execute the expected image change effect.

Subsequently, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not to execute the expected image change effect based on the lottery result of step S5183 (step S5184). Here, when it is determined by the sub CPU 91 that the expected image change effect is not executed (step S5184: NO), the expected image change effect pattern setting process ends, as in the case where it is determined as "NO" in step S5182. Then, the process proceeds to the expected effect pattern setting process of step S519.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines to execute the expected image change effect (step S5184: YES), whether the determination result of the first special symbol determination indicated by the preliminary determination information stored in the sub RAM 93 is a “big hit”. It is determined whether or not (step S5185). Here, if it is determined that the "big hit" (step S5185: YES), the expected image change effect pattern selection table for big hits is read from the sub ROM 92 and set in the sub RAM 93 (step S5186), and it is not "big hit". If determined (step S5185: NO), the expected image change effect pattern selection table for reach loss is read from the sub ROM 92 and set in the sub RAM 93 (step S5187).

Then, the sub CPU 91 refers to the expected image change effect pattern selection table set in the sub RAM 93 by the process of step S5186 or step S5187, and selects an expected image change effect pattern selection process of selecting an effect pattern of the expected image change effect. Is executed (step S5188).

Although not shown in the figure, in the expected image change effect pattern selection table stored in the sub ROM 92, the determination result of the first special symbol determination, the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the expected image change effect are started. The number of holding of the first special symbol determination at the time of performing, the change pattern of the expected image, and the random number value are associated with each other. The sub CPU 91, in the process of step S5188, the determination result of the first special symbol determination and the variation pattern of the first special symbol specified by the preliminary determination information stored in the sub RAM 93, and the process updated in step S512. By reading from the expected image change effect pattern selection table set in the sub RAM 93, the change pattern corresponding to the number of 1 special symbol determination held and the expected image change effect random number acquired when the hold command is received, Select the change pattern of 1 in the expected image.

It should be noted that the first expected image is the second expected image or the third expected image when the jackpot expected image change effect pattern selection table is referred to as compared to when the reach loss expected image change effect pattern selection table is referred to. The feature is that it is difficult to select a change pattern that does not change in the expected image. Further, when the expected image change effect pattern selection table for jackpot is referred to, the first expected image is the second expected image or the third expected image compared to when the expected image change effect pattern selection table for reach loss is referred to. The feature is that a change pattern that changes to an expected image is easily selected.

Further, here, when selecting the change pattern of the expected image, the case where the same expected image change effect random number as that used in the expected image change effect lottery in step S5183 is used has been described as an example. A random number other than the random number may be used to select the expected image change pattern.

Here, a case where the lottery for determining whether or not to execute the expected image change effect and the lottery for selecting the effect pattern of the expected image change effect (change pattern of the expected image) are different lottery will be described as an example. However, whether or not the expected image change effect is to be executed, and if so, what kind of effect pattern the expected image change effect is to be executed may be determined by one lottery.

Subsequently, the sub CPU 91 sets expected image change effect pattern information indicating the change pattern of the expected image selected in the process of step S5188 in the sub RAM 93 as setting information of the expected image change effect (step S5189).

[Expected production pattern setting process by sub-control board 90]
Next, with reference to FIG. 53, expected effect pattern setting processing executed in the sub control board 90 will be described. The expected effect pattern setting process is a process for setting the effect patterns of the first expected effect and the second expected effect described above with reference to FIGS. 24 to 26. Here, FIG. 53 is a detailed flowchart of the expected effect pattern setting process in step S519 of FIG.

Following the expected image change effect pattern setting process of step S518, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not the reachable effect is performed with the prefetch target change, as illustrated in FIG. 53 (step S5191). The determination process of step S5191 is performed in the same manner as the process of step S5181 described above. Here, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the effect with reach is not performed due to the change in the prefetch target (step S5191: NO), the expected effect pattern setting process ends, and the predictive effect pattern setting process of step S521 is processed. Can be advanced.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the reachable effect is performed due to the change of the prefetching target (step S5191: YES), the sub CPU 91 executes the first expected effect lottery (step S5192). Specifically, the first expected effect random number is acquired and stored in the sub RAM 93. This first expected effect random number is incremented by "1" every time the random number updating process of step S46 described above based on FIG. 49 is performed, and the sub CPU 91 sets the count value at the time of receiving the hold command to the first expected effect. Get as a random number. Then, based on whether or not this first expected effect random number matches any of the random number values related to the first expected effect random numbers stored in advance in the sub ROM 92, it is determined whether or not to execute the first expected effect. ..

Although not shown in the drawing, the sub-ROM 92 has a preliminary determination result (whether or not it is a “big hit”) regarding the first special symbol determination, a variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the first expectation described above. A table in which random number values related to effect random numbers are associated is stored. The sub CPU 91 refers to this table, and the obtained first expected effect random number is determined by the first special symbol determination specified from the preliminary determination information stored in the sub RAM 93 in the process of step S516 (see FIG. 50). Based on the result and whether or not it matches any of the random number values associated with the variation pattern of the first special symbol, it is determined whether or not to execute the first expected effect. It should be noted that in this table, with regard to the preliminary determination result related to the first special symbol determination, more random number values are associated with “big hits” than with “miss”. In addition, the variation pattern of the first special symbol has a longer variation time, the more random number values are associated. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the higher the jackpot reliability, the easier it is to execute the first expected effect, and conversely, the lower the jackpot reliability, the harder it is to execute the first expected effect.

Subsequently, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not to execute the first expected effect, based on the lottery result of step S5192 (step S5193). Here, when the sub CPU 91 determines not to execute the first expected effect (step S5193: NO), the process proceeds to step S5199 described later.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines to execute the first expected effect (step S5193: YES), the determination result of the first special symbol determination indicated by the preliminary determination information stored in the sub RAM 93 is “big hit”. It is determined whether or not (step S5194). Here, when it is determined that it is a "big hit" (step S5194: YES), the big expected first expected effect pattern selection table is read from the sub ROM 92 and set in the sub RAM 93 (step S5195), and it is not the "big hit". If determined (step S5194: NO), the reach expected first expected effect pattern selection table is read from the sub ROM 92 and set in the sub RAM 93 (step S5196).

Then, the sub CPU 91 refers to the first expected effect pattern selection table set in the sub RAM 93 by the process of step S5195 or the process of step S5196, and selects the effect pattern of the first expected effect. Is executed (step S5197).

Although not shown in the drawing, in the first expected effect pattern selection table stored in the sub ROM 92, the determination result of the first special symbol determination, the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the first expected effect are started. The number of holding of the first special symbol determination at the time of performing, the effect pattern of the first expected effect, and the random number value are associated with each other. The sub CPU 91, in the process of step S5197, the determination result of the first special symbol determination and the variation pattern of the first special symbol specified by the preliminary determination information stored in the sub RAM 93, and the process updated in step S512. By reading the hold number of 1 special symbol determination and the effect pattern corresponding to the first expected effect random number acquired when the hold command is received, from the first expected effect pattern selection table set in the sub RAM 93, The first effect pattern of the first expected effect is selected.

In addition, when the first expectation production pattern selection table for big hits is referred to, the first expected production is performed during execution of the first expected production compared to when the first expected production pattern selection table for reach loss is referred to. There is a feature that the production pattern of the production is easy to change.

In addition, here, when selecting the effect pattern of the first expected effect, the case where the same first expected effect random number as that used in the first expected effect lottery in step S5192 is used has been described as an example. A random number different from the expected effect random number may be used to select the effect pattern of the first expected effect.

Here, the case where the lottery for determining whether or not to execute the first expected effect and the lottery for selecting the effect pattern of the first expected effect are different lottery has been described as an example. Whether or not to execute, and if so, in what kind of effect pattern the first expected effect is to be executed, may be determined by one lottery.

Subsequently, the sub CPU 91 sets, in the sub RAM 93, the first expected effect pattern information indicating the effect pattern of the first expected effect selected in the process of step S5197 as the setting information of the first expected effect (step S5198).

When the sub CPU 91 executes the process of step S5198 or determines not to execute the first expected effect (step S5193: NO), the sub CPU 91 executes the second expected effect lottery (step S5199). Specifically, the second expected effect random number is acquired and stored in the sub RAM 93. This second expected effect random number is incremented by "1" every time the random number updating process of step S46 described above based on FIG. 49 is performed, and the sub CPU 91 sets the count value at the time of receiving the hold command to the second expected effect. Get as a random number. Then, based on whether or not this second expected effect random number matches any of the random number values related to the second expected effect random numbers stored in the sub ROM 92 in advance, it is determined whether or not to execute the second expected effect. ..

Although not shown in the drawing, the sub-ROM 92 has a preliminary determination result (whether or not it is a “big hit”) regarding the first special symbol determination, a variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the second expectation described above. A table in which random number values related to effect random numbers are associated is stored. The sub CPU 91 refers to this table, and the obtained second expected effect random number is determined by the first special symbol determination specified from the preliminary determination information stored in the sub RAM 93 in the process of step S516 (see FIG. 50). Based on the result and whether or not any of the random number values associated with the variation pattern of the first special symbol matches, it is determined whether or not to execute the second expected effect. It should be noted that in this table, with regard to the preliminary determination result related to the first special symbol determination, more random number values are associated with “big hits” than with “miss”. In addition, the variation pattern of the first special symbol has a longer variation time, the more random number values are associated. Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the higher the jackpot reliability, the easier it is to execute the second expected effect, and conversely, the lower the jackpot reliability, the harder it is to execute the second expected effect.

Subsequently, the sub CPU 91 determines whether to execute the second expected effect based on the lottery result in step S5199 (step S5200). Here, when the sub CPU 91 determines not to execute the second expected effect (step S5200: NO), the process proceeds to the predictive effect pattern setting process of step S521.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines to execute the second expected effect (step S5200: YES), whether the determination result of the first special symbol determination indicated by the preliminary determination information stored in the sub RAM 93 is a “big hit”. It is determined whether or not (step S5201). Here, when it is determined that it is a "big hit" (step S5201: YES), the big expected second expected effect pattern selection table is read from the sub ROM 92 and set in the sub RAM 93 (step S5202), and it is not a "big hit". When it is determined (step S5201: NO), the reach-missing second expected effect pattern selection table is read from the sub ROM 92 and set in the sub RAM 93 (step S5203).

Then, the sub CPU 91 refers to the second expected effect pattern selection table set in the sub RAM 93 by the process of step S5202 or the process of step S5203, and selects a second expected effect pattern selection process for selecting an effect pattern of the second expected effect. Is executed (step S5204).

Although not shown in the drawing, in the second expected effect pattern selection table stored in the sub ROM 92, the determination result of the first special symbol determination, the variation pattern of the first special symbol, and the second expected effect are started. The number of holding of the first special symbol determination when performing, the effect pattern of the second expected effect, and the random value are associated. The sub CPU 91, in the process of step S5204, the determination result of the first special symbol determination and the variation pattern of the first special symbol specified by the preliminary determination information stored in the sub RAM 93, and the process updated in step S512. By reading the holding number of 1 special symbol determination and the production pattern corresponding to the second expected production random number acquired when the suspension command is received from the second expected production pattern selection table set in the sub RAM 93, The first effect pattern of the second expected effect is selected.

It should be noted that, when the second expected production pattern selection table for jackpot is referred to, the second expected production is performed during execution of the second expected production compared to when the second expected production pattern selection table for reach loss is referred to. There is a feature that the production pattern of the production is easy to change.

In addition, here, the case where the same second expected effect random number as that used in the second expected effect lottery in step S5199 is used when selecting the effect pattern of the second expected effect has been described as an example. A random number different from the expected effect random number may be used to select the effect pattern of the second expected effect.

Here, the case where the lottery for determining whether or not to execute the second expected effect and the lottery for selecting the effect pattern of the second expected effect are different lottery has been described as an example. Whether or not to execute, and if so, what kind of effect pattern the second expected effect is to be executed in, may be determined by one lottery.

Subsequently, the sub CPU 91 sets, in the sub RAM 93, second expected effect pattern information indicating the effect pattern of the second expected effect selected in the process of step S5204, as the setting information of the second expected effect (step S5205).

Note that the process of selecting the effect pattern of the third expected effect (see FIG. 26) and setting the information indicating the selection result in the sub RAM 93 as the third expected effect pattern information uses different random numbers and tables. Except for this, the process is the same as the process related to the first expected effect and the process related to the second expected effect described above with reference to FIG. 53, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted here.

[Indication effect pattern setting process by the sub control board 90]
Next, referring to FIG. 54, the indication effect pattern setting process executed in the sub control board 90 will be described. This indication effect pattern setting process is a process of setting one of the first indication effect and the second indication effect described above with reference to FIG. 34. Here, FIG. 54 is a detailed flowchart of the aura effect pattern setting process in step S521 of FIG.

Sub CPU91, following the expected effect pattern setting processing of step S519, as shown in FIG. 54, executes a hint effect lottery (step S5211). Specifically, the precursor effect random number is acquired and stored in the sub RAM 93. This aura effect random number is incremented by "1" every time the random number updating process of step S46 described above based on FIG. 49 is performed, and the sub CPU 91 acquires the count value at the time of receiving the hold command as the aura effect random number. . Then, it is determined whether or not to perform the aura effect, based on whether or not the aura effect random number matches any of the random number values regarding the aura effect random numbers stored in advance in the sub ROM 92.

Subsequently, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not to perform the aura effect based on the lottery result of step S5211 (step S5212). Here, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the precursor effect is not executed (step S5212: NO), the process proceeds to step S523 in FIG.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines to execute the precursor effect (step S5212: YES), the sub CPU 91 specifies whether or not to execute each suggestive effect (step S5213). Specifically, in the pre-determination information related to the first special symbol determination stored in the sub RAM 93 in the process of step S516 in FIG. 50, whether or not the determination result of the first special symbol determination is “big hit” In addition to the information shown, information showing the variation pattern of the first special symbol is included. Therefore, the sub CPU 91, based on the information indicating the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the variation pattern of the first special symbol selected at the start of the prefetch target variation is the variation pattern for reach-free loss Determine whether or not. Here, if it is determined that the variation pattern is for the loss without reach, since the reach effect is not performed in the change in the prefetch target, the effect without reach in the change in the prefetch object (an example of the fourth suggestion effect: FIG. 34 (A ) Reference) can be specified.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the variation pattern of the first special symbol selected at the start of the prefetch target variation is not the variation pattern for reach-less loss, that is, the variation pattern for jackpot or the variation pattern for reach loss In this case, the sub CPU 91 refers to the reach effect variation effect pattern selection table stored in the sub ROM 92, and specifies the effect performed in the prefetch target variation. In the reach effect variation effect pattern selection table, a plurality of types of reach effect effect variation effect patterns are associated with each combination of the determination result of the first special symbol determination and the variation pattern of the first special symbol. However, the variation effect patterns of the plurality of types of reachable effects here are the same in the flow itself of the variation effect, only the difference in the variation mode of the effect symbol. Therefore, if the determination result of the first special symbol determination and the variation pattern of the first special symbol can be identified, it is possible to identify the flow of the variation effect performed in the prefetch target variation. Therefore, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the variation pattern of the first special symbol selected at the start of the prefetch target variation is not the variation pattern for reach-less loss, based on the information included in the preliminary determination information. By specifying the determination result of the first special symbol determination and the variation pattern of the first special symbol and reading the variation production pattern of the corresponding reachable production, the flow of the variation production performed in the prefetch target variation is identified. .. By such processing, whether or not normal reach (an example of the first suggestive effect: see FIG. 34B) is performed in the change of the prefetch target, a variation effect of the pseudo third consecutive (an example of the second suggestive effect: the figure). 34(C)), or SPSP reach (an example of the third suggestion effect: see FIG. 34(D)) can be specified.

As described above, in the process of step S5213, the sub CPU 91 executes the presence/absence of the reach-less effect, the presence/absence of the normal reach, the execution/non-execution of the variation effect of the pseudo third series, and the SPSP reach in the prefetch target variation. When the presence/absence is specified, it is specified based on the specification result whether or not the first predictive presentation effect can be executed (step S5214). In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 34, at least one of the normal reach (see FIG. 34B) and the variation effect of the pseudo third series (see FIG. 34C) is provided. It is preset that the first predictive effect (an example of the first expected effect) is executed prior to the change of the prefetch target on condition that it is executed in the change of the prefetch target. Therefore, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not at least one of the normal reach and the pseudo third consecutive change effect is executed in the prefetch target change based on the identification result in the process of step S5213, and the first It specifies whether or not the precursor effect can be executed.

Subsequent to the processing in step S5214 as described above, the sub CPU 91 specifies whether or not the second aura effect can be executed (step S5215). In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 34, one of the reach-less effect (see FIG. 34A) and the SPSP reach (see FIG. 34D) is the prefetch target variation. On condition that it is executed, it is preset to execute the second predictive effect (an example of the second expected effect) prior to the change of the prefetch target. Therefore, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not one of the reach-less effect and the SPSP reach is executed by the prefetch target change based on the identification result in the process of step S5213, and executes the second aura effect. Identify whether it is possible.

Next, the sub CPU 91 determines, based on the identification result of step S5214 and the identification result of step S5215, whether either of the first omen effect and the second omen effect can be executed ( Step S5216). For example, in the case where the SPSP reach is executed after the change to the pseudo third consecutive change effect in the prefetch target change, both the execution condition of the first predictive effect and the execution condition of the second predictive effect are satisfied. You may execute the precursor effect of.

If the sub CPU 91 determines that either aura effect can be executed (step S5216: YES), for example, a lottery using a random number is performed to select one of the first aura effect and the second aura effect. The information indicating the selection result is set in the sub RAM 93 as the setting information of the indication effect (step S5217).

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines that neither of the precursor effects is executable (step S5216: NO), that is, only one of the execution condition of the first predictive effect and the execution condition of the second predictive effect is satisfied. If not, based on the identification result of step S5214 and the identification result of step S5215, it is determined whether the predictable effect that can be executed is the first predictive effect (step S5218). Here, when it is determined that it is the first omen effect (step S5218: YES), the setting information of the first omen effect is set in the sub RAM 93 (step S5219), and when it is determined that it is not the first omen effect (step S5218). (S5218: NO), that is, if the second predictive effect can be executed, the setting information of the second predictive effect is set in the sub RAM 93 (step S5220).

[Second interrupt processing by the sub control board 90]
The second interrupt processing executed in the sub control board 90 will be described below with reference to FIG. 55. Here, FIG. 55 is a detailed flowchart of the second interrupt process in step S53 of FIG.

Sub CPU 91, following the first interrupt process in step S51 of FIG. 49, when a command (other than the hold command) is received from main control board 80, executes a command reception process that performs a process according to the command ( Step S10). The command receiving process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

Subsequent to the process of step S10, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not the operation information is input from the first effect button detection sensor 96 or the second effect button detection sensor 97 shown in FIG. It is determined whether the first effect button 35 or the second effect button 36 has been operated (step S30). Here, when it is determined that the first effect button 35 or the second effect button 36 has been operated (step S30: YES), an operation command for notifying that is set in the sub RAM 93 (step S31). By transmitting this operation command to the image and sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120, a process for realizing an effect on the effect according to the operation of the first effect button 35 or the second effect button 36 is performed. ..

The sub CPU 91 executes the data transfer process when the process of step S31 is executed or when it is determined that neither the first effect button 35 nor the second effect button 36 is operated (step S30: NO). (Step S33). Specifically, since data relating to image and sound control is transmitted from the image and sound control board 100, the data is transferred to the lamp control board 120. As a result, the lamp control board 120 controls the effect by the effect means such as the frame lamp 37, the panel lamp 5, the movable decorative member 14, and the vibration motor 128 so as to be synchronized with the effect performed by the image display device 7 and the speaker 38. It

[Command reception processing by the sub control board 90]
FIG. 56 is a detailed flowchart of the command receiving process in step S10 of FIG. As illustrated in FIG. 56, the sub CPU 91 first determines whether or not a command (a command other than the hold command) has been received from the main control board 80 (step S14). Here, when it is determined that the command has not been received (step S14: NO), the process proceeds to step S30 described above.

When the sub CPU 91 determines that the command from the main control board 80 is received (step S14: YES), the command is the fluctuation start command transmitted from the main control board 80 according to the process of step S310 of FIG. It is determined whether there is any (step S15). Here, when it is determined that the received command is not the fluctuation start command (step S15: NO), the process proceeds to step S17 described below.

When the sub CPU 91 determines that the received command is the fluctuation start command (step S15: YES), the sub CPU 91 executes the fluctuation start command reception process (step S16). This fluctuation start command reception processing will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

When the sub CPU 91 determines that the received command is not the fluctuation start command (step S15: NO), the command is the fluctuation end command transmitted from the main control board 80 according to the process of step S314 of FIG. It is determined whether or not (step S17). Sub CPU91, when it is determined that it is a variation end command (step S17: YES), the variation display of the effect symbol is ended, and the effect symbol is stopped in a mode showing the determination result of the special symbol determination executed when the symbol variation starts. A variation effect end command for instructing execution of the displayed process is set in the sub RAM 93 (step S18).

This variation effect end command is transmitted to the image acoustic control board 100 and the lamp control board 120 by the command transmission process of step S47 (see FIG. 49), so that the first special symbol determination (or the second special symbol determination) is determined. With the special symbol indicating the result being stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 41 (or the second special symbol display 42), the determination result of the first special symbol determination (or the second special symbol determination) is shown. The effect design is stopped and displayed on the display screen 70.

When the sub CPU 91 determines that the received command is not the fluctuation end command (step S17: NO), whether the command is the opening command transmitted from the main control board 80 according to the process of step S3175 of FIG. 45. It is determined whether or not (step S19). Here, when it is determined that the received command is the opening command (step S19: YES), an image of the start of the opening effect for notifying the type of the big hit in the opening period of the big hit game and for prompting the player to right-hand An opening effect start command for instructing the sound control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120) is set in the sub RAM 93 (step S20). For example, when the opening command related to "5R probability change A" is received, if the three effect symbols showing the doublet of "777" or "333" are immediately after the main stop, based on FIG. If the opening effect start command for instructing the execution of the opening effect is set, and immediately after the other effect symbols showing the other doublet are completely stopped, it is described above based on FIGS. 14(A) to (C). Set the opening effect start command that instructs the execution of the opening effect.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the received command is not the opening command (step S19: NO), the command is an effective round game transmitted from the main control board 80 according to the process of step S609 of FIG. A start command, a second special winning opening/closing round game start command transmitted from the main control board 80 according to the processing of step S610 of FIG. 46, and a transmission from the main control board 80 according to the processing of step S612 of FIG. It is determined whether or not the round game start command is one of the first special winning opening opening/closing round game start commands (step S21).

When determining that the received command is the round game start command (step S21: YES), the sub CPU 91 executes a round game start command reception process that performs a process according to the received round game start command (step S23). . This round game start command reception processing will be described later in detail based on FIG. 63.

When the sub CPU 91 determines that the received command is not the round game start command (step S21: NO), the command is the V winning command transmitted from the main control board 80 according to the process of step S620 of FIG. 47. It is determined whether there is any (step S25). Here, when it is determined that the received command is the V winning command (step S25: YES), the V winning command receiving process is executed to perform the process according to the V winning command (step S26). This V winning command reception processing will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the received command is not the V winning command (step S25: NO), it executes the ending command reception process (step S27). Specifically, in the case where the three effect symbols showing the doublet of "777" or "333" are permanently stopped, "V winning command is received before the ending command is received," An ending effect start command is set in the sub RAM 93 to instruct execution of an ending effect to notify that the effect in the effect mode named "Gekito RUSH" for definite notification of "probability variation game state" is started. .. In addition, if the V winning command is not received before the ending command is received despite the fact that the three effect symbols indicating the doublet of “777” or “333” are stopped, the “probability variation game state Ending production start command for instructing execution of the ending production that informs that the production in the production mode named "Challenge mode" that does not inform whether it is "or the "time saving game state" is started in the sub RAM 93. set. On the other hand, when the three effect symbols other than “777” and “333” showing the doublet are stopped, the ending effect is instructed to execute the ending effect informing that the effect in the challenge mode will be started. The command is set in the sub RAM 93.

These ending commands are transmitted to the image acoustic control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120) by the command transmission processing in step S47 of FIG. As a result, the ending effect described above based on FIG. 13(F) and the ending effect described above based on FIG. 14(I) are realized.

[Variation start command reception processing by the sub control board 90]
FIG. 57 is a detailed flowchart of the fluctuation start command reception process in step S16 of FIG. When the sub CPU 91 determines that the command received from the main control board 80 is the fluctuation start command (step S15: YES), the sub CPU 91 executes a series of fluctuation start command reception processing illustrated in FIG. 57.

That is, the sub CPU 91 acquires the value at the time when the variation start command is received from the main control board 80 for the effect random number that is appropriately updated by the random number update processing (step S46 of FIG. 49) in the sub control board 90, and then the sub RAM 93. (Step S161). Then, the received fluctuation start command is analyzed (step S162).

In this variation start command, as described above, the setting information of the symbol indicating the determination result of the jackpot determination process, the setting information of this symbol relates to the first special symbol determination, or the second special symbol determination The winning start opening information indicating whether it is a thing, the setting information of the variation pattern of the special symbol, the information indicating the gaming state of the gaming machine 1 and the like are included. Therefore, by analyzing the variation start command, the type and result of the special symbol determination can be specified. That is, it is possible to specify whether it is a jackpot or a loss, and if it is a jackpot, what kind of jackpot it is. Further, by specifying whether or not the variation pattern is a variation pattern for losing based on the setting information of the variation pattern, it is possible to determine whether it is necessary to perform the reachable effect or the reachless effect. . Further, similarly, the variation time of the special symbol can be specified based on the setting information of the variation pattern. Further, the current gaming state of the gaming machine 1 can be specified based on the information indicating the gaming state.

When the sub CPU 91 analyzes the fluctuation start command, based on the analysis result, the sub CPU 91 executes the fluctuation effect pattern setting process for setting the fluctuation effect pattern of the fluctuation effect associated with the fluctuation display of the special symbol (step S163). By performing this variation effect pattern setting process, the variation mode of the effect symbol, the presence/absence of the reach effect, the presence/absence of the pseudo effect, the type of the effect pattern forming the reach symbol, the type/content of the reach effect, the pseudo effect effect , The type of effect symbol to be stopped and displayed, etc. are determined. This variation effect pattern setting process will be described later in detail based on FIG.

Subsequent to the process of step S163, the sub CPU 91 performs various notice effects (eg, step-up effect, dialogue notice, group notice) executed when the effect symbol is variably displayed in the change effect pattern set in the process of step S163. (Not shown, cut-in, etc.) is executed (step S164). This notice effect pattern setting process will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

Subsequent to the process of step S164, the sub CPU 91 executes the stage suggestion effect pattern setting process of setting the effect pattern of the stage suggestion effect described above with reference to FIGS. 15 to 19 (step S172). The stage suggestive effect pattern setting process is as described above with reference to FIG.

Next, the sub CPU 91 issues a variation effect start command for instructing the start of the variation effect in the variation effect pattern set in the process of step S163 and the execution of the notice effect in the notice effect pattern set in the process of step S164. It is set in the RAM 93 (step S174).

This variation effect start command includes at least information indicating the variation effect pattern set by the process of step S163 and information indicating the notice effect pattern set by the process of step S164, and the command of step S47. It is transmitted to the image and sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120 by the transmission process (see FIG. 49). As a result, the variation effect and the notice effect for which the effect pattern is determined in the sub-control board 90 are realized by the audiovisual control board 100 and the lamp control board 120.

In the step suggestion effect pattern setting process of step S172 described above with reference to FIG. 17, when the stage suggestion effect pattern is set, in the process of step S174, the variation effect pattern set in the process of step S163 is used. The variation effect start command for instructing the start of the variation effect, the notice effect in the notice effect pattern set in the process of step S164, and the execution of the stage suggestion effect in the stage suggestion effect pattern set in the process of step S172 is a sub RAM 93. Is set to. When the variation effect start command is transmitted to the image sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120, the variation effect, the notice effect, and the stage suggestion effect for which the effect pattern is determined in the sub control board 90 are image sound. It will be realized by the control board 100 and the lamp control board 120.

Subsequent to the process of step S174, the sub CPU 91 updates the holding number stored in the sub RAM 93 to a value obtained by subtracting "1" (step S175). Specifically, when the fluctuation start command received from the main control board 80 is to notify the start of the variable display of the first special symbol, the value obtained by subtracting "1" from the number of holding of the first special symbol determination. To update. On the other hand, when the received variation start command is for notifying the start of the variation display of the second special symbol, the holding number of the second special symbol determination is updated to a value obtained by subtracting "1".

[Variation effect pattern setting process by sub-control board 90]
58 is a detailed flowchart of the variation effect pattern setting process in step S163 of FIG. 57, and here, the variation effect pattern setting executed when the variation start command related to the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state is received. The processing will be described. Sub CPU91, following the processing of step S162, sets the effect design which is finally fixedly displayed (main stop) on the display screen 70 in association with the stop display of the first special symbol (or the second special symbol) (step. S1631). Specifically, based on the symbol setting information included in the variation start command received from the main control board 80, whether the special symbol indicating the big hit (big hit symbol) is stopped and displayed at the end of the symbol fluctuation, or It is specified whether or not the special symbol indicating the loss (missing symbol) is stopped and displayed. Then, when it is specified that the jackpot design is stopped and displayed, a production design for notifying the jackpot is set as a production design to be stopped permanently (for example, a production design showing double eyes), and the lost design is stopped and displayed. When it is specified, the effect design for notifying the loss is set. In addition, when setting the effect design for notifying the loss, when notifying the loss after performing the reach effect, set the reach lose eye as the effect pattern for notifying the loss and perform the reach effect. In the case of notifying of the loss without a hit, a streak is set as an effect design for notifying the loss.

For example, when a variation start command related to the first special symbol determination including the symbol setting information indicating that the 5R probability variation A or the 5R probability variation B has been won is received, the first fixed effect symbol stored in the sub ROM 92. By referring to the selection table, the effect symbol to be confirmed and displayed is selected. In the first fixed effect design selection table, 15 random number values are associated with "777" and 15 random number values are associated with "333", and "111" and "222" are associated with each other. , “444”, “555”, “666”, “888”, and “999” are associated with ten random number values. The sub CPU 91 acquires the value when the fluctuation start command is received as the selected random number with respect to the selected random number that is appropriately updated each time the above-described random number updating process is performed, and the three effect symbols corresponding to the acquired selected random numbers. By selecting the combination from the first fixed effect symbol selection table, the effect symbol to be fixedly displayed is selected. In the present embodiment, the selected random number can take 100 random number values from “0” to “99”. For this reason, the rate at which “777” or “333” is selected is 15% (=15/100×100), and the rate at which other seven types of combinations of three effect symbols are selected is Is also 10% (=10/100×100).

Therefore, "777" and "333" are selected as the three effect symbols to be confirmed and displayed, and the above-described effect based on FIG. 13 is executed during the jackpot game, and "777" and "333". There is a case where other than is selected and the above-described effect based on FIG. 14 is executed during the jackpot game.

On the other hand, when the variation start command relating to the first special symbol determination including the symbol setting information indicating that the player has won the 5R normal A or the 5R normal B is received, the second fixed effect stored in the sub ROM 92. By referring to the symbol selection table, the effect symbol to be confirmed and displayed is selected. In this second fixed effect design selection table, 15 random number values are associated with each of the six types of "111", "222", "444", "666", "888", and "999". Has been. "555" is associated with 10 random number values, and "777" and "333" are not associated with random number values. The sub CPU 91 acquires the value at the time of receiving the fluctuation start command as the selected random number with respect to the selected random number that is appropriately updated each time the above-described random number updating process is performed, and selects one of the three effect symbols corresponding to the acquired selected random number. By selecting the combination to be read from the second fixed effect symbol selection table, the effect symbol to be fixedly displayed is selected. As described above, since the selected random number can take 100 random numbers, the ratio of selecting “111”, “222”, “444”, “666”, “888”, or “999” is all. 15% (=15/100×100), the rate of selecting “555” is 10% (=10/100×100), and the rate of selecting “777” or “333” is It is 0%.

In this way, when 5R normal A or 5R normal B is selected as the type of jackpot related to the first special symbol determination, three effect symbols indicating “777” and “333” are definitely displayed. Therefore, the effect illustrated in FIG. 13 is not executed during the jackpot game, and the effect illustrated in FIG. 14 is executed.

Next, the sub CPU 91, based on the setting information of the variation pattern of the special symbol included in the received variation start command, whether or not it is necessary to perform the reachable effect along with the variation display of the special symbol this time. Is determined (step S1632). Here, when it is determined that it is not necessary to perform the effect with reach (step S1632: NO), the variable effect pattern of the effect without reach is set (step S1633). For example, any one of the effect random numbers acquired in the process of step S161 is selected from the reach-free variation effect pattern selection table in which a plurality of types of variation effect patterns for reach-less effect are associated with each variation pattern of the special symbol. The variation effect pattern is read out, and information indicating the variation effect pattern is set in the sub RAM 93.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines that it is necessary to perform the effect with reach (step S1632: YES), it sets the variable effect pattern of the effect with reach (step S1634). For example, from the reach effect variation effect pattern selection table in which a plurality of types of effect effect variations with reach are associated with each combination of the determination result of the special symbol determination and the variation pattern of the special symbol, from step S161. Any one fluctuating effect pattern corresponding to the effect random number acquired in the processing is read out, and information indicating the fluctuating effect pattern is set in the sub RAM 93.

By performing the process of step S1633 or the process of step S1634, in which variation pattern the effect design is variably displayed, which reach effect is performed when the reach effect is performed, and when the reach effect is developed. Will determine how to develop reach production.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a variation effect start command for instructing the start of variation effect in the variation effect pattern set in the processing of step S1633 (or the processing of step S1634) is issued from the sub-control board 90 to the audiovisual control board. By being transmitted to 100 (and the lamp control board 120), the variable effect including the variable display of the effect symbol is realized.

[Preliminary effect pattern setting process by sub-control board 90]
FIG. 59 is a detailed flowchart of the notice effect pattern setting process in step S164 of FIG. Sub CPU91 performs a basic notice production pattern setting processing as illustrated in Drawing 59 following the change production pattern setting processing of Step S163 (Step S165). Examples of the basic notice production here include the above-mentioned step-up notice, dialogue notice, group notice, and cut-in. The basic notice effect pattern setting process in step S165 will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

Next, the sub CPU 91, of the confirmation notification effects described above with reference to FIG. 20, a demonstration notification effect effect pattern that is executed when the game is controlled in the normal game state, the probability variation game state, or the time saving game state. The confirmation notification effect pattern setting process for setting is executed (step S166). The confirmation notification effect pattern setting process in step S166 will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

Subsequently, the sub CPU 91 executes the preliminary suggestion effect pattern setting process for setting the effect pattern of the preliminary suggestion effect described above with reference to FIGS. 30 to 33 (step S167). The preliminary suggestion effect pattern setting process in step S167 will be described later in detail with reference to FIG.

Subsequent to the process of step S167, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not the hold effect flag stored in the sub RAM 93 is set to “ON” (step S168). If it is determined that the hold effect flag is set to "ON" (step S168: YES), the hold effect flag is set to "OFF" (step S169).

[Basic notice effect pattern setting process by sub control board 90]
FIG. 60 is a detailed flowchart of the basic notice effect pattern setting process in step S165 of FIG. Sub CPU91, following the variation production pattern setting processing of step S163, acquires and stores the basic notice production random number, as illustrated in FIG. 60 (step S1651). Specifically, the basic announcement effect random number is updated to a value obtained by adding "1" every time the random number updating process of step S46 described above (see FIG. 49) is performed, and the sub CPU 91 receives the fluctuation start command. The count value of is acquired as the basic notification effect random number, and the acquired basic notification effect random number is stored in the sub RAM 93.

Subsequent to the process of step S1651, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not the holding effect flag stored in the sub RAM 93 is set to “ON” (step S1652). Here, when it is determined that the hold effect flag is not set to "ON" (step S1652: NO), the first control state basic notice effect pattern selection table is read from the sub ROM 92 and set in the sub RAM 93 (step). S1653). Conversely, when it is determined that the holding effect flag is set to "ON" (step S1652: YES), the second control state basic notice effect pattern selection table is read from the sub ROM 92 and set in the sub RAM 93 (step S1652). S1654).

Sub CPU91 performs the basic notice production pattern selection processing following the processing of step S1653 or the processing of step S1654 (step S1655). In the first control state basic notice effect pattern selection table set in the sub RAM 93 in the process of step S1653 and in the second control state basic notice effect pattern selection table set in the sub RAM 93 in the process of step S1654, A plurality of determination results of special symbol determination (big hit or loss), variation patterns of the first special symbol, and various basic notice effects (in the present embodiment, step-up notice, dialogue notice, group notice, cut-in, etc.) The effect pattern and the random number value are associated with each other. The sub CPU 91, in step S1655, the determination result of the first special symbol determination and the variation pattern of the first special symbol specified based on the variation start command received from the main control board 80, and the basic obtained in the process of step S1651. One basic notice effect pattern is selected by reading out an effect pattern of the basic notice effect corresponding to the notice effect random number from the basic notice effect pattern selection table set in the sub RAM 93. As a result, the step-up notice production pattern, the dialogue notice production pattern, the group notice production pattern, and the cut-in production pattern are selected. Then, the information indicating the selected basic notice effect pattern is set in the sub RAM 93 as basic notice effect setting information (step S1656).

The variable effect start command including the setting information of the basic notice effect set in the process of step S1656 is transmitted to the image acoustic control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120) by the command transmission process of step S47 (see FIG. 49). To be done. As a result, the basic announcement effect in which the effect pattern is set in the sub control board 90 is realized by the image and sound control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120).

(About the basic notice effect pattern selection table for the first control state)
In the present embodiment, the first control state basic notice effect pattern selection table set in the sub RAM 93 in the process of step S1653 is configured as follows. That is, in the first control state basic notice effect pattern selection table, with respect to the step-up notice, when "without step-up notice" is combined, eight types of effect patterns are defined. Also, regarding the speech notice, six types of effect patterns are defined, including “no speech notice”. With regard to the group notice, two types of effect patterns are stipulated, including “no group notice”. With regard to cut-in, when "without cut-in" is combined, five types of effect patterns are defined. Therefore, it can be said that 17 (=8 types+6 types+2 types+5 types-4) basic notice effects are prepared in the first control state basic notice effect pattern selection table.

(About the basic notice effect pattern selection table for the second control state)
On the other hand, the second control state basic notice effect pattern selection table set in the sub RAM 93 in the process of step S1654 is configured as follows in the present embodiment. That is, in the second control state basic notice effect pattern selection table, with respect to the step-up notice, three types of effect patterns are defined when "no step-up notice" is added. With regard to the dialog announcement, three types of effect patterns are defined including "no dialog announcement". With regard to the group notice, two types of effect patterns are stipulated, including “no group notice”. With regard to cut-in, three types of effect patterns are defined when “no cut-in” is combined. Therefore, it can be said that seven (=3 types+3 types+2 types+3 types-4) basic notice effects are prepared in the second control state basic notice effect pattern selection table.

As described above, in the first control state basic notice effect pattern selection table, 17 basic notice effects are prepared, while in the second control state basic notice effect pattern selection table, the first control state There are 7 basic notice effects, which are 10 less than 17 in the basic notice effect pattern selection table for use.

Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the hold effect flag is set to "ON" (when it is determined to be "YES" in step S1652), the hold effect flag is set to "OFF". As compared with the case (YES in step S1652), there is an advantage that the number of processes relating to the basic notice effect pattern setting process in FIG. 60 can be reduced. In addition, since the prescribed effect patterns of the second control state basic notice effect pattern selection table are smaller than those of the first control state basic notice effect pattern selection table, the data capacity thereof is the first control state basic notice effect. It is smaller than the pattern selection table.

By the way, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the sub CPU 91 receives the hold command from the main control board 80 in the first interrupt process of step S51 in FIG. 49, the icon change as apparent from the notation of FIG. The setting process related to the effect (step S517), the setting process related to the expected image change effect (step S518), the setting process related to the expected effect (step S519), and the setting process related to the sign effect (step S521) are performed. Be seen. Therefore, when the hold command is received in the first interrupt processing, the processing of the sub CPU 91 increases. In other words, when the state in which the sub CPU 91 has not received the hold command is the first control state, the sub CPU 91 receives the hold command, and thus the second control state in which more processing is performed than in the first control state. Become.

As described above, when the sub CPU 91 is in the second state, it is determined that the command is received in the second interrupt process (step S53 in FIG. 49) following the first interrupt process (in step S14 in FIG. 56). If "YES" is determined) and the command is determined to be a fluctuation start command (if "YES" is determined in step S15 of FIG. 56), the series of processes illustrated in FIG. There is a concern that the load on the sub CPU 91 will increase because it is executed continuously with one interrupt process.

Therefore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the processing proceeds from step S516 onward in FIG. 50 to the above-described second control state, the sub CPU 91 causes the holding effect flag to be “ON” in the processing of step S515. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1652 of FIG. 60 that the holding effect flag is set to “ON”, the basic notice effect is usually referred to by referring to the first control state basic notice effect pattern selection table. Where the pattern is set, the basic notice production pattern is set by referring to the second control state basic notice production pattern selection table instead of the first control state basic notice production pattern selection table. As a result, as described above, the processing relating to the basic notice effect pattern setting processing in FIG. 60 is reduced, and it is possible to prevent the sub CPU 91 from being overloaded.

The gaming machine 1 that switches the basic notice effect pattern selection table and executes the basic notice effect pattern setting process of FIG. 60 based on such a holding effect flag can be regarded as the following gaming machine.

Determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player (for example, a jackpot game) (for example, the main CPU 81 that executes the jackpot determination process of step S308 of FIG. 42),
When the determination means determines that the special game is executed, a special game execution means for executing the special game (for example, the main CPU 81 for executing the special winning opening/closing control processing in step S6 of FIG. 39),
Effect execution means for executing an effect in a predetermined effect pattern (image display device 7, speaker 38, frame lamp 37, board lamp 5, movable decorative member 14, vibration motor 128, etc.)
And a production control means (for example, a sub CPU 91) for controlling execution of production,
The effect control means,
When the effect pattern is set in the first control state (for example, in the first interrupt process of FIG. 50, the processing of step S516 and thereafter is not executed, and the sub CPU 91 has steps S1655 and S1656 when the hold effect flag is "OFF". No.) and when the effect pattern is set in the second control state in which more processing is performed than in the first control state (for example, the processing from step S516 is executed in the first interrupt processing of FIG. 50). Then, when the sub CPU 91 executes the processing of steps S1655 and S1656 with the hold effect flag being “ON”),
In the second control state, an effect pattern of an effect that does not include a predetermined effect (for example, a predetermined basic notice effect) in which the effect pattern is set in the first control state is set. ..

In the present embodiment, since the first control state basic notice effect pattern selection table is referred to in the first control state, 17 basic notice effects are prepared as described above. On the other hand, in the second control state, since the second control state basic notice effect pattern selection table is referred to, only seven basic notice effects are prepared. Therefore, in the second control state, the effect pattern of the basic notice effect that does not include the 10 (=17-7) basic notice effects in which the effect pattern may be set in the first control state. Is set. As a result, it is possible to prevent the burden on the sub CPU 91 from becoming excessive.

[Decision notification effect pattern setting process by sub control board 90]
FIG. 61 is a detailed flowchart of the confirmation notification effect pattern setting process in step S166 of FIG. Sub CPU91 performs the following processes illustrated in Drawing 61 following the basic notice production pattern setting processing of Step S165. That is, the sub CPU 91, based on the information indicating the determination result of the first special symbol determination included in the variation start command related to the first special symbol determination received from the main control board 80, the first special symbol determination this time It is determined whether or not the determination result of "is a big hit" (step S1661). Here, when the sub CPU 91 determines that it is not the “big hit” (step S1661: NO), the process proceeds to the pre-indication effect pattern setting process (see FIG. 59) of step S167 described later.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the determination result of the first special symbol determination this time is “big hit” (step S1661: YES), the sub CPU 91 acquires and stores the confirmation notification effect random number (step S1662). Specifically, the confirmation notification effect random number is updated to a value obtained by adding "1" every time the random number update process of step S46 described above (see FIG. 49) is performed, and the sub CPU 91 receives the fluctuation start command. The count value of is acquired as the confirmation notification effect random number, and the acquired confirmation notification effect random number is stored in the sub RAM 93.

Subsequent to the process of step S1662, the sub CPU 91 reads the finalization notification effect pattern selection table from the sub ROM 92 and sets it in the sub RAM 93 (step S1663), and executes the finalization notification effect pattern selection process (step S1664).

In the above-mentioned confirmation notification effect pattern selection table, the variation pattern of the first special symbol (variation pattern for jackpot), the effect pattern of various confirmation notification effects in the normal gaming state (see FIG. 20), and the random number value correspond. It is attached. The sub CPU 91, in the step S1664, the variation pattern of the first special symbol specified based on the variation start command related to the "big hit" of the first special symbol determination received from the main control board 80, and the process of step S1662. The effect pattern of the final notification effect is selected by reading the effect pattern of the final notification effect corresponding to the acquired final notification effect random number from the final notification effect pattern selection table set in the sub RAM 93. Then, the information indicating the effect pattern of the selected confirmation notification effect is set in the sub RAM 93 as the setting information of the confirmation notification effect (step S1665). By transmitting the variation effect start command including the setting information of the finalization notification effect to the image and sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120, the finalization notification effect is realized.

Although detailed description is omitted, there may be a case where two or more confirmation notification effect effect patterns are set by executing the confirmation notification effect pattern setting process described above with reference to FIG. 61. In this case, within the same variation of the variation display of the first special symbol in the normal gaming state, two or more confirmation notification effects will be executed. Further, in the confirmation notification effect pattern selection table, since the random number value is associated with the effect pattern of "no confirmation notification effect", the confirmation notification effect is always executed in the case of "big hit". Instead, the final notification effect is executed for a part of the case where the determination result of the first special symbol determination in the normal gaming state is "big hit". Further, the execution condition, the execution timing, the effect mode, and the like of the confirmation notification effect are as described above with reference to FIG. 20, so detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

In addition, here, regarding the fixed notification production pattern selection processing which is executed when the sub CPU 91 receives a fluctuation start command related to the “big hit” of the first special symbol determination when the game is controlled in the normal game state. explained. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 receives the variation start command relating to the second special symbol determination when the game is controlled in the probability variation game state (or the time saving game state), it is set in the sub RAM 93 in the process of step S1663. Since the same processing as that described above based on FIG. 61 is performed except that the confirmation notification effect pattern selection table is different, the confirmation notification in the probability variation game state (or time saving game state) described above based on FIG. The description of the finalized notification effect pattern setting process regarding effects is omitted.

[Pre-indication production pattern setting process by sub control board 90]
FIG. 62 is a detailed flowchart of the advance suggestion effect pattern setting process in step S167 of FIG. 59, and is a flowchart illustrating the process of setting the advance suggestion effect effect pattern described above with reference to FIGS. 30 to 33.

Sub CPU91 performs the following processes illustrated in Drawing 62 following the fixed notice production pattern setting processing in Step S166 of Drawing 59. That is, the sub CPU 91 obtains/stores the preliminary suggestion effect random number (step S1671). Specifically, the preliminary suggestion effect random number is updated to a value obtained by adding "1" every time the random number updating process of step S46 (see FIG. 49) described above is performed, and the sub CPU 91 receives the fluctuation start command. The count value of is acquired as a preliminary suggestion effect random number, and the acquired preliminary suggestion effect random number is stored in the sub RAM 93.

Next, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not to execute the pre-indication effect based on whether or not the acquired pre-indication effect random number matches any of the random number values regarding the pre-indication effect stored in the sub ROM 92 in advance. The determination is made (step S1672). Here, when it is determined that the preliminary suggestion effect is not executed (step S1672: NO), the process proceeds to step S168 of FIG. 59 described above.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines to execute the preliminary suggestion effect (step S1672: YES), for example, the information indicating the variation effect pattern set in the process of step S163 and the basic notice set in the process of step S165. Based on the information indicating the effect pattern, the effect executed during the variable display of the first special symbol this time is specified (step S1673).

Next, the sub CPU 91 determines the number of effects to be pre-indicated by the prior suggestion effect (that is, the number of effect suggestion images displayed in the effect display of FIGS. 31H and 31I) (step S1674). ). In the present embodiment, the number of effects to be suggested in advance is selected by lottery using random numbers. For example, a table in which the determination result of the first special symbol determination, the variation pattern of the first special symbol, the number of effects suggested in advance, and the random number value are associated with each other is stored in the sub ROM 92, and the variation start command is stored. The number of pre-implied effects corresponding to the pre-indicated effect random number acquired by the received timing and the determination result of the first special symbol and the variation pattern of the first special symbol specified based on the variation start command are described above. As an example, a method of determining the number of effects to be suggested in advance by reading from the table of No. In this case, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination this time is “miss” and the variation pattern of the first special symbol having a relatively short variation time is selected, the number of effects to be suggested in advance is Less, if the determination result of this first special symbol determination is "big hit", or if the variation pattern of the first special symbol that the variation time is relatively long even if it is "miss" is selected It is preferable that the random numbers are distributed so that the number of effects to be suggested in advance is large.

Following the process of step S1674, an effect suggested in advance is selected (step S1675). For example, when there are 7 effects specified in the process of step S1673 and the number of effects suggested in advance determined in the process of step S1674 is “4”, 4 effects are selected from the above 7 effects. A lottery is conducted to select four effects. Then, information indicating the effect suggestion image (see FIG. 30) corresponding to the selected effect is set in the sub RAM 93 as the setting information of the preliminary suggestion effect (step S1676). By transmitting the variation effect start command including the setting information of the advance suggestion effect to the image sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120, the advance suggestion effect described above based on FIGS. 30 to 33 is realized. Become.

[Round game start command reception processing by sub control board 90]
FIG. 63 is a detailed flowchart of the round game start command reception processing in step S23 of FIG. When the sub CPU 91 determines that the command received from the main control board 80 is the round game start command (step S21: YES), the sub CPU 91 executes the following process. That is, as illustrated in FIG. 63, it is determined whether or not the received command is the valid round game start command transmitted from the main control board 80 according to the process of step S609 of FIG. 46 (step S231). ). Here, when it is determined that the received command is not the valid round game start command (step S231: NO), the process proceeds to step S236 described later.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the received command is the valid round game start command (step S231: YES), for example, based on whether or not the opening command related to the jackpot of the first special symbol determination is received. Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit this time is the first big hit (step S232). Here, when it is determined that it is not the first hit (step S232: NO), that is, when it is a big hit of the second special symbol determination, as is apparent from the notation of FIG. 6C, of the second special symbol determination Since there is no normal jackpot (the effective round game is not executed) for the jackpot, a command for instructing to execute a launch promotion effect that prompts the player to hit a game ball aiming at the V winning opening 287 is set in the sub RAM 93 (step S233). This command is transmitted to the image and sound control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120) by the command transmission process in step S47 of FIG. 49, whereby the launch promotion effect described above based on FIGS. 13B and 13C is obtained. Will be executed.

When the sub CPU 91 determines that the big hit of this time is the first hit (step S232: YES), the big hit game of this time determines whether or not the big hit game started according to the symbol assortment of the specific symbol. (Step S234). Specifically, by the process of step S1631 of FIG. 58, it is determined whether or not three effect symbols for notifying the big hit of “777” or “333” have been selected. Here, when it is determined that it is a jackpot game started according to the symbol alignment of the specific symbol (step S234: YES), that is, the doublet of "777" or "333" is fixedly displayed and the jackpot game is started. If so, the process of step S233 described above is executed.

On the other hand, when the sub-CPU 91 determines that the big hit game this time is not the big hit game started according to the symbol arrangement of the specific symbol (step S234: NO), that is, a symbol other than "777" or "333". When the jackpot game is started according to the set, a command for executing the in-round effect without the launch promotion effect is set in the sub RAM 93 (step S235). This command is transmitted to the image acoustic control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120) by the command transmission processing in step S47 of FIG. 49, so that the mid-round effect described above based on FIGS. Will be executed.

Next, when the sub CPU 91 executes the process of step S233, the process of step S235, or determines that the received command is not the valid round game start command (step S231: NO), the reception It is determined whether or not the executed command is the second special winning opening/closing round game start command transmitted from the main control board 80 according to the processing of step S610 of FIG. 46 (step S236).

When the sub CPU 91 determines that the received command is the second big winning opening opening/closing round game start command (step S236: YES), the second big winning opening opening/closing game round for opening/closing the second big winning opening 28 A command for executing the medium effect is set in the sub RAM 93 (step S237). This command is transmitted to the image and sound control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120) by the command transmission process in step S47 of FIG. Based on 14 (F) to (H), the above-described effect during the round will be executed.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 20, the second special symbol at the start of the round game of the predetermined round (for example, the first round) that opens and closes the second special winning opening 28. The judgment right is held, and the held right includes one that will be judged as a “big hit”, and it is determined whether or not to execute the special winning sound output effect. The special winning sound output production as the finalized notification production is executed on condition that the production lottery for winning is won.

The sub CPU 91 executes, for example, the following processing in order to realize such a special winning sound output effect. That is, following the processing of step S237, it is determined whether or not the current round game is a predetermined round (eg, first round) round game that opens and closes the second special winning opening 28 (step S238). In addition, in the present embodiment, since the predetermined round is set to the first round, the sub CPU 91 adds "1" to the number of receptions every time the second special winning opening/closing round game start command is received. A predetermined round (eg, the first round) in which the round game opens and closes the second special winning opening 28 based on whether or not the number of receptions after the update is “1” is executed by updating the value. ) It is determined whether or not it is a round game.

Next, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the current round game is the round game of the predetermined round (for example, the first round) that opens and closes the second special winning opening 28 (step S238: YES), it is suspended. It is determined whether or not the right to be determined as the “big hit” is included in the right of the second special symbol determination (step S239). Specifically, in one or a plurality of pieces of advance determination information stored in the sub RAM 93 by the process of step S515 of FIG. 50, advance determination indicating that the determination result of the second special symbol determination is “big hit” Based on whether or not the information is included, it is determined whether or not the right to be held as the second special symbol determination includes one that is to be determined as a "big hit".

Subsequently, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the right to be held as the second special symbol determination includes one that is to be determined as a “big hit” (step S239: YES), the special winning combination An effect lottery for determining whether or not to execute the sound output effect is performed (step S240). Specifically, regarding the special winning sound output effect random number that is appropriately updated each time the random number updating process is performed, the count at the time when the first second special winning opening opening/closing round game start command is received in this big hit game. A value is acquired as a special winning sound output effect random number, and it is based on whether or not the special winning sound output effect random number matches a random value (winning value) regarding the special winning sound effect effect random number stored in advance in the sub ROM 92. Then, it is determined whether or not the special winning sound output production is performed.

Based on the lottery result of step S240, the sub CPU 91 determines whether or not to perform the special winning sound output effect (step S241), and when determining that the special winning sound output effect is to be performed (step S241: YES), The setting information of the winning sound output effect is set in the sub RAM 93 (step S242). In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the second special winning opening sensor 281 during the second big winning opening opening/closing game for opening and closing the second special winning opening 28, a prize notification for notifying that fact is given. The command is transmitted to the sub control board 90 by the main CPU 81. On the other hand, when the sub CPU 91 receives the above winning notification command during the second big winning opening opening/closing game of the first round, the setting information of the special winning sound output effect is set in the sub RAM 93. As a condition, a special winning sound output effect command is set in the sub RAM 93. This special winning sound output effect command is transmitted to the image acoustic control board 100 and the lamp control board 120 by the command transmitting process in step S47 of FIG. 49, whereby the special winning sound output effect is realized.

The setting information of the special winning sound output effect is, for example, the timing at which the second special winning opening/closing round game start command for notifying that the second special winning opening/closing game of the second round is started is received. Since it is discarded from the sub RAM 93, the special winning sound output effect is not performed after the first round second big winning opening opening/closing game is completed.

Subsequent to the process of step S242, the sub CPU 91 sets the confirmation notification flag stored in the sub RAM 93 to "ON" (step S243). This confirmation notification flag is a flag indicating whether or not a confirmation notification effect (here, a special winning sound output effect) is executed during the jackpot game, and is "ON" in response to the processing of step S242 being executed. Is set to.

In the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, during the fifth round game in which the second special winning opening 28 is opened (fifth second special winning opening opening/closing round game), the special processing described above with reference to FIG. 20. Although the V prize notification effect may be executed, this special V prize notification effect includes the right to be judged as a "big hit" in the right of the second special symbol judgment being held. It has the same function as the special winning sound output production in that it is a finalized notification production that notifies that there is. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the special V winning notification production is not performed when the special winning sound output production is executed. Is the sub CPU 91 executing the special V winning notification production? A process for determining whether or not to execute the special V winning award notification effect is performed with reference to the above-described confirmation notification flag indicating whether or not. Note that this processing will be described later in detail based on FIG.

Returning to the explanation of FIG. 63, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the received command is not the second special winning opening/closing round game start command (step S236: NO), that is, the received command is step S612 of FIG. In the case of the first special winning opening opening/closing round game start command transmitted from the main control board 80 by the processing of, the command for instructing execution of a predetermined in-round effect related to the first special winning opening opening/closing game is set in the sub RAM 93. To do. This command is transmitted to the image/sound control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120) by the command transmission process in step S47 of FIG. 49, whereby the first special winning opening/closing game in which the effect pattern is set in the sub control board 90. The round game according to is to be realized.

[V winning command reception processing by the sub control board 90]
FIG. 64 is a detailed flowchart of the V winning command receiving process in step S26 of FIG. When the sub CPU 91 determines that the command received from the main control board 80 is the V winning command (step S25: YES), for example, based on whether or not the opening command related to the jackpot of the first special symbol determination is received. Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit this time is the first big hit (step S261). Here, when it is determined that it is not the first hit (step S261: NO), that is, the second special symbol determination in the "probability variation game state" or the "time saving game state" is a big hit and the big hit game of this time is executed. If yes, it is determined whether or not the confirmation notification flag stored in the sub RAM 93 is set to "ON" (step S264). If it is determined that the confirmation notification flag is set to "ON" (step S264: YES), the confirmation notification flag is set to "OFF" (step S265). In this way, when the confirmation notification flag is set to “ON”, since the special winning sound output effect has been executed, the command for instructing the execution of the normal V prize notification effect is set in the sub RAM 93. (Step S263). This command is transmitted to the image/sound control board 100 (and the lamp control board 120) by the command transmission process in step S47 of FIG. 49, whereby the V winning notification effect described above based on FIG. 13D is realized. It will be.

On the other hand, when the sub-CPU 91 determines that the big hit of this time is the first hit (step S261: YES), the big hit game of this time is in accordance with the symbol arrangement of the specific symbol, similarly to the determination process of step S234 of FIG. It is determined whether or not it is a jackpot game started by (step S262). Here, when it is determined that the big hit game of this time is the big hit game started in accordance with the symbol arrangement of the specific symbol (step S262: YES), that is, 3 showing a doublet of "777" or "333". When one effect symbol is definitely displayed and the jackpot game of this time is started, the process of step S263 is executed in order to realize the V winning notification effect described above based on FIG. 13(D). On the other hand, when it is determined that the big hit game of this time is not the big hit game started according to the symbol arrangement of the specific symbol (step S262: NO), that is, 3 showing a doublet other than "777" and "333". When one jackpot game is started with the final display of two effect symbols, as described above with reference to FIG. 14, in order not to execute the V prize notification effect even if the game ball wins the V prize, A series of V winning command reception processing is completed without executing the processing of step S263, and the processing is advanced to step S30 of FIG.

In addition, when the sub CPU 91 determines that the confirmation notification flag is not set to “ON” (step S264: NO), similarly to the process of step S239 in FIG. 63, the suspended second special symbol determination is performed. It is determined whether or not the right includes one that is to be determined as a "big hit" (step S266). Here, when it is determined that one that is to be determined as a “big hit” is not included (step S266: NO), the process proceeds to step S263.

On the other hand, if the sub CPU 91 determines that the right to be determined as the “big hit” is included in the reserved second special symbol determination rights (step S266: YES), in FIG. By performing the same process as the process of step S240, an effect lottery for determining whether or not to execute the special V winning notification effect is executed (step S267). Then, based on the result of the effect lottery, it is determined whether or not to execute the special V prize notification information effect (step S268), and when it is determined not to execute the special V prize notification effect (step S268: NO), The process of step S263 is executed. On the contrary, if it is determined that the special V winning notification production is to be executed (step S268: YES), the special V winning notification production command for instructing execution of the special V winning notification production is set in the sub RAM 93 (step S269). This special V winning notification effect command is transmitted to the image and sound control board 100 and the lamp control board 120 by the command transmission process in step S47 of FIG. 49, whereby the special notification effect as the final notification effect described above with reference to FIG. The V winning notification effect is realized.

[Interrupt processing by the image and sound control board 100]
Next, with reference to FIG. 65, an interrupt process executed in the image and sound control board 100 will be described. Here, FIG. 65 is a flowchart illustrating an interrupt process executed in the image and sound control board 100. The image and sound control board 100 repeatedly executes a series of processing illustrated in FIG. 65 at regular time intervals (for example, 33 milliseconds) during normal operation except for special cases such as power-on and power-off. ..

First, the image and sound control CPU 101 executes an image display control process for controlling the image display on the display screen 70 based on the command received from the sub control board 90 (step S71). This image display control process will be described later in detail based on FIG. 66.

Following the processing of step S71, the image and sound control CPU 101 executes effect sound output control processing for outputting various effect sounds from the speaker 38 in synchronization with or asynchronously with the screen display performed on the display screen 70. Yes (step S72).

Following the processing of step S72, the image and sound control CPU 101 executes data transmission control processing (step S73). Specifically, the data regarding the image and sound control performed in the image and sound control board 100 is transmitted to the sub control board 90. On the other hand, the sub control board 90 transfers the data received from the audiovisual control board 100 to the lamp control board 120 by the data transfer processing in step S33 of FIG. As a result, the frame lamp 37, the panel lamp 5, the movable decorative member 14, and the like are controlled so as to be synchronized with the effect performed by the display screen 70 and the speaker 38.

[Image Display Control Processing by Image Sound Control Board 100]
FIG. 66 is a detailed flowchart of the image display control process in step S71 of FIG. The image and sound control CPU 101 first determines whether or not the command transmitted from the sub control board 90 has been received (step S711). If it is determined that the command is not received (step S711: NO), the process proceeds to step S72.

On the other hand, when the image/audio control CPU 101 determines that the command from the sub control board 90 is received (step S711: YES), the setting information included in the command is set in the control RAM 103 (step S712). Then, based on the setting information set in the control RAM 103, it is determined how the effect image should be displayed on the display screen 70, a display list for controlling the drawing processing of the VDP 104 is created, and a predetermined area of the control RAM 103 is created. (Step S713), and the display list is set in the display list storage area of the VRAM 106 (step S714). The VDP 104 executes the drawing process based on the display list set in the display list storage area, whereby the effect display instructed by the sub control board 90 is realized.

[Timer interrupt processing by lamp control board 120]
Next, the interrupt processing executed in the lamp control board 120 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 67 is a flowchart illustrating an interrupt process executed in the lamp control board 120. The lamp control board 120 transmits a command from the sub-control board 90 and the image-acoustic control board 100 via the sub-control board 90 during normal operation except for special cases such as power-on and power-off. A series of processing illustrated in FIG. 67 is repeatedly executed at regular time intervals based on the data relating to the image and sound control.

The lamp CPU 121 of the lamp control board 120 first executes a data reception process of receiving the data regarding the image and sound control transmitted from the image and sound control board 100 via the sub control board 90 (step S801). The lamp CPU 121, based on the data relating to the image and sound control received by the processing of step S801, synchronizes with the effect produced by the display screen 70 and the speaker 38, the frame lamp 37, the panel lamp 5, the movable decorative member 14, the vibration motor. 128 etc. are controlled.

Following the processing of step S801, the lamp CPU 121 determines whether or not the variation effect start command transmitted from the sub control board 90 has been received (step S802). Here, when it is determined that the variation effect start command is received (step S802: YES), the light emission pattern data corresponding to the setting information included in the received variation effect start command is read from the lamp ROM 122 and set in the lamp RAM 123. By doing so, the light emission pattern of the frame lamp 37, the panel lamp 5, the LEDs incorporated in the movable decoration member 14 is set (step S803). Then, the lamp CPU 121 starts light emission control of each light emitting means based on the set light emission pattern data (step S804).

In this way, the lamp CPU 121 executes the processes of steps S803 and S804, whereby the lamp CPU 121 controls the light emission of the first light emitting group 511 and the third light emitting group 523 described above with reference to FIGS. 28 to 29. become.

Following the processing of step S804, the lamp CPU 121 is instructed to perform the accessory effect for operating the movable decorative member 14 in the present pattern change based on the setting information included in the received change effect start command. It is determined whether or not there is (step S805). Specifically, for example, based on whether or not the setting information indicating the notice effect pattern included in the received variation effect start command is information indicating that the effect effect is executed, the effect effect is generated. Determine if you are instructed to do so. Here, when it is determined that it is instructed to perform the accessory effect (step S805: YES), the operation pattern data corresponding to the setting information included in the received variation effect start command is read from the lamp ROM 122, and the lamp is read. The operation pattern of the movable decorative member 14 is set by setting it in the RAM 123 (step S806). Although not shown in FIG. 67, when the received variation effect start command includes setting information for instructing execution of the effect using the vibration motor 128 (see FIG. 20), the received variation effect start command is received. The vibration pattern data of the vibration motor 128 is set by reading the vibration pattern data corresponding to the setting information included in the above from the lamp ROM 122 and setting it in the lamp RAM 123. Then, it is determined whether or not it is the execution timing of the effect using the vibration motor 128 based on the data relating to the image and sound control received in the processing of step S801. The drive control of the vibration motor 128 is executed based on the generated vibration pattern data. As a result, the effect using the vibration motor 128 described above with reference to FIG. 20 is realized.

Returning to the description of FIG. 67, the lamp CPU 121 executes the process of step S806, determines that the variation effect start command is not received (step S802: NO), or is instructed to perform the accessory effect. If it is determined that the operation pattern of the movable decorative member 14 is not set (step S805: NO), it is determined whether the operation pattern of the movable decorative member 14 is set based on whether the operation pattern data of the movable decorative member 14 is set in the lamp RAM 123. The determination is made (step S807). Here, when it is determined that the operation pattern of the movable decorative member 14 is set (step S807: YES), for example, the movable decorative member 14 is based on the image acoustic control data received by the data reception process of step S801. It is determined whether it is the operation start timing (step S808).

When the lamp CPU 121 determines that it is the operation start timing of the movable decorative member 14 (step S808: YES), the lamp CPU 121 executes the movable decorative member control process of operating the movable decorative member 14 in the operation pattern set in the process of step S806. (Step S809).

The lamp CPU 121 executes the process of step S809, determines that the operation pattern of the movable decorative member 14 is not set (step S807: NO), and determines that it is not the operation start timing of the movable decorative member 14. (Step S808: NO), it is determined whether or not the variation effect end command transmitted from the sub control board 90 has been received (step S810). Here, when it is determined that the variation effect end command has been received (step S810: YES), the light emission control for the final effect for notifying the winning or losing is executed (step S811). Specifically, by reading the light emission pattern data corresponding to the setting information included in the received variation effect end command from the lamp ROM 122 and setting it in the lamp RAM 123, the frame lamp 37, the board lamp 5, and the movable decoration member 14 are read. Set the light emission pattern of the LED etc. built in the. Then, the lamp CPU 121 executes the light emission control of each light emitting means based on the set light emission pattern data until the fixed time elapses.

The lamp CPU 121 receives the hold icon display command transmitted from the sub control board 90 when the lamp CPU 121 executes the process of step S811 or determines that the variation effect end command is not received (step S810: NO). It is determined whether or not (step S812). Here, when it is determined that the hold icon display command has not been received (step S812: NO), a series of interrupt processing ends, and the processing is returned to step S801. Although not shown in FIG. 67, if it is determined in step S812 that the hold icon display command has not been received, the second light emitting group 512 may blink white as described above with reference to FIG. Then, the lamp CPU 121 controls the light emission of the second light emitting group 512.

On the other hand, when the lamp CPU 121 determines that the hold icon display command is received (step S812: YES), the icon change effect pattern information set in the sub RAM 93 in the process of step S5173 of FIG. It is determined whether the command is included (step S813). Here, if the received hold icon display command does not include the icon change effect pattern information, a white hold icon is displayed, and this white hold icon does not change to a special icon, so in step S812. As in the case of “NO”, the lamp CPU 121 controls the light emission of the second light emitting group 512 so that the second light emitting group 512 blinks in white.

When the lamp CPU 121 determines that the received hold icon display command includes the icon change effect pattern information (step S813: YES), the lamp CPU 121 executes the hold-related light emission pattern setting process (step S814). Specifically, the light emission pattern data of the second light emission group 512 corresponding to the icon change effect pattern information included in the received hold icon display command is read from the lamp ROM 122 and set in the lamp RAM 123, whereby the second light emission is performed. The light emission pattern of the group 512 is set.

The lamp CPU 121 can specify the timing at which the hold icon to be read in advance and the display mode of the icon change based on the image-acoustic control data received in the process of step S801. Therefore, the lamp CPU 121 sets the light emission pattern of the second light emission group 512 based on the set light emission pattern and the timing at which the hold icon specified based on the data related to the image and sound control and the display mode of the icon change. The light emission pattern is controlled and changed at a necessary timing. As a result, as described above with reference to FIGS. 29A to 29C, the second light emitting group 512 emits light in a color that is the same as the display color after the change of the hold icon (or the icon) to be read ahead. The production will be realized.

[Modification]
The present invention is not limited to the above embodiment, and may have the following forms, for example. That is, in the above-described embodiment, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination in the normal game state is “big hit”, the second special winning opening 28 (and V winnings) is used without using the first special winning opening 26. The case of executing the jackpot game using the mouth 287) has been described as an example (see FIG. 6B and FIG. 7 ). On the other hand, in another embodiment, when the determination result of the first special symbol determination in the normal game state is “big hit”, at least a part of the big hits, the second big winning opening 28 (and V prize) The big hit game may be executed by using both the mouth 287) and the first big winning opening 26.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the effective round game (corresponding to the 1R round game of FIG. 7A and the 3R round game of FIG. 7B) corresponds to the second special winning opening 28 (and The case where the V winning opening 287) is constituted by one short opening and one long opening has been described as an example. On the other hand, in other embodiments, these effective round games are round games in which the second big winning opening 28 (and the V winning opening 287) are long-opened only once (without short opening), Alternatively, it may be a round game in which the second big winning opening 28 (and the V winning opening 287) are shortly opened a plurality of times (without being longly opened).

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the case where the four types of jackpots related to the first special symbol determination (see FIG. 6(B)) are jackpots in which only a prize ball of substantially 2R is obtained is described as an example. In other embodiments, these four types of jackpots may be jackpots that can win prize balls of 3R or more.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the launch promotion effect for prompting the player to launch the game ball aiming at the V winning opening 287 (see FIGS. 13B and 13C) and the game ball having won the V condition. After the jackpot game is over, neither the V winning notification production that can be performed (see FIGS. 13D and 13E) is executed, or the challenge mode (not informing whether the "probability variation gaming state" or not) The case has been described as an example where performance is executed. On the other hand, in another embodiment, for example, after the jackpot game is over, the production is executed in the challenge mode until the special symbol and the effect symbol are variably displayed 40 times, and the V winning occurs during the jackpot game. If so, the production is executed in the production mode (may be the fierce battle RUSH exemplified in the above embodiment) that definitely informs that the "probability variation game state" is displayed from the variation display of the 41st rotation. You may.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, with respect to the big hit related to the first special symbol determination, the game control described above with reference to FIG. 7 is performed, and the effect control described above with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14 is performed as an example. explained. On the other hand, in another embodiment, for example, a normal jackpot is provided in a part of the jackpot related to the second special symbol determination, and the jackpot related to the second special symbol determination is related to the jackpot related to the first special symbol determination. You may make it perform the above-mentioned game control and effect control similarly.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the case where the present invention is applied to a type of pachinko gaming machine called a so-called V-ST machine has been described. It may be applied to other game machines such as.

Further, it is needless to say that the configuration of the gaming machine 1 and the operation mode of each member described in the above embodiment are merely examples, and the present invention can be realized with other configurations and operation modes. Further, the order of processing, the set value, the random number value, the threshold value used for the determination, and the like in the above-mentioned flowcharts are merely examples, and other orders and values may be used without departing from the scope of the present invention. Needless to say, can be realized. The drawings and the like illustrated in the above embodiment are merely examples, and may be in other modes.

1 gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine), 5 board lamp, 7 image display device, 14 movable decorative member, 21 first starting opening, 22 second starting opening, 23 opening/closing member, 26 first big winning opening, 28 second big Winning hole, 37 frame lamp, 41 1st special symbol display, 42 2nd special symbol display, 44 1st special symbol reservation indicator, 45 2nd special symbol reservation indicator, 70 display screen, 71 reservation icon display area , 72 icon display area, 80 main control board, 81 main CPU, 90 sub control board, 91 sub CPU, 100 image acoustic control board, 101 image acoustic control CPU, 128 vibration motor, 211 first starting opening sensor, 221st 2 starter sensor, 510 first substrate, 511 first emission group, 512 second emission group, 520 second substrate, 523 third emission group.

Claims (1)

Determination means for determining whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player,
Special game execution means for executing the special game when the determination means determines to execute the special game,
And a production control means for controlling execution of production,
The effect control means,
It is possible to execute a hit notification effect that notifies that the special game is determined when the special game is executed, and a confirmation notification effect that notifies that the special game is executed prior to the hit notification effect. ,
There are a first case in which the confirmation notification effect is executed at a first execution timing and a second case in which the confirmation notification effect is executed at a second execution timing.
The gaming machine characterized in that at least one of the execution condition and the performance mode of the finalization notification effect is different between the first case and the second case.

Images